Father the Sonne and the Holy Spirit Indeed it is true that God was knowne in the Trinitie of persons in some sorte by the Fathers who liued vnder the Old Testament before Christs manifestation in the fleshe but the knowledge which they had was obscure and confused in respect of that knowledge which IESVS brought into the worlde at His comming but chiefely this distinct knowledge of the three persons of the Godhead was manifested after Christes Resurrection from the dead and His Glorification for Christ glorified is chiefely the image of the vnuisible God and the brightnesse of His glorie and the engrauen forme of His person And from Christ glorified especially proceedes th' effectuall operation of the Holy Spirit in the soules of His Elect. All tendes to this To let you see that the cleare and distinct knowledge of the Godhead in the Trinitie of the persons proceeded chiefely from the Kingdome of Christ and from His glory Nowe to this God one in essence in three persons The Father the Sonne and the Holie Spirit be all praise honour and glorie for euermore Amen THE LIV. LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST MATTH CHAP. XXVIII verse 20 Teaching them to obserue all things whatsoeuer I haue commanded you and loe I am with you alway vntill the ende of the world Amen MARKE CHAP. XVI verse 16 He that shall beleeue and bee baptized shall bee saued but hee that will not beleeue shall bee damned verse 17 And these tokens shall follow them that beleeue In my Name they shall cast out deuils and shall speake with new tongues verse 18 And shall take away serpentes and if they shall drinke anie deadlie thing it shall not hurt them they shall lay their handes on the sicke and they shall recouer THE last daye Welbeloued Brethren in Christ we began to speake of the nine appearings of the Lord to the Disciples as it is set downe by Matthew and Marke Hee appeared to them in a Mountaine of Galilie vvhere Hee had appointed them to meete Him Wee hearde vvhat vvas the Disciples behauiour The sight of that glorious Majestie made them to fall downe and worship Him yet in the meane time some of them doubted and therefore the LORDE to confirme them drawes neare vnto them and enters into communication with them and in His communing first Hee telles what power and authoritie was giuen Him both in Heauen and earth to the ende Hee might mooue them the more willinglie and chearefullie to vndertake the office of the Apostleship Then when Hee has layed downe this power as a ground of their office and Ministerie Hee sendes them out in the worlde charging them first to goe to all Nations Next to preach to euery creature And thirdly To baptize in the Name and authority of the Father the Sonne and the Holy Spirit Nowe in these wordes first Hee telles them what doctrine they shoulde teach to the worlde then hee makes them a threefolde promise The first is of life and saluation to then that beleeue and are baptised The seconde is a promise of th'extraordinarie and miraculous giftes of the Holie Spirite The thirde is a promise of His owne glorious and powerfull presence with them in discharging of their calling that not for a season but to continue to th' ende of the vvorlde Then in the first wordes which vve haue read He telles them what they should teach not al things not euery thing that they pleased themselues but He sayes Teach them to obserue all thinges whatsoeuer J haue commanded you So Hee restraines the doctrine that they should teach vnto the world vnto that doctrine which Hee Himselfe first had taught them In the 14. Chapter of John vers 26. after Hee has first promised the Holie Spirit to teach His Apostles all thinges then Hee telles vvhat Hee meanes by All these thinges which His Spirite should teach and Hee boundes them and restraines them to that doctrine which Hee Himselfe had taught them before For sayes Hee hee shall bring all thinges to your remembrance which I haue tolde you Euen so here Hee restraines the preaching of th'Apostles to these thinges vvhich Hee Himselfe had taught them So marke this lesson The doctrine of Iesus Christ which Hee deliuered the time that Hee liued in the vvorlde and had His conuersation among men is the grounde the rule and the measure of all true doctrine The Spirit of the Lord Iesus vvhome Hee left behinde Him to bee His vicegerent in th' earth kept preciselie this rule Hee taught not so much as one sentence in substance but that vvhich CHRIST had taught before Th'Apostles vvhome Hee sent out into the worlde declined not one jote from this rule for they taught the vvorlde nothing but that vvhich the Holie Spirite had furnished and suggested vnto them before and that Spirite taught them nothing but that vvhich IESVS had taught them before So that the doctrine of the H. Spirit th'Apostles come all wholly from Iesus as th' only doctor teacher of His Kirke of whom the Father said in His baptisme trāsfiguratiō Heare him So it should be w t ministers and Teachers of the Church to the end of the world they should make Christes doctrine to bee the rule of all their doctrine they should teach nothing but that which Christ teached before them the faithfull Ministers of Christ in all ages haue striuen to doe so they confirmed all their doctrine so farre as they could to the doctrine of Christ Indeede it is true through processe of time corrupt men entred in the Church who respected not God nor His glory nor the well and saluation of men but their owne honour their owne lusts and their bellie who taught the world not the doctrine of Christ the way of life but their own fantasies dreames and traditions Wee may see this lamentable experience this day in the kingdome of the Antichrist What teaches the Pope and his Clergie to the world Not the word of God Not the doctrine of Christ Not that doctrine which the Holy Spirit furnished to the Apostles not that vvhich the Apostles haue left in register this day they make not that to be the rule of their preaching but they teach their owne vanities deuised by themselues they teach mens traditions they teach vnwritten verities as they call them vvhich are for the moste parte altogether repugnant to the doctrine of Christ The Lord saue vs from their doctrine vvherewith they poyson the world and bring men to perdition Now as the Pastors are obliged to teach nothing but the doctrine of Christ so are the people bound to heare and receiue none other doctrine but the doctrine of Christ and for this cause they shoulde pray earnestly for the Holy Spirit who is promised to His owne to illuminate their mindes and to giue them the gift of discretion to discerne spirits as also they should be diligently exercised in reading and considering the Olde and New Testament the writtings of the
vpon Him as guiltie in vs and for our cause and let vs giue Him thankes and praise continuallie because Hee hath giuen His onelie Sonne for vs and Hee hath made Him sinne for vs and Hee hath made Him subject to all shame ignominie dolour and paine both of bodie and soule for our sakes To Him therefore with the Father and the Holie Spirit bee all Praise Honour Power and Glorie for euer and euer Amen THE EIGHT LECTVRE OF THE PASSION OF CHRIST IHON CHAP. XIX verse 1 THEN Pilate tooke IESVS and scourged him verse 2 And the Souldiers platted a Crowne of Thornes and put it on his head and they put on him a purple garment verse 3 And said Haile King of the Iewes And they smote him with their roddes verse 4 Then Pilate went foorth againe and said vnto them Beholde I bring him foorth to you that yee may know that I find no fault in him at all verse 5 Then came IESVS foorth wearing a Crowne of Thornes and a purple garment And Pilate said vnto them Beholde the man verse 6 Then when the high Priestes and officers sawe him they cryed saying Crucifie him crucifie him Pilate saide vnto them Take yee him and crucifie him for I finde no fault in him NOwe Brethren wee insist further in the suffering of CHRIST vnder Pontius Pilate the Romane Gouernour who abode in Hierusalem Wee haue hearde of two accusations that were laid against the innocent Iesus Christ The first was that Hee called Himselfe The king of the Iewes so was guilty of treason against Caesar Yee hearde the effect of this accusation to bee nothing and therefore hee goes foorth and with his voyce before them all purgeth the innocent In the next accusation there were many things laide to His charge and this chiefely that He had corrupted the whole Countrey from Galilee to Hierusalem with false doctrine Nowe when this was tryed Pilate yet holdes Him innocent in testifying His innocencie and therefore hee seekes yet to gette Him set at libertie out of the handes of the Iewes and considering that the Iewes at the Passeouer were accustomed to seeke the liberty of a prisoner who was guiltie of a capitall crime hee vses this oportunitie and askes of them vvhether they vvould haue IESVS or Barabbas set at libertie Wee hearde the answere to this proposition to vvit they crie they vvill not haue Him deliuered but Barabbas Nowe the other Euangelistes doe insist more largelie in this purpose and vvrite more of it and they report that Pilate when hee hearde this worde hee asketh What shall I doe with Iesus They crie all with one voyce Crucifie him Pilate the third time hearing this hee cleanses the innocent Yet they report more that whilest Pilate vvas sitting in judgement there commeth a messenger from his vvife and saies Haue nothing adoe with this innocent man Why for I haue beene troubled for Him in my sleepe This is an aduertisement sharpe enough vnto him and the LORD vvanted not His owne vvorke therein for the LORD brought this to passe partlie in respect of IESVS CHRIST that His innocencie might clearelie appeare before the vvorlde and that Hee might receaue a testimonie of His innocencie from them vvho had little regarde vnto it for had not Iesus beene innocent vvee had beene little the better of Him for Hee coulde not haue justified vs for ere our faith rest on Him vvee must haue the full assurance of His innocencie partly in respect of Pilate that hee should be conuerted or made vnexcusable if hee would goe forward The working of the Lord is wonderfull in the reprobate for ere that decree of their reprobation bee put in execution the Lord assaies to bring them to repentance Rom. 9.22 He suffers with a long suffering the vessels of wrath Rom. 2.4 Hee inuites the reprobate to repentance Yea ere Hee put them in Hell Hee will inuite them to Heauen There is not a reprobate that perishes in the justice of God but ere Hee vtter His justice towards them Hee will vtter His mercie in warning them to repent We come Brethren to our Text He followes out the suffering in these words which we haue read He telles vs how earnestly Pilate seekes the libertie of Iesus and he lets vs see the meanes that Pilate vses to set Iesus at libertie first he takes Him out and scourges Him puts Him out to be mocked thinking that this would satisfie the Iewes and then the fourth time hee professes His innocencie Then he bringes Him out to them with a crowne of thornes and a purple garment thinking that he should haue contented and moued the Iewes to pittie but all was in vaine It is said Pilate tooke IESVS and scourged him and not content with this commanded His souldiers to put a crowne of thornes vpon His head and a purple garment on Him to scorne the Kingdome of Iesus Christ and then smiteth Him with roddes Ye see the Lord suffers mocking paine in bodie the Lord of glorie is put to ignominie consider well let it neuer goe out of thy minde that the Lord of Glorie suffered such shame for thy cause But to examine this fact of Pilates this is commendable that he speakes so to get the innocent Iesus set at libertie but in the meane that he vseth he failes very farre Yee shall marke this in prophane and vngodly men that one of these two things falles out if not both Either they shall not take in hand a good and godly purpose or els if any time it falles out that they enterprise any good deede that they shall chuse vngodly vnlawfull meanes to affectuate it they shall doe euill that good may come of it Cast your eyes vpon this Land ye shall see this to be true Yet let vs search vp the ground of this proceeding of Pilate It cannot bee denied but that he hath a good purpose and deed in hand but it is as true againe that as he hath a good deed in hand hee lookes not vpon it with an vpright eye hee hath not God nor his Glorie before his eyes for his conscience rather than any regard to Gods Glorie or His will mooued him to purpose to loose Him Thou must not propone only to doe good but also thou must propone it for Gods cause and for His glorie Pilate hauing no respect to God goes astray and out of the way This is certaine Brethren if the purpose were neuer so good and if thou haue not the Glorie of God before thine eyes thou shalt wauer but by the contrarie that man that hath respect vnto the Lord he shall not readily wauer but the Glorie of God shall glance before him as a lanterne into his way vntill hee prosecute that deede Blessed is he that hath the Glorie of God before him there is no light to bring vs thorow this thornie way but only the Glory of our God Next I see in this fact in following out the means that hee
than all the vexation that was done to Him it was heauier than the crucifying of him it selfe and when thou hearest this name thou shouldest say He was not a deceiuer but it was I that was a deceiuer Hee was called a deceiuer for me who was damned for deceit that I should be deliuered from the debt punishment of deceit and deceiuers Now to end shortly Ye haue a watch saies he goe and make it sure keepe it as yee please Hee was an easie man to graunt to any man whatsoeuer thing he sought of him either good or euill Hee granted to Ioseph his sute to burie Christ so he grants to the Priests and Pharises this sute to keepe Him in the graue The reason is because being an Ethnick he serued not God but the affections of meÌ„ whether good or euill he looked not to God but hee had a respect to his owne standing and therefore hee cares not to grant a sute suppose it were against God and Christ Hee had a respect to his owne standing when he commanded Christ to be crucified Such like he respected his owne standing when hee gaue Ioseph leaue to burie Him and likewise now when he grantes this sute to the Priestes to vvatch His graue he respected his owne standing Marke this Brethren It is a miserable thing vvhen a King or a Iudge hath not God before his eyes wo to y t king who hath not God a good coÌ„scieÌ„ce before his eyes for he will be a slaue to the affections of any varlot in the Countreye A Begger a Horse-rubber and the vilest slaue that can be among men is not so vile a slaue as he who serues the affections of men and hath not God and a good conscience before him and euer the higher and the greater his estate be he is the greater slaue Nowe hauing gotten leaue of Pilate they set men of vvarre to keepe Him in the graue they make the sepulchre sure with the watch to the ende Hee shoulde not bee stollen awaye and for the more securitie they sâ—aled the stone and signated it vvith Pilates ring and then it vvas death to anie man in the vvorlde to touch it Yet the more busie they are and the more they striue to hold Him in the graue the more the Lorde glorifies Him and the more cleare and manifest was his Resurrection Could Pilates seale holde him in the graue Could the men of vvarre holde him in No they coulde not keepe him but yee will haare They fell all downe dead at his Resurrection and they had not a worde to speake suppose such was the impudencie of the Priests that although they knew that he vvas risen Yet they hired the men of vvarre to say that he vvas not risen but his disciples stole him away by night And this errour continues in the vvorlde among the Iewes euer since But the Lord Iesus arose vvith great power and glorie and now is in infinite glorie in the Heavens at the right hand of the Father To vvhom vvith the Sonne and holy Spirit from our hearts vvee render all praise honour and glorie for euer and euer AMEN THE XXVIII LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST MATTH CHAP. XXVIII NOw in the ende of the Sabbath when the first day of the weeke began to dawne Marie Magdalene and the other Marie came to see the sepulchre verse 2 And beholde there was a great earth-quake for the Angel of the Lord descended from heauen and came and rolled backe the stone from the doore and sate vpon it verse 3 And his countenance was like lightning and his raiment white as snowe verse 4 And for feare of him the keepers were astonied and became as dead men MARKE CHAP. XVI ANd when the Sabbath day was past Marie Magdalene and Marie the mother of Iames and Salome bought sweete ointmentes that they might come and anoint him verse 2 Therefore earlie in the morning the first day of the weeke they came vnto the sepulchre when the Sunne was now risen LVKE CHAP. XXIIII NOw the first day of the weeke early in the morning they came vnto the sepulchre and brought the odours which thâ—y had prepared and certaine women with them IOHN CHAP. XX. NOw the first day of the weeke came Marie Magdalene early when it was yet darke vnto the sepulchre and sawe the stone taken away from the tombe THESE dayes past beloued Brethren in Christ wee haue heard at length of the death and Passion of our Lorde Iesus Christ and in ende wee heard of His Buriall after His death and passion Now it followes as the Lord shall giue vs grace that we speake of His glorious resurrectioÌ„ from the dead In speaking of the Resurrection of Iesus Christ wee shall follow out the whole foure Euangelistes Matthew in his last Chapter Marke in his last Chapter and Luke in his last Chapter sets downe the Historie of the resurrection of Iesus Christ but John insists more largelie than the rest for he hath two Chapters of the Historie of the Resurrection Then to come to the purpose Wee finde in none of the foure Euangelists the time and the houre when the Lord arose from the dead preciselie noted We finde not the manner of His rising out of the graue Wee finde no mention made of any witnesses that sawe Him rise out of the graue It hath pleased the Lord in His wisedome to conceale all these thinges yet it is certaine He arose out of the graue in the morning what houre he knowes Himselfe in the morning after y e Iewish Sabbath which was the beginning of the thirde day after His Buriall for the Iewes counted their day from euen till eueÌ„ so the third day began at euening As it is certaine that the Lord arose out of the graue in the night so we find in the foure Euangelists that when He is risen He testifies a little after His glorious Resurrection by many witnesses And first of all the emptinesse and roomnesse of the graue testifies thâ—s Resurrection Marie Magdalene and the other Marie and Salome testifie of it The Angâ—ls of Heauen testifie of it The Lord Himselfe testifies of it by appearing to the vvomen And these vvomen testifie of it to His Disciples And then the Lord witnesses His Resurrection by His owne appearing vnto them To come to the Text that we haue read We haue first of all out of the Gospel of MARKE noted the occasion how it comes to passe that these women are made witnesses to the Resurrection of Iesus Christ Next wee haue the coÌ„ming of these holy women out of Hierusalem with odours to anoint the dead bodie of Iesus which they supponed to haue bene in the graue Thirdly wee haue the rehearsall of some things that fell out whilest the women were comming to the graue There falles out a great earthquake because their was a glorious Angell comming from Heauen to the graue And last of all we shall speake of the part of Marie Magdalene
and how farre his nature is repugnant to that calling wee will thinke that of all things in the world it is most hard and most painefull It is an hard thing indeede to bring a man out of nature and make him a Christian but it is farre harder to make a man a teacher of Christians and a disposer of the treasures of grace and of the secrets of God Nowe when I beginne to consider what should haue mooued the Lord to haue chosen such persons and so vnmeete for such an high calling I thinke this chiefly hath beene it that when the Apostles went out to preach Repentance and Remission of sinnes to others and to exhort all persons howe grieuouslie so euer they had sinned to come and to seeke mercie in Christ they might propone themselues as examples of the superaboundant mercie of God and that they in their Ministerie might declare and make manifest the gentlenesse and long suffering of God towardes all men euen the greatest sinners in the worlde and that by the proofe and experience that they found in their owne person of the mercie of God in calling them and placing them in that high calling who before vvere so miserable wretches and so vpon their owne experience they might the more easily perswade euen the most miserable sinners to seeke for mercie and grace in Christ When Paul preaches Where sinne aboundes there grace and mercie superaboundes if hee had not found this by experience and had not stoode for example hereof hee would not so easily haue perswaded sinners of the exceeding greatnesse of the mercie of God But to goe forward Because this direction that He giues them and this Ministerie He calles them to was very painfull and troublesome and so they might haue taken hardly with it therefore in the words following the Lord goes about to encourage them to vndertake it and to discharge it chearfully the Argument is of great force Beholde sayes He I will send the promise of my Father vpon you that is I will send vnto you the Holy Spirit Himselfe with Him His extraordinarie giftes and graces as the gift of prophecie of working of miracles of tongues and such other that ye may bee the more able to discharge this calling and to performe the worke I send you for Hee calles this the promise of His Father because the Father long before by His Prophetes promised at the comming of the Messias to send His Spirite in great abundance vpon them that beleeue Yee may read this promise in sundrie places of the Olde Testament but chiefly in the 2. Chapter of the prophecie of Ioel and the 28. verse In the last dayes I will powre out my Spirit vpon all flesh and your sonnes and your daughters shall prophecie your olde men shall dreame dreames and your young men shall see visions and also vpon the seruants and vpon the maides will I powre my Spirit c. And of the accomplishment of this promise ye may read in the 2. Chapter of the Actes of the Apostles Out of this place wee may marke first That the things which the Father promised of olde to His Church the Sonne in the appointed time accomplished them the Father promised of olde the Spirit and His graces the Sonne in the fulnesse of time sendes the Spirit and His graces and giues them to His Church and for this cause the Spirit and His giftes that is giuen to euery faithfull man is called the measure of the gife of Christ Ephes Chapter 4. verse 7. And thereafter in that same Chapter ver 11. the Apostle sayes That Christ to the end He might fill all things Hee gaue some to bee Apostles some Prophets and some Euangelists and some Pastours and Teachers that is He gaue all sorts of gifts vnto His Church that He might fulfill the promise of His Father and all these giftes and graces that we see are now in the Church from whome came they but only from the Lord Iesus This leadeâ— vs to an higher ground that the Sonne hath receiued of the Father all graces and all the giftes of the Holy Spirit together with the Holy Spirit Himselfe the Father hath giuen all first to the Sonne and not to vs for the Father loues the Sonne and hath giuen all thinges into His hand Ioh. 3.35 And In Him are hid all the treasures of wisdome knowledge Coloss Chapter 2. verse 3. Yet there is an higher cause of this to wit that the Sonne only hath merited the Holy Spirit with the fulnesse of all His graces No man euer merited any of them for who can merite them but hee who first receiued them The Lord Iesus receiued them first wee haue none but as He giues vs Hee merited and purchased them to vs with no lesse price than with the ransome of His owne blood Now wouldest thou know how all these graces that the Lord hath boughâ— with such a deare price are communicated to thee and made thine I will tell thee Not by any merite of thine own for thou couldest merite nothing at the Lordes handes but Hell and damnation but it is of the free grace and liberalitie of the Father and the Sonne that they are made thine it is of this grace that out of His fulnesse we receiue grace for grace When the Apostle Coloss Chapter 2. verse 9. hath saide In Him dwelles all the fulnesse of the Godhead bodily thereafter he subjoynes And ye are compleete in Him as if hee had saide All this fulnesse is made yours of free grace whilst as by Faith yee take holde of Him Consider the wonderfull bountifulnesse and liberalitie of the Sonne to thee who giues thee these graces freely that Hee bought so dearely and purchased with such a worthie price Yee know sayes the Apostle the grace of our Lord Iesus Christ that He beeing rich for your sakes became poore that ye through His pouertie might be made rich 2. Cor. 8.9 Now ere I go forward I marke another lesson that the Spirit of God pointes out clearely in these words for our instruction for when the Lord sayes I will send you the promise of my Father vpon you that is the Holy Spirit with His graces He lets vs see that without His Spirit His presence and assistance a Minister cannot be able to doe any thing well in His calling but that in the discharge of euery part of His calling hee must bee assisted by the Spirit The Apostle Paul when hee is telling what good successe his preaching had among the Gentiles he takes not the praise thereof to himselfe but he ascribes all to the presence of Christ by His Spirit I dare not sayes he speake of any thing which Christe hath not wrought by mee to make the Gentiles obedient in word and deede Rom. 15.18 It is not with a Minister as it is with a man in the ciuile policie No there is a great difference for in the ciuile policie a man by his naturall giftes by his wisdome
Apostles which sets out vnto vs the glorious Majestie of God and His properties His power His mercie His Iustice His wisdome c. is by infinite degrees inferior to the Majestie which it describes vnto vs that the Spirit of God paintes Him not throughly fully in His essence nature and in His owne perfection as He is No but in painting Him out Hee attempers His stile to our infirmitie weaknesse that we may vnderstand beleeue for there can be no words so high so sublime so glorious inuented or deuised by any that can bee sufficient to expresse that Majestie which is incōprehensible infinite Alwayes seeing the Holy Spirit hath set down so much in the Scripture concerning that glorious incomprehensible Majestie of God His worship as is sufficient for our Saluation let vs therewith be content and not curiously seeke for any more and while we read or heare the Scriptures let vs earnestly craue at God that He would worke faith in our soules that we may beleeue that Iesus is that Christ the Sonne of God that in beleeuing we may haue life Saluation through Him To whome with the Father and the Holy Spirit be all praise honour and glory for euermore AMEN THE LIII LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST MATTH CHAP. XXVIII verse 16 Then the eleuen disciples went into Galile into a mountaine where Jesus had appointed them verse 17 And when they sawe Him they worshipped Him but some doubted verse 18 And Jesus came and spake vnto them saying All power is giuen vnto Me in heauen and in earth verse 19 Goe therefore and teach all nations baptizing them in the Name of the Father and the Sonne and the holy Ghost MARKE CHAP. XVI verse 15 And Hee saide vnto them Goe yee into all the world and preach the Gospell to euery creature WELBELOVED Brethren these dayes bypast we followed out the Historie of the Resurrection of the Lord and of His manifolde appearings vnto sundrie but especially vnto His Disciples as they are set down by the Euangelist John who insists more largely in describing His appearings to His Disciples than any of y e rest as God gaue the grace the last day wee ended his Gospell spake last of the conclusion thereof now it rests that we follow out so much as remaines of the Historie of the resurrectiō as it is set down by y e rest of y e Euangelists for Iohn wrote his Euāgel after all y e rest omitted purposely such things as were written by y e rest willing vs to addresse our selues to y e rest of y e Euangelists that there we might read follow out y e rest of y e Historie of CHRIST vvhich hee left off And so vvee are this day to enter into the description of another appearing of CHRIST after His Resurrection as it is set downe by Matthew Marke This appearing of the Lord seemes to be the ninth in number for the first was to Marie Magdalene The second to other women The thirde to two disciples as they wēt to Emmaus The fourth was to Simō Peter The fift to Iames Then three seuerall times Hee appeared to His disciples being gathered together as ye heard out of Iohn So this is y e ninth appearing wherin it is likely that He shewes Himselfe not only to the eleuen disciples being met together but also to a great number of brethren being together with them For this seemes to be y t appearing wherof th'Apostle Paul makes mention 1. Cor. 15 6. where he says Hee was seene of more than fiue hundreth brethren at once In this appearing there are sundry thinges to bee considered As the circumstances of time and place the disciples worshipping of Him when they sawe Him the doubting of some of them His communicatiō with the disciples sending them out with a commission to preach to all Nations Appearantly this is that meeting which the Lord in His appearing to the women enjoyned to the Apostles for by the women Hee gaue th'Apostles a direction to meete Him in Galilie Matth. chap. 28. vers 10. According to this direction it is said The eleuen disciples went into Galilie vnto a Mountaine where Iesus had appointed them So the place vvas in that Mountaine of Galilie wherein the Lord had appointed them to meete The time is not particularly mentioned yet it is likelie that as the Lord gaue a direction concerning the place so did Hee also concerning the time of their meeting Then this whole meeting the time the place and all is according to the direction and appointment of the Lord. Now as they keep this meeting vpō hope to see the Lord according to His promise so they are not disappointed of their hope The Lord is as good as His promise He shewes Himselfe present vnto thē Marke the lesson The Lord who has appointed ordained y e meetings assemblies of His owne has promised to be amongst them when they are gathered together He disappoints thē not of His promise but shewes Himselfe to be present with thē This y e disciples foūd by experience whē they met together by His appointment y e Lord shewes Himselfe present vnto thē This same haue al y e godly foūd in al ages y e faithful find it this day in their meetings for albeit He shew not Himselfe present after a bodilie manner as here He did to His disciples yet He is present yea no lesse present with His owne now than He was then but He is now present after a spirituall manner and the faithfull find His presence to be no lesse powerfull effectuall now than it was then for frō whence comes this vnspeakeable joy comfort and peace of conscience which the faithfull find in their meetings but from the presence of Iesus for except the Lord Iesus were present in our soules by His Spirite it were not possible that wee could finde such a powerfull working and such sweete motions and alterations in them Vaine and foolish men who are touched with no sense of sin disdaines scornes the meetings of the Saincts they thinke them all to be but fectlesse for y e feshiō they think they feed vpō fantasies But y e faithful find by experience that the presence of Christ in their meetinges is so powerfull comfortable as no tongue can vtter nor the heart of man is able to conceiue And thou y t contemnest and scornest these meetings thou shalt find one day by sorrowful experiēce of how great comforts thou hast depriued thy selfe And if thy conscience were once wakened with the sense of sinne thou wouldest finde that there were no joy nor comfort to thy soule but by these meetings Then thou wouldest haue greater pleasure to frequēt these meetings thā euer thou hadst to eat or drink when thou werest hungry and drie Now when y e Lord appeares to them what doe they what is their behauiour It is saide When
and Pastors heere in this vvorld shall bee effectuall either to thy life or to thy death and as certainelie the same vvorde shall haue effect to driue the vvicked men vpon their backes as Zacharie saieth Chap. 1. vers 4.5.6 When the men are dead that haue spoken that vvorde after it hath beene spoken it shall bee founde liuing and that same voyce shall haue effect vvhen vvee are dead It is true sayeth the LORD my Prophets died with your fathers but my voyce which I put into their mouthes died not with them and your fathers knewe that that worde which I did put into their mouthes was liuing and neuer left them vntill it brought on judgement vpon them The LORD graunt that euerie soule may reuerence the vvorde of IESVS CHRIST for it shall bee founde that either it vvas spoken to thy saluation or to thy damnation And Heauen and Earth shall vanishe awaye before one jote of that Worde passe awaye vvithout its owne effect But nowe let vs see vvhat they doe after they are fallen downe vpon the grounde Leaue they off No no they rise againe and the LORD IESVS standeth still and letteth them rise againe and vvhen they are risen they speake nothing but Hee speaketh first and Hee saieth Whome seeke yee and they saye IESVS of NAZARETH And Hee answereth I am hee Nowe this is a strange thing Who can thinke that these men vvho founde so great a power proceeding out of the mouth of the LORD IESVS CHRIST finding such force shoulde haue medled with Him againe But left they Him for all this No but they get vp againe and pursue Him and take Him and binde Him It is an hard matter to bee giuen ouer to a reprobate sense that is to want feeling when the Lord taketh out of the soule in His judgement all sight sense that person is miserable and if thou be once strucken with that senselesnesse of the soule albeit thou be throwne downe vpon thy backe thou shalt get vp againe like a drunken man and fight against the Lord and that man is worse than any beast horse or mule for once strike a Horse downe he hath a feeling therof and he will beware of the like perill againe But a man who should haue reason after that the Lord hath once strucken him with senselessenesse there is no beast so senselesse as he is and as hee is senselesse so he shall not leaue off from euill doing and hee shall compt no more of the power of God than of a flee for they feele not the hand of God they are so astonished and they will vp againe after they are casten downe and they will assaye His power againe and will not leaue off till His wrath destroy him Striue therefore euer to keepe the soule in a sense and feeling and let not that miserable scroofe to goe ouer thy soule but haue still a feeling of the power of God and mercy of God in thy soule and alwayes haue a wakened conscience for if thine heart come to that extreame senselessenesse thy soule shall ouer-grow with such a fatnesse that thou shalt haue no more sense than a dead stocke and thou shalt bee like an Oxe fedde to destruction thou shalt neither haue feeling of mercie nor of judgement To ende with this ye see that Iesus Christ albeit he was but himselfe alone a simple man to looke to and without armour yet Hee prouoketh them and speaketh to them first Hee dischargeth them to stirre Him vntill first they entered into a conditiō with Him That His disciples should passe free there is not such a thing that one of them could haue power to put out their hand to take Him And if there were no more but this that they had no power to stirre him they might see more in Iesus Christ than in a common man they might see power in Him to keepe Himselfe yet their senselessenesse is so great that they cannot see this The Lord keepe vs in sense and feeling of Him that when He hath adoe with vs wee may feele Him and see Him that our conscience may bee wakened and our hearts mollified through Iesus Christ to whom with the Father and the Holy Spirit be all praise and honour for euermore AMEN THE SECOND LECTVRE OF THE PASSION OF CHRIST IHON CHAP. XVIII verse 7 Then he asked them againe Whom seeke yee And they said IESVS of Nazareth verse 8 IESVS answered I saide vnto you that I am hee therefore if ye seeke me let these goe their way verse 9 This was that the word might bee fulfilled which hee spake Of them which thou gauest mee haue I lost none verse 10 Then Simon Peter hauing a sword drew it and smote the high Priestes seruant and cut off his right eare Now the seruants name was Malchus verse 11 Then saide IESVS vnto Peter Put vp thy sworde into the sheath shall I not drinke of the cuppe which my Father hath giuen mee verse 12 Then the band and the captaine and the officers of the Iewes tooke IESVS and bound him THE last day beloued in the LORD IESVS wee diuided the whole Historie of the Passion and suffering of Iesus Christ which is contained in these two CHAPTERS to wit the XVIII and XIX of this Gospell in these parts First wee haue his suffering in the Garden Then wee haue his suffering in the Hall of the high Priest Thirdly we haue his suffering before the Iudge Pontius Pilate Fourthly wee haue his suffering in the place of Execution in Caluaria otherwise GOLGOTHA And last we haue the last part of his suffering which is his Buriall The last day wee entered into the first part of his suffering which IOHN in this Chapter setteth downe to bee this The Lord Iesus beeing in the Garden is taken captiue and bounde John passeth by all that agonie and conflict that the Lord had before his taking in the Garden with the heauie wrath of his Father for our sinne which hee did beare As concerning his taking we haue first the part of Iesus who of purpose wittingly and willingly came to this Garden to be taken which Garden was knowne to Judas the Traitor Then wee haue the part of Iudas he knowing the Garden commeth forward because the Lord vsed with his Disciples to resort thither accompanied with a band of men of warre with the officers and seruants of the high Priest to take and apprehende the Lord. In the third place wee haue the communing that fell out betwixt Christ and them that came to take him he knowing all things that should come vnto him hee taketh not the flight nor seeketh not to goe his way as he might haue done because it was night but hee commeth out vnsought and beginneth the speach and saieth Whome seeke yee They not knowing him by face answered IESVS of Nazareth He answered againe not denying himselfe I am he as he would say in plaine wordes I am the man whom yee seeke why seeke yee
the injurie done by the authoritie the Lord will not allow it the Lord will not haue injurie repayed by an injurie Well then if the Lord will not haue a wrong defence against injuries Hee will not haue a wrong to meete a wrong What damnation lyes on these men who do an injurie doe delight to oppresse the innocent If Peter got such a reproofe for the defence of Christ against his enemies What damnation shall these murtherers get who oppresse the innocent man the damnation of these men shall bee great I denounce an heauie damnation against thee Let the King the Magistrates and all the world winke at thee the hand of the Lord shall light on thee this shall be thy recompense Thou who takest pleasure in oppression shalt be oppressed the Lord shall thrust downe thine head and bloodie hand shall presse thee downe for euer the Lord saue vs from this judgement woe to them that oppresse their neighbour either in word or deede Now to goe forward Shall I not drinke of the cuppe that my Father hath giuen me By the cuppe is vnderstood a measure of affliction that the Lord will lay on any man as a cuppe is a measure so the Lord hath a measure of affliction to lay on his owne as the Master of a familie hath a cuppe drinketh to his familie sayes Drinke thou this drinke thou that euen so the Lord is the Master of this world He will fill the cuppe of affliction He will say Drinke thou this drinke thou that if He propine thee a cup He will cause thee drinke it all the world cannot saue thee but if the Lord bid thee doe it thou must drinke it He hath commandement ouer his creatures good reason that we doe His will either to liue or die as He pleaseth if the Lord propine thee with a cup of affliction if thou drinke it not willingly heere is the danger thou shalt bee compelled to drinke the dregs thereof to thy destruction Woe is to the soule that will in no measure lay down his necke to that burthen but againe if thou take that cuppe gladly as the Lord Iesus did He dranke the dregs of the bitter cuppe of the wrath of the Father yea Hee receiued it gladly and thanked Him for it albeit thou hadst bitternesse in the beginning yet in the end thou shalt finde joy and sweetnesse What followed on that cuppe Glorie the more that thou sufferest if it be patiently the greater glorie shall be to thee Then seeing that we must also suffer in this world for it is nothing but a suffering life woe is to thee that wilt make thy heauen into this world thou needest not to looke for an heauen in the world to come What euer wee suffer let vs striue against our rebellious nature for it is full of rebellion and striue to get patience and say Lord I haue no patience in mine hand Lord giue me patience contentment let this be our prayer in distresse and they who will seeke this I will promise them the most glorious issue that euer was the bitternesse of the affliction shall not stay that glorie In this world we are all as it were on a Skaffold to trie our faith to trie our patience that afterward all our afflictions may be turned in joy glorie all the teares that will gush out of thine eyes the Lord with his hand shal wipe them away wilt thou awaite to see this end thou shalt neuer againe see dolour nor displeasure Now remaineth one thing of the taking of the Lord then sayeth he Then the band and the captaine and the officers of the Iewes tooke Jesus and bound him He gaue them good leaue or els they could neuer haue bound Him but will yee marke how particularly they are named that tooke Him there is the band of the men of warre and the captaine and the seruants to let you see that there was no man that was there and was partaker of that doing but the eye of God was on him the holy Spirit recounteth them Beware euer to be in euill companie if there were neuer so many in that companie yea if there were ten thousand with thee the Lord shall see thee and judge thee whether thou be a Captaine or a single souldier or a gudget beware to bee in euill companie Say not I am not a principall man but a seruant I must obey the authoritie and I must followe my Captaine No that shall bee no warrand to thee for if thou shalt be in euill companie the eye of the LORD shall bee vpon thee to judge thee let none of these worldly excuses moue thee but say Lord thou seest whither I go with whom I come what I come to do or els thy cōscience shal terrifie thee whether thou be highest or lowest in doing an ill fact the iudgement of the Lord shall fall on thee Now to come to his taking the Lord is taken willingly resistes not whē they boūd him he put out his hands to be boūd looke how he pointes out the suffering of Christ First he sayes he was taken then he was bound thinke ye this is for no purpose There is not a worde or a sillabe lost here the taking of the Lord and the laying handes on him was for our cause who lying vnder sinne the deuill and death and this taking recounters and meetes our taking by the deuill and death Euery thing in Him and His suffering behoued to meete vs and our suffering Hee that should redeeme vs as wee were taken so it behooued Him to be taken and as wee were bound so it behooued Him to be bound and if His taking and binding had not answered to our taking and binding Hee had not beene a meete redeemer for vs and if he had not beene bound as we were we had not beene deliuered from the bands of sinne albeit it is hard to Him yet to the sinner it is joyfull and if thou findest thine handes bound hard thus the Lord Iesus was a captiue bound for thee it would bee the joyfullest tithings to thee that euer was Who is he or shee that feele the bandes of death and damnation but this will bee joyfull tithings to them because we feele not this when we heare word of His taking we take litle thought of it and are so litle mooued therewith Therefore Brethren I recommend this lesson to you and my selfe seeing we are all sinners lying vnder sinne and death that we striue to bee found in Iesus that by faith in Him wee may finde his passion and all the partes thereof to be forcible and effectuall to freee and deliuer vs from the bandes of sinne and death and so may be made partakers of life and glorie through Him To whom with the Father and the holy Spirit be all honour praise and glorie AMEN THE THIRD LECTVRE OF THE PASSION OF CHRIST IHON CHAP.
hee is not vvakened till the Prophet of the LORD came vnto him The longer that thy conscience lieth still in sinne the bitterer the vvakening vvill bee A reprobate vvill get an harde vvakening Iudas got a sore vvakening he vvas asleepe vvhilest hee kissed his Master but vvhen hee vvakened he hanged himselfe But the Lord dealeth otherwise vvith His owne Hee vvill vvaken them in mercie and in the heauiest displeasure they shall haue the sweetest joye and in the greatest aboundance of teares the greatest comfort Of all the thinges in the vvorlde take best heede to the conscience for it is alwayes verie readie to fall asleepe and of all judgementes a sleeping conscience is the greatest and therefore let vs striue night and daye to haue a waking conscience which may rounde in our eares when vvee lay vs downe at Euen vvhat vvee haue done all the daye if thou hast done good then thou mayest sleepe vvith a sound conscience but if thou hast done euill it is better a thousand times to vveepe vvith teares and vvake in mourning till thou findest thy selfe to be recōciled to God againe than to sleepe We should neuer let the conscience sleepe but euer hold it vvaking to tell vs vvhen vve doe euill that vve may haue dolour vvhē vve haue done vvell vve may haue joy through Iesus Christ To vvhome vvith the Father and the Holy Spirite bee all Praise Honour and Glorie for euermore AMEN THE FOVRTH LECTVRE OF THE PASSION OF CHRIST IHON CHAP. XVIII verse 19 The high Priest then asked IESVS of his Disciples and of his Doctrine verse 20 IESVS answered him I spake openly to the worlde I euer taught in the Synagogue and in the Temple whither the Iewes resort continually and in secret haue I said nothing verse 21 Why askest thou mee aske them that heard me what I said vnto them beholde they know what I said verse 22 When he had spoken these things one of the officers which stood by smote IESVS with his rodde saying Answerest thou the high Priest so verse 23 IESVS answered him if I haue euill spoken beare witnesse of the euill but if I haue well spoken why smitest thou me verse 24 Now Annas had sent him bound vnto Caiaphas the high Priest verse 25 And Simon Peter stood and warmed himselfe and they saide vnto him Art not thou also one of his Disciples He denied it and said I am not verse 26 One of the seruants of the high Priest his cousin whose eare Peter smote off saide Did not I see thee in the Garden with him verse 27 Peter then denied againe and immediatly the Cocke crew BELOVED in the LORD IESVS we haue heard the first part of the Passion of the LORD which was in the Garden beside that inward agonie with the wrath of His Father that Hee felt in His soule outwardly in the Garden where Hee was taken like a thiefe bound Hee was taken to deliuer vs from that captiuitie and bondage of sinne and death And then after we entered into the seconde part of His suffering which was in the Hall of Caiaphas being taken and bound He is led away to Hierusalem The first house that He is brought vnto is the house of Anna◠the father-in-lawe to Caiaphas and there Hee tarrieth a certaine time till the Priestes the Elders and Scribes were assembled in the house of Caiaphas and then Annas sendes Him bound to Caiaphas the High Priest Now we heard the last day the Historie of Peter how hee denied his Lord and Master Peter vpon a vaine confidence notwithstanding of an admonition of the Lord hee will followe Him to the house of the High Priest Now the Lord entereth in and the other disciple vvho knewe the High Priest and Peter vvas stopped at the doore this might haue beene an aduertisement for him to haue left off but yet hee would not and the other disciple thinking to gratifie him he desireth the maiden that kept the doore to let him in and beeing no sooner entered in but that same seruant vvoman tempteth him This temptation is by a sober instrument neither vttered she any reuiling vvordes vnto him yet neuerthelesse Peter falleth vvhereby yee maye see vvhereunto the confidence of fleshe and blood turneth for the lightest assault vvill throwe him downe vvho trusteth in it Hee is standing vvarming himselfe vvith euill companie and being standing securely he getteth his reward hee deare bought his vvarming there for hee is tempted and denieth his Lord and Master Now to come to this Text There are two parts of it shortly the first containes the suffering of the Lord Iesus in the Hall of the high Priest the second containes the second and third deniall of Peter As for the first it is saide that Caiaphas the high Priest begineth to aske of Iesus concerning his doctrine and his disciples he layeth not downe first such and such particular pointes of false doctrine because he had none to lay to the charge of the Lord and therefore this was no formall proceeding and dealing to draw a man before a judge and then not to haue one word to lay to his charge Should not the dittay be made before the man was taken ye may see the malice of this persecution Well then to examine his words he enquireth about his doctrine and then for his disciples whilst he asked him of his doctrine he would meane that his doctrine was not allowable and that it might not abide the light and that Hee teached lies and whilst as hee speaketh of His disciples hee would meane that the Lord was a seducer and had seduced so many among the people the Lord answeres The thing that I haue teached I haue teached openly before the world and therefore why askest thou me of my doctrine as though it were not allowable and as if I had teached in secret holes and caues then he appealeth to the witnessing of his enemies aske of these men who haue heard me I will bee judged by them This is the effect first of the question of the high Priest and next of the answere of the Lord. The first thing that wee marke here is shortly this Beholde in the person of Caiaphas the malice of the enemies of the trueth in their heartes they know the trueth and yet they will seeme that they knowe it not CAAIPHAS knewe the trueth but hee seemeth not to knowe it the enemies will count light darknesse albeit the truth should shine in their faces more bright than the Sunne in the noone-tide of the day yet they will say Light is darknesse But to come to Christs part as the trueth loues the light and desires not to be hid neither to bee teached in secret holes and caues so the trueth so farre as is possible is publikely to bee teached in the presence of the worlde it would haue all men to know it it would euer bee heard and the light would euer shine through the world The Ministers of the trueth should euer
Christ that thou mayest haue a continuall remorse for in the bitternesse of sinne is the sweetnesse of joy Nowe to make an ende and shortly to examine this fall of Peters Certainely there are many faults in this fall First he is caried away with a vaine confidence of flesh and blood he will take vp his crosse and follow the Lord albeit that the Lord aduertised him that hee was not able and then the doore was shut vpon him to aduertise him and put him in minde yet he would not stay then when he is let in alas he denies his Lord once he denies Him twise thrise till the LORD did staye him I dare not say but all this time Peter caried a good heart towards his Lord a spunke of faith a spunke of loue in the heart albeit his faith loue were choked it was suppressed with infirmities of the flesh namely with feare then when he is entered in and come vnto the fire side if that faith and loue was suppressed before with his nature then it was farre more suppressed this litle spunke of loue in the man was smoothered there falles such a weight of infirmitie on it that it was pressed downe vnder the burthen of corruption and vnder securitie if thou be sleeping in securitie albeit thou haue a spunke of loue it will be smoothered and this is most true that this spunke of loue was so smoothered yea I say more it was pressed that except the Lord had looked ouer his shoulder with the eye of his mercie and wakened that spunke of loue it had died out In Peter we haue a cleare example of the weaknesse of the godly men into this life albeit we haue faith and loue yet in the example of Peter we see that the spunke of grace will be choaked with corruption infirmitie and then will ye come to God Peter is one of the chiefe examples of the mercie of God in Iesus Christ Paul to Timothie countes that he was one of the greatest examples of mercie in the world but if yee looke to the sinne of Peter ye will finde that it was greater than the sinne of Paul for Paul did all of ignorance and so if Paul as hee sayes was made an example of the mercie of God to sinners surely this example of Peter ought much more to bee an example to all sinners let no sinner that lookes to him despaire of mercie how burthened so euer hee be with sinne for that same Iesus Christ who was mercifull to Peter hath store of mercie for all them that it pleaseth him mercifully to looke vpon To Him therefore with the Father and holy Spirit be all honour and glorie AMEN THE FIFT LECTVRE OF THE PASSION OF CHRIST IHON CHAP. XVIII verse 28 Then led they IESVS from Caiaphas into the common Hall Now it was morning and they themselues went not into the common Hall lest they should bee defiled but that they might eate the Passeouer verse 29 Pilate then went out vnto them and said What accusation bring you against this man verse 30 They answered and said vnto him If he were not an euill doer we would not haue deliuered him vnto thee verse 31 Then saide Pilate vnto them Take yee him and judge him after your owne Lawe Then the Iewes saide vnto him It is not lawfull for vs to put anie man to death verse 32 It was that the word of IESVS might be fulfilled which he spake signifying what death he should die IN the eighteenth and nineteenth Chapters of this Gospell Brethren is contained the History of the Passion of the Lord Iesus Christ and it is diuided in these parts The first is the suffering of the Lord in the Garden The next is the suffering of the Lord vnder the High Priest Caiaphas the Ecclesiâ—sticall Iudge The third is the suffering of the Lord vnder Pontius Pilate the Ciuill and Romane Magistrate The fourth is the suffering of the Lord in the place of Execution The last in the sepulchre Wee haue spoken of y e first part of His suffering in the Garden besides the inward coÌ„flict He had with y e wrath of His Father for y e sins of y e elect which Hee did beare vpon Him The Lord is taken like a thiefe or vagabond and bound led to Hierusalem We heard also the suffering of the Lord in y e Hall of the High Priest whose name was Caiaphas When the High Priests Elders are set down in couÌ„cell He is brought in before them and being brought they haue not a word to say against Him howbeit they bound Him brought Him to judgemeÌ„t This was an vnformall dealing therfore the hie priest demands of Him His doctrine of His disciples to catch a word out of His mouth wherupoÌ„ he might make his accusatioÌ„ wheÌ„ they preuaile not this way the rest of the EuaÌ„gelists note that they begin to suborne false witnes but they get no vantage that way neither for they caÌ„not agree together TheÌ„ the hie priest begins in wrath to adjure Him to tell him whether he be that Christ or no The Lord denies it not but saies Thou hast said it He giues him a faire testimony of this after this Hee saies Yee shall see the sonne of man sitting at the right haÌ„d of the power of God come in the clouds of heaueÌ„ Then the high priest rent his clothes as though He had blasphemed said What haue we more need of witnes behold now ye heard His blasphemy what think ye Then he the rest of the councell coÌ„cluded y t the Lord was worthy of death so the couÌ„cel departed In the meane time the Lord is kept still in the Hall of the hie priest the officers are al about Him working all kind of injury against Him y e rebukes y t shuld haue befalleÌ„ to vs are laide on Him as the prophet said of Him Psal 69.10 Some spitted on Him some put a vaile on His face smote Him saying in scorn Prophesie Christ who it is that striketh thee nothing in the Lord but patieÌ„ce He spake nothing He made no more resistaÌ„ce than a silly laÌ„be before the shearer wheÌ„ it is begun to become light in the morning the Priests Elders begin to sit down in councell the hie priest asked of Him the same again whether he was that Christ or no He answereth If I should tell you ye will not belieue mee what auailes it to speak to an indured heart He testifies again Thou hast said it he giues an argumeÌ„t of this hereafter shall the son of man sit at the right haÌ„d of the power of God Then the hie priest and the Elders the second time concludes Him to be worthie of death adjudges Him to die theÌ„ the councell arises the first thing they doe they lead Him to Pontius Pilate the Romane deputie to the judgemeÌ„t Hall to him to execute y t sentence they had
hurt him not which are done by the hands of the Emperour Who executes them in the Inquisition The Kinges the Popes holy hāds are cleane of all Excuse as they will I pronounce and the Lord shall ratifie it in that Great day that they are greater murtherers than the secular power Away with their vaine excuses When they haue murthered the man they will put the fault in the Magistrate Wil God accept such excuses In the next vers Iohn subjoynes wherfore y e Iewes would not take vpon them to judge of y e life or death of Iesus Christ and saies that they answered so that that might be fulfilled that the Lord spake signifying what death he should die When He was conuersant with His Disciples He fore-told them that He should die vpon the Crosse Now the Iewes will not take vpon them the right of the judging Him that these words might be fulfilled If the Iewes had taken it vpon them they would not haue crucified him because it was not vsuall among the Iewes they vsed to stone a deceiuer or blasphemer to the death according to the lawe as they did Steuen afterwards This death of the Crosse was familiar and vsuall among the Romanes Then Brethrē we see here the God of Heauen is the disposer of the whole action of the persecution passion of Christ what euer be mans part There is not a word vttered nor an action done either by Pilate or any of the Iewes which the Lord did not dispose All that Pilate did all that the Iewes did as that spitting and buffeting of Christ were all disposed by the Lord And this is it that ye reade in that prayer in y e Acts of the Apostles cap. 4. vers 28. The princes of the earth are gathered against thine anointed Herode Pilate and the Gentiles Whereto That they should doe that thing that thine hand and thy councell hath ordained Neither Herode Pilate nor any of the Iewes or Gentiles did anie thing in this execution but that vvhich God appointed The vnderstanding herof serues to this that there was nothing done to our Redeamer but that which His father appointed they were but persecuters appointed by God euen as the hang-man the Iewes Pilate Herod were like as many hangmen to execute that decree of God This would seeme a very light word that the Iewes say We haue no power to sit ouer the life or death of men yet this is a meane whereby the Lord bringes to passe that forme of Cursed death Brethren we may speake as lightly of thinges as wee please and many times to little purpose but there is nothing that passes GODS decree Looke to that prouidence that GOD hath in His creatures The LORD disposes the lightest wordes that thou speakest He rules thine hand so that whatsoeuer thou doest He makes al to effectuate produce that which He hath decerned the thing that thou wilt speake or doe it will serue for some purpose to Him how beit little for thee In the meane time let no man thinke that when men speake or doe euill that they shall bee the more excusable for if there were no more but this it shall make thee vnexcusable because in speaking euill and in doing euill thou hast not the LORD before thine eyes Thou doest it not for obedience to His vvill Take this lesson Let euerie man and vvoman take good heede that they bee vvell exercised and if our GOD employe vs let vs take good heede that vvee bee in a good seruice in speaking good and doing good Lende not thine heart thine hande nor thy tongue to the Deuill in vnrighteousnesse And seeing thou canst not sleepe from morning to euening but must bee speaking and doing praye that the LORD maye employe thee to doe vvell and to speake vvell and saye LORD let mee bee an instrument to doe well And more in doing vvell bee not content of the outwarde face of the action but in doing vvhether it bee little or much goe euer to the heart and see the disposition thereof and looke thou doe it in sinceritie hauing regarde to GOD. Thinke it not enough and if the LORD vvorke a good vvorke by thee as an instrument but looke still that Hee vvorke in thee that thou mayest finde a good motion in thine heart For alas vvhat auaileth the outwarde action if the heart bee foule vvhich defileth all Indeed vvee maye not thinke that there is anie perfection in vs or in our actions in this life but this is the perfect ground that makes that action to smell sweetelie in the sight of GOD to vvit Faith in IESVS CHRIST If that thou findest that thou hast IESVS CHRIST in thine heart by Faith albeit vvith great vveakenesse in thy selfe yet in CHRIST all the imperfection and vveakenesse is hidden and vvhen the action commeth before the LORD it is pleasant and acceptable to Him All thinges are pleasant that come to the Father thorowe the Sonne there is the grounde of all grace and acceptation Sticke to the LORD IESVS and haue Him not in thy mouth onelie as the Hypocrites doe but let Him also bee inclosed in thine heart and dwell therein for then thou shalt bee acceptable to GOD through Him To vvhome vvith the Father and the Holie Spirit bee all Praise Honour and Glorie for euer and euer vvorlde vvithout ende AMEN THE SIXT LECTVRE OF THE PASSION OF CHRIST IHON CHAP. XVIII verse 33 So Pilate entered into the common Hall againe and called IESVS and saide vnto him Art thou the King of the Iewes verse 34 IESVS answered him Sayest thou that of thy selfe or did other tell it thee of mee verse 35 Pilate answered Am I a Iew Thine owne nation and the high Priests haue deliuered thee vnto mee What hast thou done verse 36 IESVS answered My Kingdome is not of this world if my Kingdome were of this world my seruants would surely fight that I should not bee deliuered to the Iewes but nowe is my Kingdome not from hence verse 37 Pilate then saide vnto him Art thou a King then IESVS answered Thou sayest that I am a King for this cause am I borne and for this cause came I into the world that I should beare witnesse vnto the trueth euerie one that is of the trueth heareth my voyce THE last day Brethren we entered into the suffering of Christ vnder Pontius Pilate the Romane Gouernour Ciuill Iudge in Iudeae for the time Iesus is led into the Common Hall to the House of Iustice as ye heard where Pilate sate Now Pilate is not rash in judging but before he sit downe to judge hee will haue an inditement and will see what things the Iewes haue to lay to the charge of the Lord He saw the accusers of Him the Iewes in multitudes he saw no accusation therefore he goes out vnto them because they would not come to him and asketh what accusation haue they against Him hee receiueth little answere or at least little
King he should haue asked what a King He was where his kingdome was that He might haue gotten a part of it there is y e coÌ„fessioÌ„ that Iesus gaue vnder Pontius Pilate as is saide 1. Tim. 6.13 Pilate should haue bin inquisitiue of these things and followed out that purpose about his kingdome but he breakes off the conference by an accusation of Iesus An earthly hearted man knowes not things heauenly so he cannot speake of them but rather he will stay an heauenly purpose Ye see earthly hearted men when one will begin to speake of heauenly things hath no more pleasure in them than Pilate had begin once to speake of heauenly things to a prophane man then he cannot keepe purpose with thee but hee will breake off purpose speake of earthly things Paul 1. Cor 2. sets down the grouÌ„d here The naturall man sayes he knowes not the things of the Spirit of God yea he will wonder what that means when thou speakest of Heauen yea he hath no power nor spirituall sense for they are but foolishnes to him the most wise things of God are but foolishnes to the naturall man he delites not in them because he hath not tasted how sweet the Lord is So Pilate interrupteth Christ Christ answeres He sayes Thou sayest that I am a King In the which answere the Lord denies not that He is a King but He takes the mouth of Pilate to be witnes that He was a King Then he lets vs see for what cause He came into the world not to be an earthly King Came I into the world but that I might beare witnesse of the trueth I came not to be an earthly King as other Kings are but I came from the throne of a King a glorious Kingdome that I may play the part of a seruaÌ„t in bearing witnes to the trueth Iesus Christ was God equall with the Father thought it no robberie but He made Himselfe of no reputation by taking on the forme of a servant Phil. 2.6 As though he would say I came into the world tooke on the flesh of man to be a seruant to my Father to be a witnes to the trueth then He subjoynes lest that Pilate should thinke that office of litle effect that He laboured in vaine sayes They who are of veritie to wit begotten of the word the immortal seed of the word of God for by veritie here is meant the word of veritie as Chap 17. vers 17. preceeding They heare my word He draweth neâ—re vnto Pilate if thou be such an one as is begotten of the trueth thou wilt heare my word albeit Christ be stayed from speaking Pilate would haue put Him off Hee leaues not but speakes againe to Pilate He would haue winne Pilate it had bene possible Albeit we be interrupted when we speake of heauenlie things to profane men and women wee ought not to leaue off by the example of Christ but howbeit wee bee interrupted wee should returne againe and follow out the thing we haue begun to see if some wordes will sinke in their hearts or if they will not returne that they may be vnexcusable Speake of Christ and of Heauen it shall neuer be in vaine but as Paul saies 2. Corin. 2. it shall bee a sweet odour to God either to their saluation or damnation that God may be glorified either in mercy in winning of them or in justice in their perdition And therfore it is good to speake of things HeaueÌ„lie the soule is nourished therby A man that redresses himselfe to a kingdome would euer take delite to speake of it if thou hast no pleasure at no time to speake of Heauenly things it is a sure token that thou hast no part of that kingdom thou hast neuer tasted the sweetnes of it for they who haue tasted thereof will haue somtimes a delite to speake of thinges Heauenly and will desire that sincere milke of the word as Peter speakes So if thou findest the worde of life sweet why shouldst thou not desire it continually for it is that only food by the which y e life of God is nourished within thee here and one day it shall present vnto thee such satiety of all pleasure and joy in the face of God as the heart cannot thinke of now howbeit thou gettest but scant in this world Alas that we should let such a joy passe away for fault of feeling tasting What is the veritie saies Pilate he askes this not with pleasure but loathing disdaining taries no answere but goes his way His stomack loathes Christ Then in Pilate we haue an example of naturall men if any will speake of things Heauenly vnto them of Christ and of His benefits they will stay the speach so farre as they can and if thereafter any will insist and yet speake on then at the last if thou wilt vrge them they must speake something but they will speake as Pilate did lightly and disdainfully and when they haue asked they will leaue off and will not care for an answere but askes for the fashions cause when they are constrained thereunto We are by nature like to Pilate either we will not speake one word of things Heauenly or else if wee bee compelled to speake and wordes bee throwne out of vs wee will speake with a loathing and disdaining of the heart There vvas neuer any thing in the world that could moue the naturall man more to loathing than y e word of God he will heare it with such disdain that when one thing is saide in word hee will say another in heart and he vvill thinke him vvho teaches him the most foolish man in the vvorld And he vvho is vvisest if he be not regenerated and renewed hee shall count Christ and things Heauenly most foolish A simple bodie is sooner vvonne than hee vvho is vvise in his owne conceit in the vvorld If thou vvouldest be an hearer or speaker of Heauenly things striue alwayes to get a reformation of thine own corrupt nature and let thy meditation and prayer be thus Lord reforme mine heart that thy vvord maye bee fruitfull in mee so that both I may heare vvith pleasure and also that the vvords come not from the teeth forward but from the deepnes of mine heart when I speake of Thee and things Heauenly that so thy vvord may edifie both mee and others It is a more dangerous thing to come to heare if vve be not duely prepared than to tarrie away and better not to speake at all than to speake of thinges Heauenly vvithout the inward sense of the heart Now the Lord grant vs grace that in hearing speaking of things Heauenly vve may haue this Heauenly disposition in some measure for Christes sake To vvhom vvith the Father and Holy Spirit be all Praise Honour and Glory both now and euermore Amen THE SEVENTH LECTVRE OF THE PASSION OF CHRIST IHON CHAP. XVIII verse 38 Pilate said vnto him What
conscience is put out and such a man is dangerous companie But the Lord who only hath power ouer the conscience disappointes their purpose The Lord hath such power ouer the soule conscience of man that wheÌ„ He will haue it blinded all y e doings in the world will not waken it by the contrary when God will haue it wakened all the worlde shall not still it the more meanes thou vsest to still it it shall be the more aloft None hath power of the conscience to waken it or to still it No not a King nor an Emperour no not all the worlde hath power of the conscience but onely God Hee hath His throne in the conscience Yet let vs examine this better When Pilate heard this he was the more afraid Pilate had no knowledge of God but so much as nature furnished him he was a man who liued without God in the world yet at the Name of GOD and at the Name of the Sonne of God hee is terrified and his conscience abhorreth to doe any thing against Him Albeit thou neuer heard of the Scripture nor neuer saw one of Gods workes there is one thing within thee that will tell thee that there is a God whom thou shouldest feare and honour that is thy conscience if thou honourest not that God thy coÌ„science shal stand vp judge thee I say more this conscience is verie powerfull for if it serue not to thy saluatioÌ„ it shall serue thee to thy damnation conscience naturall abhorreth to violate that Majestie it telleth thee this honour this God if thou dishonourest Him thou shalt die albeit thou neuer sawest the Scripture if there come a wicked thought in thine heart the conscience will stand vp to challenge it like an armed man to slâ—y thee if thou werest but a naturall man ere euer thou get that Majestie violate thy conscience shall stand vp to plead for God to guarde Him froÌ„ thine injuries ere thou get Him dishonoured thou shalt tread vpon the bellie of thy conscience It is true indeed albeit this naturall spunke of light of conscience in man be as a precious raine to bridle man from sin that the Lord hath left him after his fall He hath left it of mercy for if it had bin taken away men had bene more miserable than beasts yet it is very weake there is nothing perfect in vs and there is nothing in vs by nature that will be able to holde vs in the feare of God This naturall conscience for a time will brangle and stand vp against the malitiousnesse of the heart and if thou haue no more thou mayest stand for a while but in the ende thou shalt giue it ouer and succumbe It is a pitie to see how Pilate striues and then how in the ende the conscience failes and against conscience hee giues sentence against the innocent and gainstanding the conscience hee ouerthrowes it Trust not to nature but striue to get grace nothing is able to ouercome nature but the Holy Spirit for it striues and gettes the victorie in the end Therefore as wee would bee safe in that great day let vs striue to get that Spirit to pingill out and get the victorie against this canker in the heart I see some thing more in Pilate hee gets not only a sight of God and so is terrified but hee commeth forward and his conscience gets aduertisement of that same verie man who was standing before them all that that same verie man was God not only that He was an innocent man but that Hee was the God of heauen hee gets a supernaturall knowledge that that sillie man was God the reason is if hee had not gotten that aduertisement that that man standing in such contempt before him a glorious Iudge was God would his conscience haue accused him would he haue bene so terrified and would he haue desired to absolue Him if hee had not gotten aduertisement that Iesus Christ was the God of glorie It is a naturall thing to the conscience to speake of God but not to speake of Christ that Hee is the Sonne of God Pilate was more afraide for Christ who stood before him like a poore sillie man than Christ was for him albeit he was a glorious Iudge in the eyes of the world but this sight was like the glance of a flash of fire that went ouer the conscience of Pilate The Lord will giue the wicked glances tastes of Heauen but all is but in vaine Ye see of Agrippâ— Acts 26.28 When Paul was speaking to him he sayes Thou perswadest me almost to be a Christian his heart was almost bowed and was beginning to be perswaded he scarcely beginnes to haue this perswasion when it euanishes the Lord will furnish to wicked men glimmerings of that life but they euanish away thou wilt dreame of happinesse but this is happinesse when the Lord giues thee a light bowes thine heart establishes grace in thee grace bides with thee there is thy happines This glimmering is not for nothing it serueth for this to make Pilate vnexcusable and if it were no more When Pilate shall appeare before that Iudge this same blencke shall bee a testimonie against him to his euerlasting damnation If thou gettest a blencke of Heauen pursue it or els better it had beene for thee if thou hadst neuer seene it or neuer to haue seene Christ or to haue read the Scriptures Againe this glimmering that Pilate got shall stand vp against the High Priestes and giue sentence against them who had not onely nature but the worde to guide them Pilate lookes in thorow that basenesse and gets a sight of that glorie that was in our nature in Christ they cannot looke in thorow that basenesse And if there were no more Pilate shall stand vp like a Iudge to condemne all the Iewes who by the word was informed that CHRIST should come in basenesse and humilitie Esay 53.2 I come nearer And if there were no more but that light that Pilate gote it shall condemne all them that doe stumble at the ministrie of the Gospell The LORD will not haue the Gospell with an outward glorie Hee will haue it to shine in basenesse and if that outward basenesse stoppe thee to looke into it thou shalt perish and if thou get not a fight of that glorie therein Pilate shall condemne thee one day yea Pilate in that great day shall stand vp against all men who are offended at the voyce of Christ if thou contemnest y e base ministrie I promise thee y t thou shalt neuer get life by that Gospell if the Gospell be base humble thy selfe vnder it and striue to get thine eyes opened to looke to that glorie of the Gospell Looke not to men who doe preach and be not offended at the outward face of the Gospell as thou wouldest be saued Blessed are they who are not offended at the basenesse of Iesus Christ Nowe Pilate beeing terrified in
conscience and getting litle blenckes immediately he goes in againe to the common Hall and takes in Iesus Christ and he sayes to Iesus Whence art thou Art thou the Sonne of God hee had no certaintie of this this is worthie of commendation that hee getting a blencke hee will follow it out who vvill say but this was worthie of commendation in an Ethnicke If it shall please GOD to giue vs a blencke any time let vs striue to follow it foorth and let that glimmering mooue thee to follow it out further for all the joy in the worlde is in the sight of GOD thou neuer knewest what joy is who hast not tasted of the pleasure of Heauen fye on thee who hast not tasted of this joy So if it shall please the Lord to giue vs a glance of Iesus Christ Pilate learnes vs to followe it albeit it goe out of thine eyes for a time rest neuer till thou gettest it againe although men would giue thee all the pleasures in the world Now Brethren we must not thinke that it was the loue of the trueth that mooued Pilate to aske this No it vvas rather the feare of danger that mooued him to aske it for hee feared some danger to come vnto himselfe when hee heard that hee vvas the Sonne of God therefore partly for this cause and partly because Christ knew that Pilate disdained Him and all spirituall graces in Him Hee gaue him none ansvvere But let vs follovv out the knowledge of CHRIST once begunne vpon the loue of the trueth then vvee may bee assured that according to His promise Hee vvill heare vs for Hee saies Verily verily whatsoeuer ye shall aske the Father in my name that shall hee giue you IOH. XVI 23. Thou vvho hast that sweet promise Knocke and it shall bee opened shouldest thou not bee instant to make inquirie of IESVS vvho offereth Himselfe so vvillingly and saies I am the Light of the worlde and Come to Mee to get the water of Life Alas that thou shouldest perishe for default of seeking of grace Yee vvoulde maruell that IESVS answered not a vvorde I spake of this somewhat before I shall saye onely this for the present The Lord Hee knewe His houre vvas comming that Hee shoulde die and Hee knewe it vvas His Fathers vvill therefore Hee vvould not vtter so much as a vvorde to staye and holde backe His death If Hee had giuen Pilate euident and sure information vvhat manner of person Hee vvas then happily Hee vvoulde haue stayed and vvoulde haue proceeded no further and vvoulde not haue slaine Him but hee knewe not vvith vvhome hee dealt vvhen hee gaue out the sentence of death against Him But it maye bee asked vvith reuerence vvee speake it Was not this an harde matter that Christ vvould not doe so much as to tell Pilate that this vvas Gods vvorke and that Hee Himselfe vvas the Sonne of God vvas it not an hard matter so to hinder this mans saluation But I saye What reckoning is to bee made of Pilate and all the creatures in the vvorlde Angels and men so that God bee glorified We are all made to glorifie Him and except He had a respect to His owne glorie in the creature He would neuer haue made man nor Angell If it please the Lord to be glorified in thy damnation holde thee content Hath not the Potter saies Paul power of the claye to make of the same lumpe one vessell to honour and another to dishonour Roman 9.21 I saye more God in that his great sa nilie hath some vessels of honour and some of dishonour 2. Timâ—th 2.20 If that thou finde thy selfe to bee one of the vessels of honour thou hast no cause to complaine and to saye Wherefore was this man made to shame for thou hast enough if thou hast gotten mercie thanke GOD that of His free will He hath put a difference betwixt thee and him There are none who are ordained to be vessels of honour but they wil seeke the honour of God eueÌ„ suppose it were by their own destructioÌ„ as ye may read of Moses This is the nature of all them who haue gotten some assurance of GODS fauour in IESVS and if thou haue this assurance in thine heart certainly thou art an instrument of glorie Now to ende Yee see Brethren in this whole action the pittifull estate of Pilate he is tossed to and fro betwixt two parties his own conscience on the one part vrges and forces him to stand and pleade for Christ and on the other part the desire that he hath to pleasure the vnportunate Iewes and the feare that he hath to offend Cesar moues him to goe on in that processe against Christ till at last he pronounces sentence against Him Iudges by his example are to take good heed to their proceedinges in judgement and to keepe their hands from euill and that they sit not in a wicked judgemeÌ„t Be not Iudge against the innocent Pilate sate in judgement doing wickedly pronouÌ„cing sentence against the Lord of Glorie If thou sit in judgement pronounce not sentence against y e innocent either leaue that judgement or then absolue the innocent in despite of the worlde It is no small matter to pronounce sentence of damnation The Lord grant vs this conscience that whensoeuer wee shall be employed we may be employed in doing of good deedes and in glorifying God that wee may haue that assurance of grace in Iesus Christ To whome with the Father and Holy Spirit bee all Honour and Praise for euer Amen THE TENTH LECTVRE OF THE PASSION OF CHRIST IHON CHAP. XIX verse 10 Then saide Pilate vnto him Speakest thou not vnto mee Knowest thou not that I haue power to crucifie thee and haue power to loose thee verse 11 IESVS answered Thou couldest haue no power at all against mee except it were giuen thee from aboue therefore hee that deliuered mee vnto thee hath the greater sinne IN this whole Historie of the suffering of IESVS CHRIST vnder Pontius Pilate we see a continuall strife betwixt the Iudge Pilate and the accusers Pilate laboures by all meanes to get the innocent set free The Hie Priests be y e contrary endeuour themselues to get Iesus Christ crucified Pilate seekes if it had beene possible to followe his conscience they seeke by all meanes the contrarie to harden the heart of Pilate The last words as yee heard the Iewes rose and saide Wee haue a law by the which hee ought to die because hee made himselfe the Sonne of God These wordes of theirs are so farre from that that they take away the conscience of Pilate that by the contrarie by these words the conscience of Pilate is more wakened than before and he begins to feare IESVS CHRIST and humbles himselfe more than euer hee did yea in such sort that when as hee heares tell that IESVS was the Sonne of GOD hee demaundes of Him Whether Hee was the Sonne of GOD or no but hee receiues no answere for the LORD
the conscience So I cannot passe by this but in these wordes I must marke the striuing of the poore conscience albeit it be once dumbe yet it will come againe say O miserable man thou art gone too farre in this euill action repent As the naturall conscience is a continuall torture so it wil cleaue vnto him will not leaue him Brethren as the conscience is an admonisher so it cleaueth fast and no man will get it extinguished albeit the loune vvill striue to shake it off yet it vvill sticke to him and vvhisper again to him but after it be once changed from an admonisher to a tormentor vvhen thou hast tempted it if it stacke to thee before it shall sticke an hundreth times sorer and shall fasten it selfe in thy miserable soule so that if thou vvouldest hang thy selfe to escape yet the torment shall neuer die out Well shake on and contemne her shee shall come and bee the terriblest sight that euer vvas and if thou gâ—ttest no mercie shee shall bee thine euerlasting tormentor in the Hell for euer and euer Thus farre for Pilates part Now vvee come to the Iewes They vvould haue nothing but the death of Iesus and that a most ignominious death they seeing Pilate yet striuing howbeit they had his head downe for nowe they had him at the downefall and sweruing from conscience they had him downe vvith mightier force than before and they double their temptation they speake no more modestly but for speaking they shout in his eare that he cannot heare one thing or other double the shoutings cryings Away with him away with him Crucifie him crucifie him Take heed to this if once the deuill haue gotteÌ„ thy head down that thou sweruest then he will come with a double force hee will cry deaffen thine head howbeit the conscience would cry to thee hee will make thee so dashed y t thou canst not heare the conscience Ye know 2. Chron. chap. 28 coÌ„cerning the idolaters who took their sons burnt theÌ„ quick in a valley neare Ierusaâ—eÌ„ wheÌ„ the children wept they caused timbrels to sounde that they might not heare y t pitifull voyce So it is y t wheÌ„ the deuill hath gotteÌ„ thine head once down he shal make it so dumpish so dash thee with double forces that he will make thy conscience to haue no place therfore let euery man with al his maine fore resist let no teÌ„tation sunder thee from thy conscience for once down aye down when a man once stumbles on the head of a banke he will neuer stay til he goe ouer the mountaine close once the eare of the conscience and the deuill will deaffen thee shout so in thine eare that thou shalt not heare againe a word of thy conscience there is none of vs but wee may find this by experience Now come to Pilate wheÌ„ they shout cry he saies Shall I crucifie your king yet hee giues not ouer hee haâ—h a doubt in the heart and a strange fighting as hee would say Call ye it a well fauoured thing that I should crucifie your king this he spake somewhat scornefully halfe in jest and halfe in earnest This is a voyce of the conscience but of vveake and decaying conscience he speakes doubtfully now by an interrogation putting it in their option now the conscience is drawing its last breath after that speakes not a worde There are two voyces in the conscience one voyce that will say resolutely I will not doe euill I will not doe against my conscience for all the world that is a token of a strong conscience The other is which will saye doubtfully Shall I doe this or not that is a weake coÌ„science when a man will say Shall I slay shal I strike I will say that man hath done with his conscieÌ„ce The voyce of a strong conscience will say I will doe this if God will giue me grace and for the world I will not doe euill Come to their part againe We haue none other king but Caesar Alas woe woe to them that renounce such a King Hee and Caesar might both haue beene their king Caesar was but His lieuetennant and the wickedest men that nowe most repine against Him shall confesse Him once to bee their king Alas Caesar is casten in the poore mans teeth because he had none other God and all the care he had was to pleasure Caesar But marke the hypocrisie of the Jewes they saye they haue no king but Caesar but loued the Iewes Caesar No there was nothing y t they would fainer haue bene quite of than of him yet they pretende the authoritie of Caesar to slay the poore mans conscience to crucifie Iesus Christ This is hypocrisie they loued not y e king for they who loues not God loue not the King nor the Kirke Looke the forme of Hypocrites Papistrie is but Hypocrisie the Pope is an Hypocrite and all that rabble haters of God of Caesar and of the king they desire no king but the king of Spaine because hee is their Burrio and if hee woulde refuse to be their Hangman they would hate him as they doe others They pretend the authoritie of Caesar to slay Christ when they would haue the king slaine and they will pretend God and religion to murther the king of Fraunce Fie vpon these lownes let neuer king credite them woe shall be to him What doe our men pretend Religion Our Earles pretend Religion and Reformation What is this a pretence to destroy Religion and the King Shame and confusion shall light on all and first on them if they gette their intention The Lord giue euery man and vvoman grace to take heed that they haue no medling with such men who vnder the pretence of Religion seeke to spoyle Religion the king and the Countrey for Christs sake To whom with the Father and the Holie Spirit be all Praise Honour and Glorie both now and euermore AMEN THE TWELFTH LECTVRE OF THE PASSION OF CHRIST MATTHEW CHAP. XXVII verse 24 When Pilate sawe that hee auailed nothing but that more tumult was made he tooke water and washed his hands before the multitude saying I am innocent of the blood of this just man looke you to it verse 25 Then answered all the people and saide His blood bee on vs and on our children verse 26 Thus let he Barabbas loose vnto them and scourged IESVS and deliuered him to bee crucified IOHN CHAP. XIX verse 16 Then deliuered hee him vnto them to bee crucified And they tooke IESVS and led him away WEE haue hearde Brethren that Pilate the Romane Gouernour hath striuen verie long against the importunitie and obstinacie of the Iewes and High Priestes to get the Lord Iesus whom his coÌ„science tolde him was innocent set loose and at libertie but all in vaine for they are as earnest to haue Him condemned as Pilate was to haue Him absolued At the last when they could preuaile nothing at the
dash themselues on the sworde to deuoure them It is a miserable thing to want the light of the soule so the Iewes saw not with whome they had to doe they had no conscience as Pilate had and therefore beeing through malice and appetite of reuenge incensed against the Lord Iesus blindfolded they regard not what imprecations they vtter for they saw not Hell or els if these Iewes had a light of conscience they did so rashly against Iesus with knowledge which is most likely theÌ„ it followes that they were marueilous malitious as ignorance is hardie so is malitiousnesse more hardie albeit such a man should see yet against the light his malice will make him to runne ouer the bellie of his conscience Yee knowe the voyces of prophane men Ere I were not reuenged of him I had rather be in Hell this commeth of malitiousnesse to get the soule spirit within him satisfied but if thou felt one twitch of Hell thou wouldest recant these wordes for it would cause thee shoute and squeele hiddeously I incline to this judgement that this wicked action is more to be ascribed to malice than ignorance the Iewes and the High Priestes had the word of God and the Prophets whereby they might haue knowne the Messias When I read of the Prophets that speake of induration in the time of Iesus Christ I say it hath come of an hardnesse and induration of heart And when I see the wordes of the Apostles that say O stiffe necked people I thinke that they put their owne fingers in their eyes that they should not see The Lord saue vs from malitiousnesse and namely from such malitiousnesse as is not without knowledge when a man sees and will pull out his eyes Compare the Iewes with Pilate now Pilate sinneth hee kâ—lled himselfe in the end and the Lord made his owne hands to be his burrio No doubt he sinned who can excuse him he sinned malitiously he had a conscience goes against it malitiously But Brethren to speake the trueth it was not so much malice that pushed him forward as great infirmitie and feare for first he feares to be accused of treason against Cesar it was no maruell to such a man to feare who had no God but Cesar â—hen hee saw appearance of great tumult to rise amongst the Iewes What necessitie was laide on them to haue the blood of the innocent So I see nothing in them but malice if it were but in this respect that the sinne of the Iewes weigheth downe the sinne of Pilate and their damnation is a thousand times greater What had this man He had nothing but nature The contrauension of the light of nature will neuer make vp the sinne against the Holy Ghost which gets no mercie but come to them They had the light of nature and the light that commeth from Heauen they had the worde of GOD amongst them they contraueened an heauenly light that came downe from Heauen and was wrought into their heartes by the Spirit Steuen sayes in the 7. Chapter and 51. verse of the Actes of the Apostles Yee haue alwayes resisted the Holy Ghost as did your fathers so doe you that is not a naturall light but a light that came from aboue There were some of these men who sinned malitiously against the Holy Spirit What maruell was it then that they got no grace to repent for of all sinnes the sinne against the Holy Spirit is the most dangerous they that commit this sinne haue no grace to repent therefore no mercy to them the Lord strikes their soules with impenitencie so that soule is euerlastingly hardened and so beeing strucken with impenitencie they got neuer grace to say God bee mercifull to me Seeing then their sinne against Christ was so great seeing it was not so much of ignorance as of malice it was not only against the light of nature but also against the illumination of the Holy Spirit what maruell was it that such a terrible Iudgement ouertooke them as neuer lighted on any nation The Iewes found this innocent blood in experience laide to their charge Ioseph that saw all these thinges with his eyes writeth what heauie vengeance and judgement fell vpon Jerusalem the Iewes for he testifies that there was slaine at the siege of Ierusalem eleuen hundreth thousand beside ninetie thousand that were tane captiues thereafter the towne was lamentably destroyed and sacked So the blood of the innocent neuer left them these y t remaine yet feele the judgement of the blood of the innocent for according as they desired y t His blood should be vpon them their posteritie so the wrath of God came vpon them to the vttermost 1. Thess 2.16 It is a wonder that a Iew should be safe if ye heare of a Iew to be conuerted thinke it to be a great mercie Now to apply this shortly to vs if it were but this terrible example of vengeance which folowed the Iewes it should terrifie to the end of the world all soules to take on the blood of the innocent take on one take on all if thou takest on the blood of one seruant of God thou shalt take on all the innocent blood from Abel to that man whom thou hast slaine Fye vpon foule butchers who are more meete to be butchers dogges than men What care they to wash their handes in innocent blood But I say to thee if euer thou gettest grace it is a wonder fye vpon the butchers of Scotland No if the Lord would waken thy conscience to torment thee present to thee the sight of Him of whose blood thou hast shed it would bee so terrible that it would make thee to curse the time that euer thou did it one day fearefully without comfort it will torment thee when will these bloodie men leaue off y e sheading of innocent blood in this bloodie barbarous nation oâ— all nations it is the most barbarous and bloodie Aboue all things dip not thine hands in the blood of Iesus Christ Thou who sheadest innocent blood is a persecuter of the seruants of Iesus Christ and who resistest the trueth thou wilt say If thou hadst bene in Christs dayes thou wouldst not haue coÌ„sented to His death but thou who sayest so if thou hadst fallen in these dayes thou hadst malitiously bene partaker of the death of Christ hadst put handes in Him thou wantest nothing but time I will tell you who is it that sheds the blood of Iesus Christ takes His blood on them what euer he or she be that will resist this knowne trueth of Iesus Christ and persecute the professours thereof I affirme they are as guiltie of the blood of Christ as the Iewes the High Priests were and that same blood shall bee laide to their charge in the great daye of the Lord Read ye not in the Epistle to the Hebrewes Chap. 6. and 10. of them who haue repined haue begun to cast off that
Christes will that the ground of their lameÌ„tation shuld not be so much His suffring for them as the sense of their owne misery sinne which brought Him to such a misery The Lord would haue the women considering the greatnesse of their owne misery which made Christ for their cause to bee so miserable that should haue beene chiefelie the cause of their mourning that shoulde haue beene the cause of their dolour for as Iohn saies out of Zacharie They shall see Him whome they pearced Our sinnes haue pearced Him The godly in the latter daye when they shall see Him they shall mourne It was not so much the Souldiours that pearced Him as thy sinnes Haue not therefore thine eye so much on Pilate Herode or the Iewes or on the men of warre or Hang-man as on thy selfe and on thine owne sinnes for it was thy sinnes that pearced Him thorowe and in the latter day when the godly shall see Him whome they haue pearced they shall weepe Turne thine eyes on thy selfe and let the ground of thy weeping bee for thine owne sinne that pearced the Innocent There is another thing heere worthie to bee considered I see it is a good thing to bee in heauinesse and yee see that the LORD speakes nothing to the men of warre nor to anie others in the way but onely to the poore women who were weeping Hee comfortes them and instructes them Hee leades them to the grounde of their weeping to the ende that they shoulde repent and haue recourse vnto Him The best estate of men and women is to bee sadde in heart and mourning either for their owne misery or the misery of others for the Lord saies Blessed are they that mourne for they shall bee comforted And GOD dwelles in a coutrite heart ESAY CHAP. 66. VERS 2. PSAL. 51. VERS 19. Thou who laughest thou needest no comfort Thou who art mourning for thy sinnes and the sinnes of the worlde the Lord Hee shall speake to thee and giue thee consolation with His owne mouth Nothing becommeth a Christian better than sadnesse and to haue his sinnes before his eyes and to bee sadde both at noone and at Euen for all this joye that a true Christian hath is sadnesse Awaye with wantonnesse mocking and jesting there is no true joye there and the Lord vses not to comfort such nor speake to such for they neede it not I fore-warne thee that thou shalt neuer gette the taste of that joye but in teares and then vvhen the heart is broken and casten downe then the LORD is mighty to raise thee vp and to comfort thee The Lord therefore giue vs grace when wee looke to the death and passion of CHRIST that wee maye gette a sense of our owne miserie and that wee maye bee in sadnesse and mourne that our sinnes pearced the sides of the innocent vvho vvas the GOD of Glorie and that vvee maye haue recourse to this suffering and gette grace in our LORD To vvhom with the Father and the Holie Spirite bee all Honour Praise and Glorie for euer and euer AMEN THE XIV LECTVRE OF THE PASSION OF CHRIST MATTH CHAP. XXVII verse 33 And when they came vnto the place called Golgotha that is to say the place of dead mens skulles verse 34 They gaue him vineger to drinke mingled with gall and when he had tasted thereof he would not drinke MARKE 15. verse 22 And they brought him to a place named Golgotha which is by interpretation the place of dead mens skulles verse 23 And they gaue hâ—m to drinke wine mingled with myrrhe but he receiued it not LVKE XXIII verse 32 And there were two others which were euill doers led with him to be slaine IOHN CHAP. XIX verse 17 And hee bare his owne crosse and came into a place named of dead mens skulles which is called in Hebrewe Golgotha NOwe ye haue heard Brethren of the accusation of CHRIST before the Iudge Pontius Pilate and of His condemnation out of the mouth of the Iudge Pilate and then wee heard that after the sentence of damnation was pronounced he deliuered Him into the handes of the Iewes to bee crucified they take Him and first of all they leade Him in againe to a moste secret part of the Common Hall and there they handeled Him more freely yea more vilely than euer before seeing Hee was a condemned man and when they had vsed whatsoeuer indignitie they pleased against Him they leade Him to the place where Hee should be executed In the Historie wee haue marked three or foure things that fell out in the way First how the Lord is bearing His owne Crosse to the place of execution Next Hee beeing wearied vnder the burthen one Simon of Cyrene comming from the Countrey to the towne is compelled to take vp one ende of the Crosse to helpe him So Iesus goes before and beares the one end of the Crosse Simon of Cyrene followes bearing the other end thereof The third thing the multitude followes men of all countreyes that were conueened and come out of Ierusalem at such a solemne time at the Passeouer Amongst the rest there were women of Ierusalem better than the rest of the multitude who followed him and wept for him Wee haue heard what answere the Lord gaue them and how he instructed them in the right cause of their weeping Now the last thing that is marked it is this that we haue read out of the Gospel of Luke there were led out two thieues with him Then in this dayes exercise we shall heare of these points The first concerning the two thieues that were led out with him The next is concerning the place The third is concerning the sowre bitter drinke that they gaue him to drinke The fourth concerning the act of the suffering and fiftly concerning the houre To returne to the first As hee goes out to the place where hee should suffer There are ledde out with Him two thieues to suffer with him in that same place Iesus is ledde out to the place of execution like a thiefe beeing innocent and ledde out with thieues to suffer with thieues Amongst all the rest of the things that Iesus Christ suffered beside the paine that he suffered in soule and bodie he suffered extreame shame as we say hee was shamed and shent I shewed to you that shame followed alwayes vpon sinne Iesus Christ tooke vpon him the sinnes of the world and therefore hee behooued to suffer shame before the worlde The Lord Iesus Christ was ignominious in respect of the painfull and ignominious death for hee was mounted vp vpon the Crosse in presence of them all and in respect of the multitude all the worlde was gazing vpon him and in this respect when hee goes out to suffer hee is counted a thiefe among the thieues and the Lord was also ignominious in respect of the place Brethren in this matter I looke not so much to the Iewes or to the souldiers as I looke to his Father in heauen
the King of the Jewes to vvrite That Hee saide Hee was the King of the Iewes this declares that it vvas of the immutable decree of GOD. Pilate had no power to alter one letter of it for his life GOD ledde the pene of him so that hee had no power to doe otherwise to testifie that it vvas of that Eternall decree And this is that drecree vvhereof vvee reade PSAL. 2.7 I will declare the decree that is The Lord hath saide vnto mee Thou art my Sonne c. This decree is vnchangeable it must bee executed and it shall last to the ende of the vvorlde And I saye the LORD IESVS shall bee King in despite of the IEVVES and the High Priestes and all His enemies and that one daye vvee shall see to the full joy of our heartes To that Glorious King vvith His Father and the Holie Spirite bee Honour and Glorie for euermore Amen THE XVI LECTVRE OF THE PASSION OF CHRIST MATTH CHAP. XXVII verse 39 And they that passed by reuiled him wagging their heads verse 40 And saying Thou that destroyest the Temple and buildest it in three dayes saue thy selfe if thou bee the Sonne of God come downe from the Crosse verse 41 Likewise also the high Priesles mocking him with the Scribes and Elders and Pharises said verse 42 Hee saued others but hee cannot saue himselfe if hee bee the King of Israel let him nowe come downe from the Crosse and wee will beleeue in him verse 43 Hee trusted in God let him deliuer him now if hee will haue him for hee said I am the Sonne of God verse 44 The selfe same thing also the thieues which were crucified with him cast in his teeth MARKE CHAP. XV. verse 29 And they that went by railed on him wagging their heads and saying Hey thou that destroyest the Temple and buildest it in three dayes verse 30 Saue thy selfe and come downe from the Crosse verse 31 Likewise also euen the high Priestes mocking saide among themselues with the Scribes Hee saued other men himselfe hee cannot saue verse 32 Let Christ the King of Israel now come downe from the Crosse that wee may see and belieue They also that were crucified with him reuiled him LVKE CHAP. XXIII verse 35 And the people stood and behelde and the Rulers mocked him with them saying Hee saued others let him saue himselfe if hee be that Christ the Chosen of God verse 36 The souldiers also mocked him and came and offered him vineger verse 37 And said If thou bee the King of the Iewes saue thy selfe verse 38 And a superscription was also written ouer him in Greeke letters and in Latine and in Hebrew THIS IS THAT KING OF THE IEVVES IOHN CHAP. XIX verse 23 Then the Souldiours when they had crucified Iesus tooke his garmentes and made foure partes to euerie Souldiour a part and his coat and the coat was without seame wouen from the top thorowout verse 24 Therefore they said one to another Let vs not diuide it but cast lots for it whose it shall bee This was that the Scripture might bee fulfilled which saieth They parted my garmentes among them and on my coat did they cast lottes So the Souldiours did these thinges indeede THE time that IESVS CHRIST is hanging on the Crosse Brethren and whilest Hee is in extreame paine and torment those that stand by they set themselues to doe Him all the shame they can to the ende that in that agonie Hee might haue the more annoy and griefe I cannot diuide better that shame that they did Him than from the persons who went about to shame Him the whole both Iewes and Gentiles are set to shame Him And therefore after He is condemned they take two Thieues and they crucifie them with Him the one at the one hand and the other at the other and Iesus the Innocent in the middest as if He had beene the greatest of all Then there is not a ranke of persons amongst them but euery one begins to raile vpon Him and shame Him And first to begin at Pilate hee begins and shames Him for hee writes an inscription concerning treason against the Majestie of Caesar and affixes it on the Crosse where Hee hung This is the King of the Iewes howbeit to speake the trueth Pilate sought more the shame of the Iewes who by their obstinacie compelled him to giue out the sentence of death against the Innocent than the shame of Iesus Christ and by the inscription the Lord will haue the Iewes shamed because they hanged their King But we haue spoken of Pilates part the last day therefore nowe let vs goe forward to the partes of all the rest Then after Pilate comes in the executioners who with their hands had nayled Him on the Crosse It appeares by the wordes of Iohn speaking of the diuiding of His garmentes into foure partes that there vvere foure Executioners or Hang-men So that euery one of them got a part thereof These in contempt and in despite of Him in His face whilest as Hee hanges on the Crosse they take His garmentes and diuide them in foure partes and on his coat they cast lottes Then after the Hang-men comes the people and they wagge their heads on him and in despite and bitternesse of heart they raile on him and saye Is this the man that saide hee woulde destroye the Temple and builde it vp againe Is it likelie that Hee can doe this vvho cannot saue Himselfe from the Crosse Then comes there the Princes of the IEWES the SCRIBES the High PRIESTES and PHARISES and they taunt Him also saying Thou who sauedst others saue thy selfe And after them comes in the men of vvarre the ROMANE Souldioures and they beginne to raile out also and They offered him Vineger to drinke and saide If thou bee the King of the IEVVES saue thy selfe and come downe from the Crosse And last one of the Thieues vvho vvas hanged vvith Him falles out in rayling If thou bee that CHRIST saue thy selfe and vs. But nowe wee shall speake of euerie one of these in particular as the LORD shall giue vs grace and first vvee beginne at the part of the Hang-men Then in His sight whilest hee hanges they take his garmentes and made foure partes of them that euerie one of the men might haue a part thereof and as for his coat because it had no seame and was not sowed but was a wouen coat from the toppe thorowout therefore they woulde not diuide it but woulde cast lottes for it whose it shoulde bee And all this was done that that which was prophesied by Dauid vvho vvas the figure of Christ Psal 22.19 might bee fulfilled which saieth They diuided my garmentes among them and on my coat did cast lottes Now to let you see that these Hangmen did nothing in all this action but that which from all eternitie was appointed to bee done in the councell of GOD. To examine this fact better First they doe Him vvrong in spoyling the LORD IESVS
shall rehearse vnto you the vvhole Passion of IESVS CHRIST in as fewe vvordes as I can Then the whole life of Iesus Christ whilest Hee was in this vvorlde vvas a continuall suffering of the burthen of our sinnes that Hee bare and that obedience to His Father required that not onely in His life-time shoulde Hee doe for our saluation but chiefely it required that the Mediator shoulde die All that Hee did had beene nothing worth to vs and if Hee had not died for as the Apostle sayeth HEBR. CHAP. IX VERS XXII No remission of sinnes without blood Thinke not that euer thy sinnes shall bee forgiuen thee without the shedding of the blood of Iesus Christ And either thou must die or haue part in the death of the Mediator The ende of His suffering was the perfect abolishing and vndoing of the sinnes of the Elect as yee may reade in the ninth CHAPTER to the HEBREVVES Now marke againe This perfect abolishing and vndoing of our sinnes required a perfect passion and suffering of the Mediator Whether ye looke to the time it required a perfect time or will yee looke to the greatnesse of it it required an infinite quantitie of greatnesse for if it had not bene perfect in time and quantitie thou hadst neuer beene redeamed Brethren that yee maye the better vnderstande the vvhole Passion of IESVS CHRIST I shall point out vnto you the vvhole manner of His sufferinges For why shoulde vvee not knowe this Our life standes in His death Hee suffered all for vs. And I see thorowe out the Scripture the vvhole sufferinges of Christ maye bee drawne to these three sortes The first is The Lord Iesus suffered temptations Secondlie The Lord Iesus suffered shame and ignominie the GOD of glorie suffered shame Howe agree these two together Shame and Glorie The thirde the LORD IESVS suffered paine and that verie grieuous paine in soule and bodie I shall goe thorowe all these three kinds of suffering shortlie and so I shall make an ende And first to speake of these temptations shortlie I call the temptations that the LORD suffered those tryalles of Him by the Deuill His enemie for hee let Him neuer rest and woefull was that battell that Hee had with him on the Crosse and His temptations by the ministers of the Deuill in the worlde who solicitated Him to leaue His GOD euen such temptations as wee are subject to in this worlde onelie except sinne for Hee knewe no sinne there vvas not one spotte of sinne in that holie One and so Hee was not subject to these foule motions inwarde temptations as we are who dare not face the Sunne nor the Moone And wherefore suffered Hee all these temptations Euen for thy cause the ende of all His suffering was that Hee might succour all them who were tempted either in bodie or soule HEBR. Chap. 2. vers 18. Art thou tempted if thou canst haue recourse to Him who was tempted for thy sake Hee will pittie thee As Hee suffered and was tempted so by His suffering Hee hath learned to pittie thee Hee who neuer hath tasted of miserie hee cannot pittie the miserable bodie And therefore when thou art tempted goe to CHRIST and saye LORD thou wast tempted as I am therefore now helpe and succour mee Thus farre for the first sort of Christes sufferinges The seconde sort was His shame and ignominie that open ignominie that He suffered especiallie on the Crosse Whether ye looke to His accusation they accused that most innocent One as a vile sinner or whether ye looke to all these false Testimonies that were brought against Him or yet whether yee looke to the tauntes and mockinges that Hee suffered and to that spitting on His face and blasphemies vpon the Crosse In all these yee shall sâ—e that shame He suffered for our sinnes The Apostle ROMAN Chap. 15. vers 3. saies Iesus Christ when hee was in the worlde hee spared not nor hee pleased not himselfe as wee doe but as it is written The rebukes of them which rebuke thee fell on me All these despites thou shouldest haue suffered but the LORDE Hee translated them vpon Himselfe O the shame that the sinner shoulde haue suffered and if the LORD IESVS had not taken it off the backe of the sinner and laid it on His owne backe Come to the last sort Thou who wouldest bee freed of paine either in bodie or soule Marke the paine of the Lord lay holde on it and apply it to thy soule for otherwise Nothing shall remaine for thee but paine euerlastingly all the kingdomes of the worlde shall not saue thee Then the last sort was paine and dolour in body and paine and dolour in soule but in the soule chiefly Looke to the time of it from His first conception to His last breath scarcely was the Lord well borne when thorow the persecution of Herode the Tyranne His mother was compelled to flee with Him to Egypt from that time He was vnder continuall affliction whilst as Hee entered into the thirtie yeere of His age when Hee takes vpon Him the part of a Mediator for mankinde from this foorth for Hee liued after this space three yeeres and an halfe His paine grew and increased in body and soule and ay nearer the last houre His displeasure and paine grew the more Now Brethren we shall speake shortly of these paines and dolours that the Lord suffered in the time of these three yeeres and an halfe for the Gospell makes mention of that suffering during this space the Lord Iesus is in continuall paine both of body and soule not in body onely but chiefly in the soule His paine during this time is chiefly that inwarde anguish all His paine was for our sinnes if yee compare the soule and the body together the soule is ten times worse and more sinfull than the bodie the soule is nothing but a sinke of sinne all sinne proceedes out of that stinking puddle of the soule The body hath no life in it but that which it hath of the soule and therefore seeing the Lord offered Him to suffer for our sinnes Hee behooued to suffer chiefly in the soule What shall I say of the impudent Papists who maintaine this doctrine that the Lord suffered not that inward paine of the soule O! that they dare be so bolde as to auouch such doctrine against the manifest wordes of the Holy Spirit They knowe not what sinne is They knowe not what is the greatnesse of the euill of sinne or the Iustice of GOD and lastly they know not what is the mercie of IESVS CHRIST In a worde I proclaime both before GOD and His Angels the Pope and his shauelings are open enemies to the Crosse of CHRIST if it were but in this that they take away the chiefe part of His suffering Bee thou a Papist if thou continuest in that fantasie thou shalt neuer haue no part nor portion of His suffering Concerning the suffering of His bodie and of that ignominious death of
to helpe the part that is distressed Euen so it was with the LORD for when for our sinnes Hee was vnderlying the wrath of that Omnipotent Iudge all the faculties of His soule His vnderstanding His memorie c left all their functions that all might concurre to helpe Him in that common agonie Well Brethren if yee would see Hell yee haue here the viue image of it The reprobate after that at the first they are astonished vvith the sudden vvrath as they continue in Hell their dolour and paine shall euer be augmented the vvrath shall still lye vpon them like a mountaine tumbling on them and pressing them euer in soule body so that they remaine euer in this euerlasting paine Christ made an end of it but if thou be a reprobate this anguish shall neuer leaue thee Oh! that the vvorld vvill not knovv this and once pause on it vvould they then thinke ye runne to all mischiefe as they doe And if once thou be cast into Hell mountaines of dolour and heapes of vvrath shall be heaped on thee for euermore These are tvvo parts of that Hell that the Lord suffers novv vvould yee haue the thirde part I remit you to the 5. Chapter to the Hebrewes vvhere there Paul sayes that the Lord vvhen Hee prayed in the dayes of His flesh vvith strong cries and vvith teares Hee vvas heard He had a terrible feare beside the present paine He vvas in a feare of a greater danger to insue If thou goest to Hell once beside the present paine that thou shalt be in And O the vveight of that paine that shall be on thee thou shalt euer haue a terrible feare of a greater paine to fall on thee y e paine of Hell is not ended in a moment but y u shalt finde the paine gâ—ovving euerlastingly a mountaine of vvrath shall come after another as y e vvaues of the sea follovving one another It is a sore matter to be in this paine euerlastingly Now we haue heard the first ground out of the wordes of the Holy Spirit Come to the second ground When He was in the agonie He vtters such effects that they who saw Him and heard that pitifull voyce might easily see what anguish Hee had in the soule He falles out in a prayer Father take away this cuppe that is the cuppe of thy wrath wherein He vtters a forgetfulnesse of our redemption the dolour so increases vpon Him that Hee prayes with greater intention with teares and with strong cries and with weeping Hell will cause thee to mourne and compell thee to squeele and houle like a dogge laugh not it will cause thee to gnash thy teeth if thou be cast in vtter darknesse yet as He prayes the wrath increases that He did sweate blood and the droppes of blood fell from His face to the ground What man read ye of or heard yee euer of or euer shall that was in such a feare in such a torment that for the feare of the torment he did sweat blood So that ye see that the Lord was in such anguish as neuer a man was Were any of the Martyres in such a feare or such an anguish as this No no Then as Hee vtters His agonie in prayer so Hee vtters it in many heauie and bitter complaints Iohn 12. When hee is speaking of His glorification suddenly He breakes off and sayes My soule is troubled what shall I say and then Hee turned Him to His Father and sayes Saue mee from this houre and last Hee sayes My soule is heavie on all sides euen to the death But of all complaints this that Hee vtters on the Crosse My God my God why hast thou forsaken mee is the most heauie and it proceedes from the most bitter anguish of the soule Nowe the Lord grant that this complaint may saue vs from that complaint of the reprobate that they shall vtter in Hell No question these words vtter a forsaking of Him and that Hee was deserted for a time He was left off without all comfort in the world Of all joy that He was wount to haue all joy was taken from Him They import not a diuulsion of the Godhead from the manhead the glorious Godhead dwelt in the Lord Iesus whilst as He hang on the Crosse GOD neuer left Him at any time after that once the Sonne of God tooke to Himselfe our flesh Hee left it neuer no not on the Crosse nor in the graue Hee left it neuer nor neuer shall but the Godhead kept it selfe so closse in Christ the man that it would let Him haue no joy whilst He should pay that ransom to the vttermost farthing whereby the justice of God was satisfied for our sinnes And this is the thing He complaines on Yet whilst He sayes My God my God He lets vs see Hee despaires not but in the meane time whilst Hee was left He cleauâ—th to God hath His confidence in His God the Deuill and all the world cannot separate Him from His GOD that dwelt within Him Confidence in God will ofttimes be in the godly without feeling of joy albeit that Spirit will not be out of their soules The Spirit will minister no joy to them yet the poore soule will neuer leaue off to put confidence in God Well this complaint tells vs that Iesus Christ was deserted for a time to saue vs who should haue bene reprobates for euer But there is a great difference betweene Iesus Christ and the reprobate Indeede they agree in this that both He and they are left comforâ—lâ—sse He vttered a great complaint so they shall complaine and houle And as He cried and wept so shall they But here is the difference He was for a time in a manner reprobate they shall bee made reprobates for euer Hee complained for a time but they shall complaine for euer He ceases not to put His confidence in God the reprobate shall haue no confidence but as God shall leaue them so shall they leaue God as God shall turne His backe on them so shall they turne their backe on God This is a sore matter Then Iesus Hee vttered this complaint My God my God They shall not say My God why hast thou left mee but shall crie alas for euer God hath left me for euer and cast me off from His presence for euer This speech My God is a speech of confidence and He cleaues to God in His heart they shall shoute and cry GOD hath left mee for euermore cast me off This for the two grounds come to the third ground that is our owne feeling for if thou feelest not all thy knowledge auailes not a straw Paul to the Phillippians Chapter 3. sayes He counted all things to be but losse and dung that he might knowe Him that is Iesus Christ TheÌ„ he sets down the parts of this knowledge that I may know Him the vertue of His resurrectioÌ„ the coÌ„munion of His Passions be made conformable to His death
to worke this worke of redemption and saluation by base and naughty meanes that the world respects no more of than the dirt which they treade on Looke what is the difference betwixt the wisedome of GOD and the wisedome of man Will yee looke to the cause of our redemption to IESVS CHRIST or to the Professors and to Ministers they are the foolishest in the vvorlde sillie bodies and compare them vvith potent men they are but contemptible and of no valour and compare them with wise men they are but fooles So looke to the Crosse and to the Ministerie thereof whereby wee are saued all is weake base and contemptible and all to this ende that the LORD onelie maye gette the glorie and as the APOSTLE saies He that glorieth may onlie glory in the LORD And let euerie one of vs giue glorie to that LORD of Glorie To whome with the Father and the Holie Spirite bee all Honour and Praise for euermore AMEN THE XXI LECTVRE OF THE PASSION OF CHRIST MATTH CHAP. XXVII verse 47 And some of them that stood there when they heard it saide This man calleth Elias verse 48 And straightway one of them ranne and tooke a spunge and filled it with vineger and put it on a reede and gaue him to driâ—ke verse 49 Other said Let be let vs see if Elias will come and saue him verse 50 Then Iesus cryed againe with a loude voyce yeelded vp the ghost MARKE CHAP. XV. verse 35 And some of them that stood by when they heard it said Beholde hee calleth Elias verse 36 And one ranne and filled a spunge full of vineger and put it on a reede and gaue him to drinke saying Let him alone let vs see if Elias will come and take him downe verse 37 And Iesus cryed with a loude voyce and gaue vp the ghost LVKE CHAP. XXIII verse 46 And Iesus cryed with a loude voyce and saide Father into thine handes I commende my spirite And when hee had thus said hee gaue vp the ghost IOHN CHAP. XIX verse 28 After when Iesus knewe that all thinges were performed that the Scripture might bee fulfilled hee saide I thirst verse 29 And there was set a vessell full of vineger and they filled a spunge with vineger and put it about an hyssope stalke and put it to his mouth verse 30 Now when Iesus had receiued of the vineger hee said It is finished and bowed his head and gaue vp the ghost DVRING the time that the LORD IESVS hung quicke on the Crosse which was three houres and large more yee may reade well-beloued in Christ sundrie voyces that He vttered When I looke thorowe the foure Euangelistes I finde in number sixe sundrie voyces and euery one of them is well to be marked for at that time Hee vttered nothing in vaine The first voyce wee reade of was a voyce of diuine power together vvith mercy when one of the Thieues who hung at His right hand said to Him Lord remember me when thou commest to thy Kingdome The Lord answered him like a King and like a powerfull and mercifull God Verily J say vnto thee this day thou shalt bee with mee in Paradise The next voyce was a voyce of humane pittie and naturall affection toward His Mother she being by the Crosse with Iohn and other women He recommendes her to the custodie of His wâ—ll beloued Disciple The thirde voyce wee reade of was a voyce of sadnesse proceeding from an heart that was sadde on euery side to the death and from that agonie on the Crosse My God my God why hast thou forsaken mee The fourth voyce in like manner was a voyce of sadnesse proceeding from a wonderfull heate in the soule and body I thirst The fifth voyce by all appearance was a voyce of joye seeing the worke of Redemption to bee wrought and the wrath of His Father to be asswaged He saies after He had drunken the vineger Jt is finished The sixt and last voyce in like manner was a voyce of joye for finding Hee was to giue vp the ghoste immediately and finding His Father sweetly to loose His soule from His bodie He saies Father into thine hands I commend my spirit Now Brethren all thâ—se foresaid voyces the Lord vttered during the time that He hung quick on y e Crosse Of these we haue heard the first the second the third which was that heauie complaint that Hee made to His Father My God my God c. This daye as God shall giue vs grace wee shall speake of the three other voyces one of them of sadnesse and the other two of joye But before wee come to these voyces which are the three lâ—st voyces wee haue to speake something of the misconstruing of the complaint of the Lord vttered to His God Nowe the Iewes that stood by Him and heard Him crie Eli Eli for Hee cryed aloude of maliciousnesse not of mistaking Him they begin to calumniate and to misconstrue His wordes because the worde Eli which is My God sounded like Elias Therefore they said Hee cryed for Elias when Hee cryed on His God Let vs see if Elias will come and take Him downe In the which wordes wee may see clearely that they sought not onelie to destroy His bodie but the Deuill in them sought to sunder and seuer Him both in soule and bodie from His God they woulde not heare Him crye vpon His God but they sought to destroy His bodie and His soule such was the insatiable malice of the hearts of these Iewes against Iesus Christ This is the common dealing of the Deuill and his instruments with the godly and chiefely in that last houre when the separation of the soule from the body is to follow Not only to get the body dead but the soule God separated if thou beginnest to pray call on God they will scorne thy prayer seeke to cut thee froÌ„ God all hope of life But to leaue them their bitter maliciousnes As in all the poinctes of the suffering of Christ I looke more to the disposition of His Father than to the Iewes to the deuil or his instrumeÌ„ts So I doe in this No question as His Father exercises Him inwardly with a bitter wrath eueÌ„ so wheÌ„ as the Lord by making an heauy mone seekes an outgaet cries My God my God c Hee will haue Him met outwardly with bitternes Aime where He wil He meetes Him with nothing but bitternes wrath inwardly outwardly hell inward outward no refuge nor escaping till y t ransome be payed to the least farthing Wel BrethreÌ„ if ye would see an image of hell see it here The Lord Iesus was for a time fealt nothing but extreame bitternes But the reprobate after they be once casten into hell there is nothing for them but bitternes let theÌ„ aime here there to escape houle cry they shal be met wiâ—h bitternes What if it were but for a time The Lord escaped His suffering
the Lord is remembring His mercie and teaches them by wonders to looke yet if they will take a lesson to repent of all the indignitie that they had done Hee threatens them with the one hand and offers mercie with the other to see if they will repent This is the dealing of the Lord Hee warnes them and He sayes Yet I will not swallow thee vp with the earth and I will not let the rockes tumble downe on thee to deuoure thee yet repent for there is gâ—ace for thee if thou turnest Brethren no man shall goe to Hell without aduertisement to stand to the end that if thou wilt not repent when the Lord begins to put hand in thee and to rent thee thy mouth may be closed that thou canst not say Lord I got no warning all excuses shall be put away Alas will not men learne for all this shaking of the mountaines Lord shake these hearts of ours the Lord be merciful to all sinful soules to senslesse creatures lest wheÌ„ they shall cry Peace all things are sure enough theÌ„ sudden iudgement approach the wrath come ouertake them Now come to y e last thing I shall end Are there none y t are moued at all at these wonders Amongst so many hundreths thousands is there not one moued yes there are some moued who are these are the high Priests moued No not a whit is there any of y e rest of y e order of y e Priests moued Not They continue blinde and dumbe Are the Pharises and the Scribes or the Elders mooued No They are not mooued but the more they heare their heartes are the more hardened Who are then mooued at these vvonders It is an Ethnicke bodie a Captaine of men of vvarre vnder PILATE and a Pagane vvho neuer once knewe GOD yet vvhen hee sees this and hearde the voyces hee saies Of a suretie this man was just And more hee saies Truely this was the Sonne of GOD. Is there anie moe Yes A bande of men of vvarre Not of the IEVVES but such as had liued on robberie vvithout the feare of GOD they feared greatly and saide also Truely this man was the Son of GOD. Who of the IEVVES is mooued Not the Scribes and the Pharises and the rest of the Order they are nothing moued but the sillie multitude vvho cryed before Crucifie him nowe they goe home smiting on their breastes and crying vvoe to them for that dayes labour but there vvas neuer a motion in the Priestes or in anie of the Princes or Pharises or Scribes It is a vvonderfull thing to see that they vvho had judgement and vnderstanding and who had read all the prophecies of the MESSIAS to come gotte no sense yet a sillie multitude gettes some sight and sense Woulde yee knowe and poinct out a senselesse creature vvho vvill not bee mooued neither by vvorke nor vvorde It is such a man as hath this vvorldly wisedome Such a man as hath knowledge and yet does against his knowledge and conscience for all that these Priestes and Pharises did vvas both against knowledge and conscience They repined against the Holy Spirit and against their conscience they crucifie Iesus Whosoeuer thou art who opponest thee to the brightnes of the Gospell thou crucifiest the Lord of glory and as it shal be layed to the charge of the high Priests and Pharises and of Pilate and Herode in that Great daye that they crucified IESVS CHRIST So it shall bee layed to thy charge and thou shalt bee as guiltie of His blood as they Woe to that soule which vvill resist that word and the Holy Spirite Woe shall bee to the great men in this land vvho against conscience conspires against CHRIST Religion and their natiue Countrey for vvrath and vengeance remaineth for them if they leaue not off this vnhappie course The King of SPAINE and all their associates shall not bee able to holde vengeance off them that shall one daye bee heaped vpon their heads The LORD saue vs from induration and neuer suffer vs to repine against Light nor to scrape it out of our soule and conscience I see heere further The LORD gettes moe friendes in His death than in His life The Centurion and the men of vvarre they curse the time that euer they vvere employed in that seruice The multitude vvho bad crucifie Him thorowe blindnesse and ignorance nowe they repent the time that euer they did it and they returne homewardes knocking vpon their breastes That immaculate Lambe that precious Sacrifice hanging thus on the Crosse Hee cast such a sweete smell on the earth and on the people that they vvho vvere His enemies goe awaye mourning This falles out often times in the Martyres for some people goes out with them who woulde eate them and yet the LORD IESVS makes their death to cast such a sweete smell that it is effectuall to mooue manie thousandes to mourne and to bee conuerted So that it is founde to bee true that the bloode of the Martyres is the seede of the Kirke And they who woulde haue swallowed them before in their death pitties them and become their friendes thorowe the sweete smell which they felt comming from their death and would goe home mourning that euer they were enemies vnto them and were instrumentes of their death Therefore let the enemies of the trueth persecute the Sainctes of GOD and His Trueth with Fire and Sworde as they please They shall gette no vantage and they shall not gette this Light quenched for there shall such a sweete smell arise out of the ashes of the Sainctes which in despight of the enemies farre moe shall bee wonne to IESVS CHRIST by their death than euer was wonne to Him by their life To Him therefore vvith the Father and the Holie Spirite bee all Honour Praise and Glorie for euermore AMEN THE XXIII LECTVRE OF THE PASSION OF CHRIST MATTH CHAP. XXVII verse 55 And many women were there beholding him afarre off who had followed Iesus from Galile ministring vnto him verse 56 Among whom was Marie Magdalene and Marie the Mother of Iames and Ioses and the mother of Zebedeus sonnes MARKE CHAP. XV. verse 40 There were also women who behelde afarre off among whome was Marie Magdalene and Marie the Mother of James the lesse and of Ioses and Salome verse 41 Who also when Hee was in Galile followed Him and ministred vnto Him and manie other women who came vp with Him vnto Hierusalem LVKE CHAP. XXIII verse 49 And all his acquaintance stoode afarre off and the women that followed him from Galile beholding these thinges IOHN CHAP. XIX verse 31 The Iewes then because it was the Preparation that the bodies shoulde not remaine vpon the Crosse on the Sabbath daye for that Sabbath was an high dayâ— besought Pilate that their legges might bee broken and that they might bee taken downe WEE haue heard these dayes past beloued Brethren in Christ what was the part of the whole
Father so did it cast a sweeter smell in the nose of the godlie than euer they founde and they thought it had such a fragrant odour and such a sweet smell vnto them that they thought ere they had beene separated from Him in His death they had rather chosen to haue dyed a thousande deathes for as the Lord saies Wheresoeuer the carion is there must the Eagles resort Well is the man who in his death findes the sweete smell of y e death of Iesus Christ I haue no more to say of this matter but if this acquaintance of Iesus for the time tooke such a pleasure in His death beeing shamefull that they could not bee separated from Him it is a shame to vs to draw so far backe from Him not now hanging in ignominie on the crosse but most glorious in the Heauens Fye on this dull headed and dead world that hath no sense of that glorie and is not allured by that vnspeakable glorie rather to suffer a thou and deathes albeit it were the sword the fire and all torments than to be separated from this Iesus Christ But the womens part is more particularly to bee considered Let all women take heede it is saide Many women were there Moe of them haue followed the Lord to the crosse than men that I may speake to the glorie of GOD and shame of men As for men I finde nothing but this generall In Luke a companie of men and women but in Matthew and Marke I finde of women especially they are looking on Him with sadnesse mixed with joy And from whence came they It is said that They came out of Galile following on Him they neuer left Him they wearied not to follow such a guide they ministred to Him on their owne charge As they were fedde with that bread of life that came out of His mouth so they spared not freely and liberally to communicate all that they had to Him And happie is the man who so findes the effect of the word of life in his heart that hee would bestowe againe all that he hath for the loue of that word Brethren yee know what is in hand presently many words neede not seeing this diuision of the towne in competent Congregations intended is to feede your soules with the word of life spare not for goods to get that word of life Nowe I see beside the multitude mention made of three women Marie Magdalene then Marie the mother of Iames the lesse and of Ioses and Salome the mother of the two sonnes of Zebedeus No question these women mentioned here haue borne a tender affection to the Lord forgets the Lord that loue they bare to Him in all times before in following Him from Galile to Ierusalem and from Ierusalem vnto the ignominious death of the crosse and there staying with the Lord and not leauing Him but ministring to Him forgets the Lord this No but He remembers vpon it thou shalt neuer doe a good deede to IESVS CHRIST but Hee shall meete thee they loue Him and Hee honours them they neuer left Him they shamed the men yea His disciples yea euen the very Apostles for we read not of any of all His Apostles that any of them was there present except Iohn Peter had taken him to a backe side for all his stoutnesse before the rest were offended in Him These women did cleaue to Him through the band of loue forgets the Lord this No as they loue Him beyond His Apostles so the Lord honoures them aboue the Apostles It is no small thing to get the honour to be an eye witnes of the death and resurrection of IESVS CHRIST it is greater honour than all the honour in the world No doubt the LORD made these women in their turning backe preachers to the Apostles themselues they tolde Peter Iames and Matthew what they had seene there is none end of honour when the Lord begins to honour as He honours them to be witnesses of His death and preachers of it to others so Hee will haue the names of some of them to bee registrate to the posteritie And it is the will of IESVS CHRIST that this day I promulgate the names of these women in your audience to their honour after so many hundreth yeeres and their names shall be registrate perpetually to their euerlasting honour whilst IESVS CHRIST come againe yea their names shall bee written in the Heauens euerlastingly Neuer one repents the gratitude done to IESVS CHRIST thou shalt get two good deedes for one Againe the LORD will let vs see in the example of these women that oft times in women there will be a more tender loue to the Lord IESVS than in men who are the stronger sexe ye will see the weaker and simpler that the sexe bee and the lesse worldly wit that it haue the more spiritually it is disposed the more affectionate it is to heauenly thinges the greater heauenly wisdome it hath If any man sayes PAVL seeme to bee wise in this world let him bee a foole that hee may bee wise that is truâ—ly wise wise in GOD 1. Cor. 3.18 And as their loue is great so the Lord will honour them to the shame of men and whereas men should preach CHRIST Hee will make women to preach IESVS CHRIST to men to the shame of men and His owne glorie All tends to this that as men and women doe desire to bee honoured of God so all men and women should striue continually to loue and glorifie GOD. GOD loues none nor honoures none but only those who loue and honour the Lord Iesus Christ if thou louest not the Lord Iesus Christ thou shalt get no loue nor honour of God yet further this is not to be passed by the world vvonders novv that Hee had such an eye to these three vvomen There were many hundreth men but how many of their names were registrate to their honour Hee had such a respect to them that He espied them out beside the rest of thousands that were there and by His Holy Spirit caused registrate them This registrating of them came not rashly but from an ordinance of God and His especiall Prouidence There is not a publike conuention albeit it were a man hanged where multitudes of men and women run together to heare see but the all-seeing eye of the Lord is vpon euery person in particular man woman ladde or lasse Neuer an head there great or small poore or rich noble or ignoble but the eye of the Lord is on them yea it goes downe to the inward affections to rippe and search them to see of what disposition euery soule is As for example we are all met together here sundry men and women some greater some smaller some younger some older yet there is not one of vs on whome the Lord hath not His eye We are met to see Iesus Christ crucified on mount Caluarie there is not one of our hearts but the eye of the Lord sees it and Hee
the Lord Iesus had bene crucified taunted and scorned and suffered all the ignominie that euer could haue bene and yet had bene taken downe quicke and the nailes loosed gotten His wounds healed thou hadst not beene sâ—uâ—d thy saluation had not beene wrought Our sinnes had neuer bene forgiuen vs for without shedding of blood and death there had bene no remission of sinnes except I know beside all the paine the Lord suffered that He suffered the death also I would neuer beleeue to get life to be saued Now to end in a word Looke to the witnesses the burrioes they were euill witnesses for themselues but good witnesses for vs for their witnessing testifies to our wâ—ll that the Lord was dead and so these burrioes haue done a notable good worke to vs but not to themselues because they were His enemies It is as tâ—ue this day as it was that day there is and shall be witnesses preaching the death of CHRIST crying That CHRIST died for the redemption of the vvorlde and teaching saluation by CHRIST to others and others shall gette good by them yet they shall gette no good themselues Why Because they are enemies to the Crosse of CHRIST An enemie to His death can preach His death vvell enough All Preachers of the death of IESVS CHRIST ought to take heede to this That vvhen they preach to others as the Apostle saieth they be not reprobate themselues Woe to the man who preaches saluation to others if in the meane time hee bee a reprobate himselfe I must bee as carefull for mine owne saluation as for the saluation of others And therefore if thou speakest of the death of CHRIST to thy Neighbour striue to bee assured that thou thy selfe art partaker of that saluation through IESVS To vvhome vvith the Father and the Holie Spirite bee all Honour Praise and Glorie for euermore Amen THE XXIV LECTVRE OF THE PASSION OF CHRIST IOHN CHAP. XIX verse 34 But one of the Souldiours with a Speare pearced his side and foorthwith came there out blood and water verse 35 And hee that sawe it bare recorde and his recorde is true and hee knoweth that hee saieth true that yee might beleeue it verse 36 For these thinges were done that the Scripture should bee fulfilled Not a bone of him shall bee broken verse 37 And againe another Scripture saieth They shall see him whome they haue thrust thorow THE last day beloued Brethren in Christ we entered into the History of the taking of the Lord from the Crosse before Hee was buried The taking of Him from the Crosse it came by a request The Iewes His enemies made request to Pilate the Romane deputy and Iudge for the time The summe of the request was that the thies of the crucified men might bee broken and so they might bee taken from the Crosse Pilate the Iudge yeelded to the request gaue commandement to the souldiers to the burreo to execute slay them that afterward they might be buried The souldiers came first to the one thief broke his thies theÌ„ they came to the other thief broke his thies also and last they came to Iesus and finding Him already dead and to haue giuen vp â—he spirit they would not breake His legges Yet to put the matter out of doubt one of the souldiers came with a speare and pearced the Lords side thorow y e heart out of the wound there gushâ—d blood and water Nowe Brethren this day as the Lord shall giue vs grace we shal follow out this History and we shall speake of three things First of the effusion gushing out of the blood the water out of the side of the Lord. Then we shâ—ll speake of that graue testimonie that Iohn the writer of this Gospel gaue to the History narration that the bones of the Lord were not broken and that His side was pearced and that thereafter the bloode and the water gushed out Last we shall speake of the end wherfore these things came to passe There was not one bone of Him brokeÌ„ His side was pearced to the end that the word of the Lord long time spoken of before might be accoÌ„plished And he brings in two Scriptures the one coÌ„cerning that His bones shuld not be brokeÌ„ the other coÌ„cerning the pearcing of His side with the speare Now come to y e first of these heads I leaue the vaine dreame of the papistes for all their religion is but dreames fantasies I passe their dreame coÌ„cerning this souldier y t pierced the side of the Lord with a speare how they say y t the Griek worde 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which signifies a speare was the name of the man that pearced Christes side and how they saye that this man was a Centurion an olde Captaine who was blind after he had pearced the Lords side hee washed his eyes with the blood that issued out got his sight theâ—eafter in an instant was conuerted became a Christian man and a Martyre and this is he whom they worship and whose bones are kept as a relict and he is called Sainct Longimus I leaue the spirit of vanities fie on them they fill the hearts of the people of God with such vanities and therefore shame and confusion shall come vpoÌ„ them in the end Now Brethren to speake of that which is more profitable Of the gushing out of the blood and water out of the side of the Lord. IOHN saies that one of the souldiours with a speare pearced his side and foorthwith came there out blood and water No doubt this effusion of the blood and water in a part was naturall and ordinarie for they who haue skill in the things which concerne the bodie of man and knowe the Anatomie they knowe that the heart of man is a receptacle of bloode and in the heart is the cleannest and finest blood The vitall blood is fined in the heart of man and the bloode there is finer than in the rest of the bodie Yee heare commonlie that the heart blood is the finest blood and moste precious Ye know likewise that there is a fliece which compasseth and goes about the heart which is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and in it there is some liquor and water wherewith the heat in the heart is cooled and refreshed Then to come to the purpose The Lord being pearced thorow the sidâ— and in thorow the heart it was no wonder that that bloode in the heart and that water in the fliece should haue gushed out especiallie seeing that Hee had but newlie giuen vp the ghoste and Hee was yet warme so that this blood and this water coulde not bee yet much altered by reason of the shortnesse of time But Brethren when I weigh this matter more deepelie and consider that this bloode and this vvater gushes out in such aboundance and so distinctlie that the one is so seuered from the other that they who stoode beside might discerne verie
with great weight and manie graue wordes Wee haue hearde before sundrie testimonies of His death The Lord in the last wordes Hee testifies of His owne death when Hee cryes Father into thine handes I commende my spirite All those wonders from the Heauen testified that the Lorde had giuen vp the ghoste His Heauenlie Father made the Burreoes and the men of warre to testifie that Hee was dead and to preach it to all the people about Now IOHN comes in last and with many words and wordes of great weight testifies that the Lorde gaue vp the ghoste What meanes all this Ye see there is not any thing in all the historie testified by so many testimonies The Spirit of God labours not to perswade vs of any thing in all His Passion so much as that He died and to certifie this that Hee was pearced with a speare To leaue the Heresies which fell in the worlde concerning the death of Christ for it was much to perswade the world of it they would not beleeue that IESVS died truelie All these testimonies lets vs see such a necessitie to bee in the death of IESVS that except the LORD had died as truelie as euer man died Hee coulde not haue beene our Redeemer And except Hee had died truelie wee coulde neuer haue beleeued to haue beene saued by Him Except I knowe as truelie as euer I knewe any thing in the worlde that my Redeemer died for mee I woulde neuer goe seeke life out of His death Indeed a wanton sinner who is ladeÌ„ with sin feeles not the weight thereof so loÌ„g as his coÌ„science is sleeping that he feeles not y e burreo sees not y t fearfull wrath that caÌ„not be quenched without bloode that terrible justice of God y t cannot be satisfied but by death will count little of the death of Christ It is alike to him whether He had died or no so loÌ„g as thou sleepest al is alike but after the coÌ„scieÌ„ce is wakened the Lord once let thee feele the weight of thy sinnes wherewith thou art ladned No if thou diddest but feele the weight of an euill thought thou wouldest groane as fast as if the mountaines and rockes were tumbled on thee and then thou wouldâ—st thinke no life nor saluation for thee but Hell and damnation if thou gottest not a Sauiour for thee and if thou feelest that Iustice of God and the terrours of Hell before thee the sight of the death of Iesus would be the most joyfull and comfortable sight that euer thou sawest and all thy joy glorie would be in that death of Christ Paul sayes Gal. 6.14 Far be it from me that I should reâ—oyce in any thing but in the death of Christ he fouÌ„d all his life to be in that death 1. Cor. 2.2 he sayes When I came amongst you to speake of the death of Christ to you who knew not what it meant a vaine companie they were who delited in vaine oratorie I would not begin to clawe your itching eares but I decreed to know nothing but Iesus Christ and Him crucified Nowe Brethren besides this In these wordes that IOHN sets downe and 〈◊〉 the which hee aggreadges his testimonie marke another lesson Will ye see from whence our Faith comes from whence comes our Faith from whence flowes it IOHN sayes And he that saw it bare record and his recorde is true and he knoweth that hee saith true that they should beleeue From whence then comes Faith in this death it comes by hearing Faith is of hearing of a testimonie and recorde and if thou hearest not a record thou shalt not beleeue and if thou beleeuest not thou shalt neuer see Heauen And if thou contemnest the recorde I giue thee this doome thou shalt neuer see Heauen with thine eyes if thou werest a King So Faith is wrought in the heart by the Holy Spirit by a recorde and witnesse bearing So ere thou gettest Faith some witnesse must stand vp and beare recorde The Lord must send out some witnesse to cry and preach but what witnesses must these be IOHN sayes He that saw these things hath testified of them The witnesses must be seeing witnesses it must be Iohn and such as saw Him and felt Him with their handes Then who must bee the witnesses They must be the Apostles that were conuersant in this world with Iesus Christ who heard Him preach and saw Him vvorke vvonders and savv Him dead and savv Him crucified and savve Him pierced thorovv the side They must be the first witnesses But more Brethren Is it enough that they savve Him with their bodily eye No Iohn addes more that hee vvas persvvaded that his testimonie was true The vvitnesses as they testifie that vvhich they savve so they must beleeue it vvith their heartes There were great multitudes hundreths thousands vvho heard Him touched Him and savv Him crucified and some of them crucified Him too yet none of these are made vvitnesses to preach to the vvorld but the Apostles vvho savv and beleeued these are set vp as witnâ—sses in y e world that all should beleeue TheÌ„ the first ground of thy Faith is the very eye of the Apostles their sight and sense The next ground is Faith in the heartes of the Apostles And if yee will say to me Why beleeue ye the Gospell of Iohn and the Gospell of Matthew and the Epistles of Paul c. I answere because these were men who heard and saw Christ and I will say more I beleeue them because they beleeued in their heartes that thing which they saw and goe before not onely by sight of the body but also by Faith in the heart When yee heare these recordes albeit the men be not liuing yet we haue that same thing that they wrote and that which they themselues beleeued I beseech you consider them and passe not ouer lightly when yee reade of Iohn or Paul or the rest I beseech you passe not lightly seeing the ground of thy Faith is not onely their sight but the sense of their heartes and Faith ye who would read with judgement trauell to goe into the heart to seeke that Faith into the heart and that joy and that sadnesse that they felt and pray LORD seeing these men vtter a feeling of these things that they saw and which they wrote touch mine heart and giue me thine Holy Spirit that I may attaine to the sense and feeling of these things If ye would haue a testimonie of this beholde what PAVL sayes in the second Epistle to the Corinthians the fourth Chapter and fourteenth verse I beleeue that I my selfe shall gloriously rise and then he brings in Dauids wordes J beleeued and therefore I spake Alwayes looke that in reading we striue to haue a feeling and sense in our heart of that which we read otherwise we make no fruit of our reading we speake like parrats wee know not what we speake I say to thee if the word of grace rise not from the
bee charged with fire and sworde but woulde slippe ouer in wealth and quietnesse But true faith must abide the triall of the fire of manifolde temptations and afflictions Well the daye shall come when it will bee seene who among vs hath this fined faith They haue the fined faith who will seeke to Iesus Christ and to His promise in the fire I woulde haue spoken of these two Testimonies but I leaue them vntill the next occasion and so I ende heere beseeching the Lorde to haue a care of euerie one of vs and to furnishe vs vvith grace and strength that wee maye sticke fast vnto Him and His promises Not onelie nowe in peace but euen in the middest of the fire and in death it selfe That after this life bee ended vvee maye bee glorified in the Heauens thorowe Christ To whome vvith the Father and the Holie Spirite bee all Honour and Glorie for euermore AMEN THE XXV LECTVRE OF THE PASSION OF CHRIST MATTH CHAP. XXVII verse 57 And when the euen was come there came a rich man of Arimathea named Ioseph who had also himselfe beene Iesus disciple MARKE CHAP. XV. verse 42 And now when the night was come because it was the day of the preparation that is before the Sabbath verse 43 Ioseph of Arimathea an honourable Counsellour who also looked for the Kingdome of God came and went in boldlie vnto Pilate and asked the bodie of Jesus LVKE CHAP. XXIII verse 50 And beholde there was a man named Ioseph who was a Counseller a good man and a just IOHN CHAP. XIX verse 38 And after these things Ioseph of Arimathea who was a disciple of Iesus but secretly for feare of the Iewes bâ—sought Pilate that hee might take downe the body of Iesus And Pilate gaue him licence Hee came then and tooke Iesus bodie THese dayes past beloued Brethren in Christ we haue spoken of the taking downe of y e Lord from the Crosse after He was dead which came as yee heard by a request made to Pilate these who made the request were the Iewes his enemies they requested that he should be taken from the crosse not for any loue they bare to him but because it was the time of the preparation to the Passeouer they beleeued that Iesus the other two crucified meÌ„ who hung on y e Crosse should haue polluted their holy feast holy actioÌ„ request Pilate that y e thies of the crucified men might be brokeÌ„ that therafter they might be takeÌ„ down from from the Crosse The souldiers came first to the one thiefe broke his thie theÌ„ they came to the other broke his thie also last they came to Iesus finding Him to be dead they would not break His thie but one of the souldiers came with a speare in his hand and to put the matter out of doubt he thrust Him thorow y e heart so that out of the wound ran blood water in abundance WheÌ„ Iohn hath made a rehearsal of these things he joynes to a weighty testimony He who saw these things hath testified of them his testimony is true he knowes that they are true that ye might beleeue Last he sets down the end of these things first wherfore the thies of Iesus were not brokeÌ„ theÌ„ wherfore His side was pearced These things were done sais Iohn that y e Scripture might be fulfilled for this he alledges first y e which is spokeÌ„ of the type Exod. 12 Not one bone of the Pascal lambe might be brokeÌ„ and Zachar. 12. They shall see him whom they haue pearced thorow The last day Brethren we left off at these testimonies of Scripture therfore this day as God shal giue vs grace we shal speak first of these 2 testimonies therafter we shal enter to the next History y t is to the burial of Iesus Then to speak of the first testimony Not one bone of him shal be brokeÌ„ Moses speakes these words Exod. 12 of the pascall lamb he giues a commandement that in the eating of the pascall lamb not one bone of it should bee broken That which Moses speakes of the pascall lambe Ioh. drawes it vnto Iesus Christ because the Lord Iesus was the true pascall lambe and that lambe that the Iewes ate was but a figure shadow of that true lambe the Lord Iesus who tooke away the sinnes of the world therfore seing the type shadow had ceased by the death of Iesus Christ there was not a pascall lambe any more and all the celebration of the Passeouer that the Iewes vsed after the death of Iesus Christ was but vanitie it was good reason that Iohn shoulde draw that which was spoken of the figure to the thing signified by the figure for these wordes that Moses spake of the pascall lambe were accomplished in Christ there was not one jot of it but it was perfected and accomplished in Him Paul 1. Cor. 5 drawes to Christ the very words which Moses vsed in prescribing of the eating of the pascall lambe Put away the olde leauen that wee may bee a newe lumpe as wee are vnleauened for Christ our Passeouer is sacrificed for vs. Marke this lesson for our instruction When thou readest of the Types and Figures in the olde Testament cast away the Types and keepe the veritie and applâ—e it to CHRIST who is figured by the Types We are euer reading y t olde Scripture y t speakes of the types vsed in the old Church of the Iewes as that Scripture of the Paschal lambe and all the other ceremonies of the Iewes but take heede how yee read them read them not as the Iewes read them read not these Scriptures as though they were to bee vnderstood of as many types yet to bee kept in the earth bevvare of that Heare them not as though they vvere any figures and shadowes vnfulfilled for that were to exclude the Lord Iesus vvho only is the body But in reading cast avvay the types because they haue alll ceased at the comming and after the death of Christ Cast not away the Scripture but dravv it vnto Iesus and that vvhole Scripture which the Iewes vnderstood of the type vnderstand thou of Christ As for Example In reading of this Scripture Exod. 12.41 Cast aside the type the Paschall Lambe but cast not away the Scripture Ye shall not breake one bone of Him Take this Scripture and vnderstand it of Iesus Christ that Lambe of God and His bones And vve must not thinke Brethren that this is any vvrying and vvresting of the old Scripture by the ovvne sense because the same Scripture vvhich spake of the Type spake of Iesus but mediatly by the Types and the Fathers of olde by reading of the Types got a sight of the body looking in thorovv the shaddovv to the body This is no vvresting of the Scripture But novv seeing all Types are avvay it is good reason that those Scriptures novv immediatly be vnderstood of Christ vvhich before mediatly vvere applied to
the pointes of his Iustice it behoued Him to suffer all the points of Iustice vnder the earthly judge Pontius Pilate in His condemnation in His taking from the crosse in His burial this was all to the intent that thou mightest be fully freed from all the points of the Iustice of GOD for whatsoeuer thing He either did or suffered it was for thy cause There is another thing here that would not be passed by There is no question but it comes of the Prouidence of God that this body is neither reaued away by violence nor stollen away by slight but the taking away comes of a speciall request◠no question this matter was so dispensed that the death of Iesus should bee made notable and come to the eares of Pilate and all other men the death was to be made notable to the world likewise the buriall was to be made notable to the end that His glorious resurrection might be made knowne to the world These are the two pillars of our Faith the death of Christ and His resurrection these are the two points that the deuill and the Heretiques haue from time to time striuen to hew and cut downe that they should not appeare to the world because they are the chiefe pillars of our Faith but honour glory be to the Lord who of His grace hath kept these pillars constantly in His Church in despite of the deuill all his instrumēts Now the God of Heauen grant vs grace to take holde on His death and glorious resurrection that through His death and resurrection we may bee raised from death to newnesse of life here that hereafter wee may reigne in glory with Him To whome with the Father and the Holy Spirite bee all honour praise and glorie world without end AMEN THE XXVI LECTVRE OF THE BVRIALL OF CHRIST MARKE CHAP. XV. verse 44 And Pilate marueiled if hee were alreadie dead and called vnto him the Centurion and asked of him whether hee had beene any while dead verse 45 And when hee know the trueth of the Centurion hee gaue the bodie to Ioseph verse 46 Who bought a linnen cloth and tooke him downe and wrapped him in the linnen cloth c. IOHN CHAP. XIX verse 38 And after these things Ioseph of Arimathea who was a disciple of Iesus but secretly for feare of the Iewes besought Pilate that hee might take downe the body of Iesus And Pilate gaue him licence Hee came then and tooke Iesus bodie verse 39 And there came also Nicodemus who first came to Iesus by night and brought of myrrhe and aloes mingled together about an hundreth pound verse 40 Then tooke they the bodie of Iesus and wrapped it in linnen clothes with the odours as the manner of the Iewes is to burie THE last day welbeloued in Iesus Christ wee entered into the History of the Buriall of the Lord Iesus and wee hearde that the Buriall came by a request made to Pilate the Romane Deputie for the time The request maker was one IOSEPH Hee is set down and described by all the foure EVANGELISTES in all his properties Hee was a man of ARIMATHEA a Towne in IVRIE Hee vvas a rich man and also an honourable and graue Counseller Then as concerning the qualities of his person Hee was a good and an vpright man who liued vprightlie in the worlde and yet hee had a further respect than vnto this life for he waited constantlie for the Kingdome of God And therefore when Christ came into the worlde and tooke vpon Him that great office of the Mediator betwixt GOD and man hee enters into His schoole and became His Disciple howbeit for feare of the IEVVES hee durst not manifest himselfe but lurked secretlie for a time euen to this time that it came to the Buriall of the bodie of Iesus and then hee shewes himselfe to bee a Disciple of Christ In that Councell which was against the Lorde hee vvas a Counseller but hee vvoulde neither giue counsell nor consent to the condemning and slaying of CHRIST Thus much yee hearde before concerning this man and his properties Then wee hearde howe hee goes forwarde boldlie to Pilate to seeke the Lordes bodie Hee lurked before so long as Iesus was in the worlde working such wonders as neuer man wrought speaking with such a grace as neuer man spake with But nowe when Hee is dead hee comes out boldlie and goes to Pilate and hee manifestes himselfe To let vs see that IESVS in His death had greater force to drawe the soules of men vnto Him than Hee had in His life for from that death there came so sweete and sensible a smell to the soules of sinners that it drewe the soules of sinners vnto Him Namelie the heart of this man IOSEPH So that hee comes out boldlie as saide is and hee goes to PILATE and requestes him to giue him the bodie of IESVS to bee buried Thus farre vvee hearde the last daye Nowe this daye wee haue PILATES answere to IOSEPHS request PILATE wonders that He was dead so soone and for the more certaintie hee calles a Centurion and askes him if Hee was dead alreadie The Centurion affirmes that Hee was dead alreadie PILATE grantes the request After this we come to the maner of His Buriall Wee shall goe forward as time shall suffer God shall giue vs grace Pilate wonders that hee was so soone dead This wondering of Pilate no question imports that the death of Iesus was extraordinary It was not after the common fashion of men y t were crucified for men who were crucified they vsed to hing long on the Crosse before they yeelded the spirit dayes nights and in end ere they yeelded the spirite the life was taken from them by violence They were broken on the Crosse So Pilate hearing that the Lorde was so soone dead hee wondered as at an extraordinarie thing There are sundrie thinges that testifie that death of Iesus to haue beene extraordinary as first That mighty and loude voyce crying which the Lord vttered on the Crosse immediately before He yeelded the spirit for who will giue a loud crie at the yeelding of his spirit for at the poinct of death when nature failes it is a rare thing to finde a man to haue a voyce or a word Next The yeelding of His spirit so suddenly whē by the power of nature He might haue liued longer Last This wondering of Pilate testifies That His death was extraordinarie that there was a power in Iesus which controlled nature When nature would haue kept life the diuine power puts it out In a word This wondering testifies That the death of Iesus was the death of God the death of a man but God in the man glorious and blessed for euermore Now it is said Pilate vnderstood of the Centurion that Iesus was dead when hee granted the request of Ioseph and gaue the bodie to him to bee buried First I see Pilate is a good Iustitier the Romane Iustice was
see that all our honour stands in that that Iesus Christ may be honoured that we may be content with all men to glorifie Him he sayes not Nicodemus doe thou the rest of it I haue done my part I haue bought y e winding-sheete now I will goe my way doe thou the rest annoynt thou Him burie thou Him No he leaues Him not but when once he put his hand to Him he wil not leaue Him hast thou begun to serue Christ leaue Him not albeit a King should command thee leaue Him not if thou come not w t odours come with a windingsheet if not with y e windingsheet come put the towell about Him bind Him if thou doest no more stand by speake to His honur glorifie Him and if thou hast not a tongue to speake reuerently of Him think of Him reuerently honour Him in thy heart If thou honour Him not woe to thee if thou were a King wo to thee if y u glorify not y e God of glory this may let vs see by experience y t y e soule y t hath any will to glorify Iesus can neuer be at rest but wheÌ„ it is occupied in glorifying Him he saies this was done after y e custome of y e Jewes as they buried honorable men so they buried Iesus good reasoÌ„ was it y t so it should be there came neuer such an honorable man amoÌ„g them as Christ no not their kings Dauid Salomon c. were nothing to Him So it appeares y t this custome in y e buriall was according to their ceremonial law therefore these ceremonies y t y e Iewes vsed in these burialls their washing their odours the rest were all figures of Iesus to come of y t glorious resurrectioÌ„ of His which is y e ernest peÌ„ny of our resurrectioÌ„ for our resurrectioÌ„ depeÌ„ds on His glorious resurrection and if Hee had not risen we should neuer haue risen in glorie Seeing therefore they were shadowes after His death and resurrection all these ceremonies all this balming washing c. take an end and except thou wouldest say that Iesus is not risen and extinguish the sweet smel of His resurrection thou must leaue off all the ceremonies It is true buriall should be honoured and certainely in the buriall of men and women a great respect should bee had Why should the body of a man bee cast away the very light of Nature imprinted in the heart by the creation dites that the dead body of a man or a woman should be buried honourablie and that in hope of immortalitie Nature hath a smell of immortalitie and it causes the body be had in due regarde the beasts bodies ye see when they are dead they are cast avvay and no more is made of them Come to custome the custome of buriall that the Fathers vsed from the beginning teaches vs that the buriall of man and woman should be respected and that vpon the hope of resurrection Beginne at Adam goe to Abraham Isaac Iacob Joseph and all the rest of the holy Patriarkes they had a regarde of their burialls vpon hope of their resurrection for the bodies of the Sainctes vvho are buried shall rise gloriously in that great day and this they did not so much by Nature as by a reuelation of God and on this hope follovved these ceremonies the vvashing and balming of the bodies Acts 9.37 The very vvord the Scripture vses the vvord of slâ—eping shevv the bodie vvould not die for euer but that they laid downe the body in the graue to sleepe as if it vvere laide dovvne in a soft bed to sleepe not to lye for ay there but to rise againâ— in the morning vvhen the day shall rise Iesus Christ is the most glorious morning that euer vvas and the body that sleepes in Him shâ—ll rise againe to glorie vvhen Hee shall come in the cloudes vvâ—th millions of His Angels Come to the custome of the nations their buriall vvas honoured they did it of imitation follovving the Fâ—thers like Apes vvanting the hope of resurrection What hâ—lpeth thee thy buriall or the honours of it if thou vvantâ—st that hope of resurrection they vvanted the vvord of God the life of all ceâ—emonies what good doe all these ceremonies vvithout the vvord and promises of God by them only they are quickened by them only they liue vvithout them they are dead shadovves The very Ethnikes had a respect to buriall But this vvas in hope of resurrection but vpon a custome for pompe and vaine glorie As in all things the Lord gaue them vp vnto a reprobate sense so in buriall Hee gaue them vp to a reprobate sense They would cast out some dead bodies like dogges and some vsed to burne the deade bodies in the fire these are barbarous and inhumane fashions The body should be buried in the earth thou shouldest returne to the earth as thou camest of the earth Againe some amongst the Gentiles vsed ouer great gorgeousnesse and sumptuousnesse in their burialls placing the effect of the buriall in gorgeousnesse But to come to vs if thou werest a King thou shouldest not followe the Ethnickes in sumptuousnesse when the Lord brings a man low wilt thou exalt his head and exceede measure in gorgeousnesse vvilt thou hold vp his head when the Lord is casting downe his head the Lord will cast downe thine heade and his both to the dust Eschew two extremities First eschew contempt cast not away the body and secondly eschew gorgeousnesse and superfluitie keepe a Christian honour albeit thou werest a King or an Emperour thou shouldest keepe a mediocritie and Christian honestie and let that sweete smell of the death and resurrection of IESVS CHRIST sauour into his buriall What shall we say in burialls then Shall we make none exception No let vs looke to Circumstances Burie not a begger like a King looke to the place and time and person yet in all times places and persons let the buriall smell of that sweet smelling odour of IESVS CHRIST and let that simple Christian honestie be seene in your burialls Now because the time is spent and I will not wearie you I leaue the rest till the next daye and commend you to GOD beseeching Him that yee may bee like to Him both in life and death and in His buriall and resurrection that wee may dwell with Him for euermore in the Heauens To whome with the Father and the Holy Spirit be all honour praise and glorie world without end AMEN THE XXVII LECTVRE OF THE BVRIALL OF CHRIST MATTH CHAP. XXVII verse 59 So Ioseph tooke the bodie and wrapped it in a cleane linnen cloth MARKE CHAP. XV. verse 46 And layed him in a tombe that was hâ—wen out of a rocke and rolled a stone vnto the doore of the sepulchre LVKE CHAP. XXIII verse 53 And tooke it downe and wrapped it in a linnen cloth and layed it in a tombe hewen out of a rocke wherein was neuer man yet
good many suters to crucifie Him many suters to breake Him many suters to hold Him down in the graue ye read of none but of one Ioseph vvho makes sute to get the dead body of Iesus buried Read all the Ecclesiasticall Histories and ye shall finde these same things that fell out in Christ to haue fallen out in His members when a godly man hath beene drawen out before the ciuile Iudge or to martyrdome there hath bene sundrie suters for him some suters good some euill yet euer moe euill than good Therefore a Pâ—ince or Magistrate was neuer in such danger in any judgement as wheÌ„ he gets a good man fallen in his hands Pilate was neuer in such danger as he was into through this action for it lost him his life present the life to come When the action of a thiefe or a murtherer comes before a King there is no such danger but when a godly man is brought before him for the cause of CHRIST then he should take good heede where he shall get one to giue him a good counsell he shall get many to giue him euill counsell many shal crie crucifie Him woe to him if he assent as Pilate did for he shall inuolue himself in that same guiltines with them that cried crucifie him It is true indeede that Pilate granted a good suite hee gaue leaue to Ioseph to burie the body of Christ yet did this any good to Pilate saued it him No Thinkest thou when thou hast executed an innocent that thou doest enough when thou hast giuen His bodie to bee buried No that shall not excuse thee nor free thee from guiltinesse O how gâ—eat and weightie is the burthen of Magistrates Therefore they had neede euer to haue good men about them and we should pray the Lord earnestly to guide them and direct them in judgement This much for the suters now come to the sute the wordes are these The deceiuer said whilst as He was aliue that within three dayes He should rise command therefore that the sepulchre bee made sure vntill the third day lest His disciples come by night and steale Him away and say to the people that He is risen froÌ„ the dead so shall the last eâ—rour be worse than the first In effect this is as much as if they had said these wordes this man said that He should rise the third day therefore appoint Him a guard to testify of His glorious resurrectioÌ„ y e Lord so directed their words albeit their meaning was flat contrarie Marke therefore a good lesson euer more the Lord hâ—th snared the reprobate in their wicked deuises hath euer turned them from that mischieuous end they aymed them to the manifestation of His owne glory The Priests Pharises thought to obscure y e glorie of Christs resurrection if it had lyen in their hands to hold Him by force in the graue but the Lord who workes light out of darknesse makes their sute to serue for the clearer manifestation of His resurrection for they could haue done no more for the manifestation of His resurrection if they had bene hired for that purpose so looke what interprise wicked men will deuise to dishonour Him I say the Lord shall turne it in end to His glory but to their destruction I will say further it may seeme marueilous peruerse deuises of the wicked often times do serue more to His glory than the good purposes deedes of the godly for it is not a greater glory to GOD to bring light out of darknes than to bring light out of light the Lord is a most skilfull and mightie workeman Hee makes His glory to appeare by bringing light out of darknesse by bringing life out of death and by calling the thinges that are not as if they were all the deuises of the wicked are darknesse the doings of the godly are light so the Lord will sometimes bee more woÌ„derfully glorified in the doings of the wicked than in the doings of the godly But this doth y e wicked no good nor it serues nothing for their benefite for in y e meane time they are more malicious against y e Lord than euer they were they call Him a deceiuer this is a wonderfull thing they saw the Lords povver in obscuring of the sun in renting of the rockes in opening of the graues they saw His great glory shine in all these wonders yet such is the maliciousnes of these wicked men they call y e Lord of glory a deceiuer in so doing not onely they oppone themselues against God but also they doe so far as in them lay as to haue spitted in the face of God yet these miserable creatures I meane the Scribes Pharises came not on a suddaintie to this extreame maliciousnes but they shew some meane small beginnings of it wheÌ„ Christ first manifested Himselfe began to preach amongst them then they proceeded froÌ„ worse to worse continually all the time He was conuersant amongst them thereafter in His Crosse death they taunted mocked Him put Him to the most shameful death they could deuise now when He is buried laid in y e graue they vtter more maliciousnesse than euer they did they come to the extremitie of maliciousnes and induration they call the Lord a deceiuer Cursed be y t mouth that calles the Lord a deceiuer as Paul sayes He that loueth not the Lord Iesus Christ let him be anathema maranatha 1. Cor. 16.22 This lets vs see the nature of their sinne it was a sinne against the Holy Spirit and this is the nature of that sinne when once thou shalt enter in it thou vvilt hardly get backe againe vntill thou commest to extreame excecation and induration to thine euerlasting destruction My lesson is this If the Lord giue vs grace to learne it When it pleases the Lord to shine vnto thee albeit thou vverest a King or Earle or Lord looke as thou vvould eschevv Hâ—ll damnation that thou repine not to this light but greedily embrace it and vvalke in it for if thou step forvvard in repining thou shalt haue an hard backe-comming againe and thou shalt come from excecation to excecation vntill thou come to vtter destruction Novv I doubt not but ye are sorrovvfull vvhen ye heare the Lord a deceiuer yee are sorrovvfull to heare light called darknesse but comfort our selues vvith this the Lord vvho vvas free of all guile and deceit suffers Himselfe to bee called a deceiuer to purge vs from guile and deceit for it might seeme marueilous that the Spirite of God shoulde register this name of a deceiuer suppose they called Him a deceiuer for this name defiles the aire to call the Lord of Trueth a deceiuer Yet no question the Spirite hath left it in register to bee hearde and read of all Christians to the ende of the worlde that thou mayest knowe what the Lorde hath suffered for thee And doubtlesse this name was heauier to Him
it is joyfull sweet and comfortable to them who are in Iesus Christ but when it meetes with a sinfull heart and an euill conscience of all things it is most terrible if thou who art a sinfull man and who art not in the Lord Iesus if thou sawest Him shine in thine heart if thou gettest not a sight of thy sinne thou shalt finde such terrour and feare that all the world cannot comfort thee for that sight of all sights is most terrible to them who are not in Iesus Christ I grant indeede that the very children of God yea euen the best of them all so long as this remanent corruption abides in them they finde the Majestie and glorious presence of God makes them to be afraide We may see the example of this in these vvomen at the sight of the Angell they vvere afraid but after that once sinne be altogether abolished then His presence shall not be fearfull but comfortable Wee shall haue no feare but joy euerlasting As for the reprobate they cannot bee able to abide His glorious presence in that great day for if that glorie was so terrible that shined in one Angell how terrible shall it be to them that are out with Christ when not one Angell but millions of Angels in glorie yea the Lord Himselfe as Iudge of the world shall appeare in His incomprehensible glorie it shall be so terrible that it shall cause them to cry Hilles and mountaines fall on vs and saue vs from the presence of the Lambe The Lord grant that we may be found in the Lord Iesus Christ here and that we may haue our consciences sprinckled with His blood that we may finde the Lordes presence not onely comfortable to vs here but chiefly in that great day when we shall see Him face to face To this Lord Iesus with the Father and the Holy Spirit be all praise honour and glorie for euer AMEN THE XXIX LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST MATTH CHAP. XXVIII verse 5 But the Angell answered and saide to the women Feare yee not for I knowe that yee seeke IESVS who was crucified MARKE CHAP. XVI verse 2 Therefore earlie in the morning the first day of the weeke they came vnto the sepulchre when the Sunne was now risen verse 3 And they saide one to another Who shall roll vs away the stone from the doore of the sepulchre verse 4 And when they looked they saw that the stone was rolled awaye for in was a verie great one verse 5 So they went into the sepulchre and sawe a young man sitting at the right side clothed in a long white robe and they were sore troubled IOHN CHAP. XX. verse 1 Nowe the first daye of the weeke came Marie Magdalene earlie when it was yet darke vnto the sepulchre and saw the stone taken away from the tombe verse 2 Then shee ran and came to Simon Peter and to the other Disciple whome IESVS loued and saide vnto them They haue taken awaye the LORDE out of the sepulchre and wee knowe not where they haue layed him THe Resurrection of Iesus Beloued Brethren was without any witnesses no man saw Him rise therfore the foure Euangelists recorde not that anie man or womā saw the Lord rise out of the graue for so it pleased the Lord to arise from the dead that He would not haue neither man nor woman in this world seeing Him rise The Testimony of the foure Euangelists is That after He was risen without any witnesses then His Resurrectiō was known made manifest to y e world by many witnesses They set down two occasions of y e Resurrection of Iesus Christ The first occasion was thorow the womē Mary Magd. Mary the mother of Iames who after they had seene Him buried returned home to buy odours to embalme the dead body of Iesus where He lay in the graue Now whē the Sabbath had passed by the womē buyes the sweet odours in the night time which proceeded the Lords day as we term it in the night time they confect them y t in the day they might enbalme the precious body of Iesus These womē in the dawning of the day before the Sun rose wēt out of set purpose to anoint the Lord. There is y e first occasiō how his resurrectiō came to light The other occasiō As these womē came the Angel of the Lord came down his purpose is to testifie to these women y t came out of the Towne that the Lord was risen Now followes the manifestatiō of His Resurrection The Angell preuents the women and rolles the stone from the graue and abides still there to testifie to the women that the Lord Jesus was risen frō the dead After this the Lord Iesus Himselfe appeares to the womē and confirmes the Testimony of the Angel The women hauing receiued these two manifestations of His rising they get this honour to be made the first preachers of the Resurrection before all men yea euen before th' Apostles themselues and this preaching of the women is the third manifestation Then after the women had testified to His Apostles that He was risen the Lord appeares Himself to the Apostles and confirmes their Testimony that verily He was risen from the dead Now Brethren it is to be knowne first of all cōcerning these womē who next after the Angels were made witnesses of the Resurrectiō of Iesus Christ y t they came not all to the graue in one cōpany but as it appeares wel of the History there has bin two cōpanies of thē one cōpany y t came first to the graue wēt out of Ierusalē before sun rising another company y t came out after this company came to the graue of the Lord before the other companie If wee marke not this difference wee will see well howe the foure Euangelists aggree in that Historie of the Resurrection of IESVS CHRIST As for the first company There were two women especially named Marie Magdalene and Marie the mother of James not excluding the rest but they are named because among all the rest they were most notable and best knowne to the Apostles Marke notes three to bee in the first company these two and one Salome Luke notes none but calles them certaine women who followed Iesus out of Galile vnderstanding these same women Iohn names none but one Marie Magdalene not excluding the rest because she was best known for her loue for her zeale for her faith and for her affectiō to Christ her name is registrate Brethrē the last day we heard something of the first company the time whē they came in the dawning of the day before the Lords day which we cal Sunday Now we heard as they came out of Ierusalē the Angell of the Lord descēded from Heauē with a great earthquake No question the women were afraid at this but being strēgthned with the Spirit they came forwarde as they were comming to the graue they fell in question about the
encourage thee it will raise vp thy dead soule Then when the sinner is raised vp to heare gladly then hee comes on to the gladde tidings of saluation Iesus is come into the world for thy sins this Iesus is crucified dead and buried for thy sins and this same Iesus is risen and ascended vp to the Heauen to bee an euerlasting Aduocate for thee What more This same Iesus shall come to judge the world and to take thee with Him one day and to make thee partaker of His glorie This is the vvhole summe of the Gospell The Lord giue vs grace to bee partakers of that joy vvhich the glorious Gospell offers in this IESVS CHRIST To whom vvith the Father and the Holie Spirit bee all Praise and Honour for euermore AMEN THE XXX LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST MATTH CHAP. XXVIII verse 5 But the Angell answered and saide to the women Feare yee not for I know that yee seeke Jesus who was crucified verse 6 Hee is not heere for hee is risen as he said come see the place where the Lord was layed verse 7 And goe quicklie and tell his Disciples that hee is risen from the dead and beholde hee goeth before you into Galile there shall yee see him loe I haue tolde you MARKE CHAP. XVI verse 6 But hee saide vnto them Bee not so troubled yee seeke Iesus of Nazareth who hath beene crucified hee is risen hee is not heere beholde the place where they put him verse 7 But goe your way and tell his Disciples and Peter that he will goe before you into Galile there shall yee see him as hee said vnto you WE heard the last day Brethrē that there were two companies of women that came out of Hierusalem to the graue of IESVS CHRIST The first companie came foorth in the dawning of the daye before the rising of the Sunne The next companie came foorth somewhat later I thinke about the rising of the Sunne In the first companie vvere Marie Magdalene and Marie the mother of Iames and Salome others vvho are not named These came out of Hierusalem altogether and as they drew neare to the graue they saw the great stone that vvas rolled to the doore of the graue rolled away Mary Magdalene assoone as she sees the stone to bee rolled awaye tarries no longer but supponing it was done by men and that they had stollen away the Lordes bodie by night then in haste shee runnes home and telles PETER and IOHN and shee saies to them They haue stollen awaye the bodie of the Lord and wee know not where they haue layed him But the other women tooke more aduisement than Marie Magdalene for they abode still and when shee was gone home they entered into the graue and they sawe an Angell standing in the graue in the likenesse of a young man clothed with a long white robe sitting at the right side of the graue at which sight they were wonderfullie astonished And this Angell to my judgement was euen that same Angel that rolled awaye the stone from the graue and with His bright looke terrified the Guarde and frighted them lest they should haue troubled the vvomen The women beeing astonished at the sight of the glorious Angell Hee begins to speake to them of the Resurrection and to tell them of these tidinges For the better vnderstanding of the Oration of the Angell wee shall speake of it in these foure partes The first is a voyce of comfort a worde of encouragement Feare not saies the Angell The next hauing encouraged them hee beginnes to preach to them of the Resurrection of Iesus Christ testifying vnto them that the Lord was risen And hee confirmes by one or two arguments that the Lord was risen In the thirde part of his Oration hee giues a commandement to the vvomen to tell the Apostles and namelie Peter that the Lorde was risen and more than that that that same Lorde should goe before them into Galile and there they shoulde see him In the fourth and last part hee concludes this speach and hee saies Beholde I haue tolde you Then after the Oration of the Angell vvee haue the effect that the Oration vvrought in the hearts of the vvomen to vvit they feare and rejoyce exceedinglie and they obey the voyce of the Angell and they runne home with all haste to tell the Apostles that the Lord was risen Nowe to returne to the Oration of the Angell It is short but wonderous pitthie As for the first part of the Oration Feare not Wee spake of it the last daye and there vvee left off therfore now wee proceede to the seconde part to that graue testimonie which the Angell giues to the Resurrection of Christ Before he speakes hee conciliates authoritie to his person Whosoeuer speakes in the name of Christ shoulde haue an authoritie of person The vvordes are these I knowe perfectly that yee seeke Iesus of Nazareth that was crucified sayes the Angell hee askes not Whome seeke ye but hee breakes off the speech and he sayes I know ye seeke Iesus of Nazareth that was crucified and buried and by this knowledge he lets them see that hee was sent of God and knew the purpose of the women ere euer they reueiled it to Him What man is he that knowes the minde of a man except that the Lord giue him knowledge extraordinarily No all the Angels of Heauen will not know my minde except the Lord reueile it No man nor Angell can know the heart and search the secrets thereof but onely GOD that made the heart So he lets them see that he was sent of God that the worde might haue the greater credite for wherefore serues the authoritie of persons but that the worde they speake may haue the greater credite Marke the lesson There is neuer one that the Lord sends to be witnesses in the world of Christ of His crosse and passion of His resurrection of the mercies and graces that passe all vnderstanding flowing from His Passion and Resurrection but either in one measure or other He wil haue them decored with heauenly reuelation with power euen to goe downe to the secret thoughts of mens hearts and to lay them open to them that they may see their owne vile heartes for our heartes are not knowne not to our owne selues vntill wee goe downe and pull off the vaile off them and all to this end that we may see God in that person that speakes and the last end is this that credite may bee giuen to that gracious word and should the word of life passe without credite Paul 1. Cor. 14.24 25. sayes If a Prophet stand vp to prophecie or a Preacher to preach and if an ignorant person come in loadned with sinne and not feeling the burthen alas there are too many of this sort if this person come in with the force of the word he is dejected and he falles downe and glorifies God and hee will say GOD is with that man that speakes
and predictions which are foretolde of Christ are much worth for they haue this vse When thou readest them in that olde Testament they seale vp the worde of the Gospell of the manifestation of Christ in the flesh of His suffering and glorification that that report of olde is fulfilled But before I leaue this I see the Lord will not let His owne forget His vvorde which He hath once tolde them suppose they would forget it yet the Lorde will haue it called to their remembrance These vvomen woulde haue forgotten that which the chiefe Priestes remembred when they sought a guarde of Pilate to watch the sepulchre Sometimes it comes to passe that the godlie remembers not so much as the wicked who heares the worde to their destruction but if thou bee one of His Hee will haue it called to thy memorie but if thou bee none of His Hee vvill not regarde that vvhen thou hearest thou let it goe in at thine one eare and out at the other Great grace they gette vvho are in Him Well is that soule for euer that is in Him A man vvill thinke it a great thing that a king vvill speake vnto him but it is a farre greater thing that the King of Heauen vvill speake to thee There is some proportion betwixt the king and his subject betwixt the king and the begger but there is no proportion betwixt GOD and thee So then this is a great mercie that He will bring that word that thou hast contemned to thy remembrance and ere thou remember it not Hee will send downe an Angell from the Heauen to call it to thy remembrāce We haue not Angels now as these women had then but I say to thee as many true and faithfull Ministers are as like many Angels take away these men that preach the Gospell indeede I grant properly this to call all things spoken to remembrance pertaines to the Holy Spirit Iohn 14.26 thou shalt forget the word of God that is preached and thou shalt grow more blockish than a stocke or a stone and they that will not heare this word He makes them like stones and well were it to thee albeit thou werest a King if thou hearest not this word that thou werest a stone But marke the time when Hee brings it to their remembrance when the Lord is risen this tenour of time is not ay kept but sometimes ere the thing be done He calls it to remembrance for that is a part of our felicitie euer to be holden in memorie of grace Woe to thee that is not holden in memory of it but indeed it is more joyfull to remember after it is done and therefore at that great day when wee shall see all thinges fulfilled which were foretolde our joy shall be perfected I grant that Hope hath joy yet it hath heauinesse joyned with it but sight hath perfect joy without any heauinesse and when wee shall see all these thinges that were foretolde vs vvhen vve shall see that glorious God when vve shall see euery word that euer we read in the Gospell to be fulfilled we shall remember them all with such joy as no tongue can tell Wee glorie here vnder Hope but then our glorie shall bee in sight and vve shall haue it in our hand and as vvee shall rejoyce then we shall also glorifie GOD perfectly all manner of wayes novv vve doe it with great infirmitie but vvhen vve shall see Him vvee shall glorifie Him euerlastingly and this shall be a part of our song Glorie for euer be to that true GOD Hee promised me much and novve I see Hee hath fulfilled it and so vvee see there is neuer one vvord that vvee haue heard but that Holy and true GOD shall bring it to our memorie with such a joy as cannot be spoken This for the first argument nowe followes the second argument The Angell vses to confirme his speech Come hither and see sayes the Angell The LORD is not heere if yee vvill not credite my vvorde beleeue your ovvne eyes and see it is not this a great mercie when thou wilt not beleeue His word the Lord will let thee see the Lord is not contented to let thee heare these glad tythings but He will bring them before thine eyes What meanes these visible Sacraments but to helpe the infirmitie of the weake Faith besides the Sacraments this word of God is not like the vvord of man or of an Oratour like Demosthenes or Cicero or any man in this world No that word in y e gospel in great simplicitie hath a great Majestie shining in it yea it is visible as the Apostle sayes in the first to the Corinthians 2.4 It hath an ocular demonstration and vvhen it speakes to thee of Heauen it will drawe thine eye to Heauen and when it speakes to thee of the Crosse it vvill let thee see Christ crucified and if it speake to thee of His glory it shall let thee see Him in glory and that is it vvhich Paul sayes in the Epistle to the Galathians Chapter 3. verse 1. Hee preaches Christ so to them that he made them see Christ crucified before their eyes Novve I come to the thirde part it containes a commandement that he giues to the vvomen Tithings haue euer some commandement joyned with them and commandement requires euer obedience so when euer thou gettest tithings thou gettest a commandement doe this or thou shalt neuer get part nor portion of the tithings No Brethren a Christian life is not an idle life but practicke if euer thou vvouldest be partaker of these good tithings looke that thou striue to doe that vvhich Hee bids thee Ruane sayes the Angell home this haue I told you Preach ye to the Apostles Goe tell the disciples that He is risen Goe your way hastely to testifie the Resurrection This glorious Resurrection requires an hastie preaching and I saye to you that testimonie that is giuen of Christ requires expedition and therefore if thou aymest to testifie of the Lord doe it hastely the glory Hee gets vvould not be delayed The next part of the direction the Angell giues them is that they tell the Apostles that they goe to Galile because Christ would be before them there The Papistes thinke that they haue gotten a great vantage of this that Peters name was expressed and not the rest This speciall direction that is sent to Peter imports no supremacie but rather if ye consider well that hee was inferiour to them all It importes this plainely that Peter had done a great fault by the threefold deniall of the Lord. Alas in this action he had an euill conscience and if there had not beene a particular direction to Him hee durst not for his life haue come to CHRIST Thinke ye that a man that hath denied GOD dare come to Him except He be preuented No Peter durst not for his life haue looked to the LORD so this is their supremacie that they marke of Peter aboue the rest Now one thing
heades and they had more of that vvorldlie and fleshlie vvit than of that Heauenlie vvit and this drewe them to this securitie This is the nature of the Regenerate Suppose the Regenerate in this vvorlde compt in some measure of the crosse of Christ and of the power of God yet in the best of them there is some lacke some infirmities and vvantes and they will thinke sometime the preaching of the Crosse and Resurrection of Christ to bee but vanitie and a dreame of vviues as IOHN PETER MATTHEVV and the rest of the Apostles did for none of them vvoulde beleeue this That CHRIST vvas risen Wee vvill thinke that there is some great follie in these tidinges I vvill tell you my nature and the nature of the best man or vvoman but vvhen vve shall see That joyfull Morning as DAVID calles it then vvee shall saye vvith SARAH THE LORDE hath made mee nowe to laugh indeede Shee scorned vvhen shee hearde saye shee shoulde conceaue and beare a childe shee thought shee coulde not beare a childe and nowe vvhen shee sees it come to passe shee saies The LORDE makes mee to laugh indeede And so shall vvee saye one daye that thing vvhich vvee thought but jestes then wee shall saye I see this nowe that I coulde not beleeue vvell enough nowe I see it is true indeede So then in despite of all naturall vvit striue to gette an hope aboue hope and then shalt thou greatlie vvonder at that sight and maruell foreuer that there could be such a joy Now blessed is that man or that woman that gets a taste of it here for they shall be assured of it for euer But to goe forward I see that it auailes not much to speake to a sleeping person that is loadned with sin and feeles it not that is the worst estate in the worlde neuer to groane vnder this mortalitie vnder this burthen of death They can neuer say with the Apostle Miserable man that I am who shall deliuer me from this body of death And if yee speake to these persons of the Resurrection death of Christ it auaileth nothing to them What did the Apostles They thought it but a scorne if the Apostles thought so what wilt thou doe that sleepest in thy murther in thine adulterie in thy theft in thine oppression If the Apostles slept how wilt thou sleepe a sleeping sinner must bee once wakened as PAVL sayes in the Epistle to the Romanes the first Chapter and eighteenth verse The wrath of God is manifest from the Heauen against all the vnrighteousnesse of men And I say the wrath and the vengeance of GOD is manifest vpon the sleeping sinner and death comes on him that neuer shall haue an end But PAVL in the Epistle to the Romanes the third CHAPTER and the twentie and one VERSE hee comes on with other tithings and sayes That the righteousnesse of GOD through faith in Jesus Christ is made manifest to them that beleeue And I will say to thee that Iesus is come into the world and died for thee if thou beleeuest thou shalt be freed of that burthen of sinne and wrath and vvhen a man heares this he will thinke it the sweetest tithings that euer he heard for the sinner will finde life in that death and that blood will sprinckle his conscience as the Apostle sayes to the Hebrewes and thou wilt finde a wonderfull joy vvhen thy sinnes are remitted in Christ of all joyes vnder the Heauen this is the greatest The preaching of Christ auailes to none but to him who findes his soule loadned with sinne Now one word and so I shall ende I see in the Apostles and in their great infirmitie the great prouidence of GOD they will neither beleeue nor misbeleeue but by His Prouidence what euer vvas their part in it the worke was good of a good purpose The LORD will not haue them to beleeue the testimonie of the first companie nor yet of the second companie of women No no He vvill not haue them to beleeue vntill they see it with their eyes and feele it with their handes and ere they passe out to others He vvill speake to them and let them see that they may be perswaded that it was true I alwayes tell you this It is not a small thing to testifie of the Resurrection of Christ to preach His Passion and Resurrection and wilt thou of a light knowledge preach it No beware thou speake this or that vpon a report Of all men that speakes in this earth or is sent with a commission a Minister hath most neede to beware what hee speakes Speake hee of the Passion or Resurrection of CHRIST ere euer hee speake let him get a sight of Him suppose not vvith the bodily eyes lay hold on Him by Faith in thine heart Thinke it not enough to be an hearing witnesse but a seeing witnesse and vvhen thou hast gotten that persvvasion with vvhat confidence vvilt thou speake of His death thou wilt speake with such euidencie that the high heartes of men shall be humbled finding such weight in thy wordes The LORD giue vs grace that vvhen vve stand vp to speake of the Resurrection of CHRIST to others vvee may haue the perswasion of it in our ovvne heartes and that vve may finde His gracious Spirit working in vs and as vvee speake of Heauen and these joyes to others so vvee may finde some joy beginne in our owne hearts heere that after this life is ended we may reigne with Him in glorie for euer with CHRIST To whome with the Father and the Holy Spirit be all honour praise and glorie for euermore AMEN THE XXXII LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST LVKE CHAP. XXIIII verse 12 Then arose Peter and ranne vnto the sepulchre and looked in and sawe the linnen clothes layed by themselues and departed wondering in himselfe at that which was come to passe IOHN CHAP. XX. verse 3 Peter therefore went foorth and the other disciple and they came vnto the sepulchre verse 4 So they ranne both together but the other disciple did out-runne Peter and came first to the sepulchre verse 5 And hee stouped downe and sawe the linnen clothes lying yet went hee not in verse 6 Then came Simon Peter following him and went into the sepulchre and sawe the linnen clothes lie verse 7 And the kerchiefe that was vpon his head not lying with the linnen clothes but wrapped together in a place by it selfe verse 8 Then went in also the other disciple who came first to the sepulchre and hee sawe it and beleeued verse 9 For as yet they knewe not the Scripture That hee must rise againe from the dead verse 10 And the disciples went awaye againe vnto their owne home WE haue heard these dayes past beloued in the Lord Iesus of the two companies of women that went out of Hierusalem towarde the graue of the Lorde early in the morning The one company that came first wherein was Marie Magd. and Marie the mother of
Woe to vs if Hee saye once Goe not to EDINBVRGH Woe is them and woe to that Towne where the Lorde forbiddes His Messengers to goe Beware of this that the Lorde saye not to His Messenger Goe to the North or South but goe not to EDINBVRGH for then shall wrath and destruction light vpon it What confusion and destruction lighted vpon Hierusalem after that the Lord had once turned His backe vpon it Yet sayes the Lorde Bid them goe to Galile and there they shall seeme They beleeued not others who tolde them of mee but there I shall speake vnto them mine owne selfe This is the great mercie of the LORDE towardes His Disciples vpon whome the LORDE shoulde neuer haue looked if Hee had respected their infidelitie but albeit they were vnfaithfull yet Hee remained faithfull and mercifull for Hee coulde not denie Himselfe but where there sinnes abounded there His grace surmounted aboue them all for as the APOSTLE sayes Where sinne abounded there grace abounded much more Now al the world was full of sinne when Christ came yet grace superabounded Now this was a meeke dealing with them that they shoulde see mercie aboue their sinnes to this ende that they shoulde by experience teach others for hee that feeles both miserie and mercie is the best teacher in in the worlde So beeing to sende them to teach others Hee lets them finde grace to superabounde PAVL Roman 5.20 sayes Where sinne abounded there grace superabounded Reade the first Epistle to Timothie Chap. 1. vers 13. there the Apostle sayes J was a blasphemer and an euill liuer and a persecuter this was his miserie and if the LORDE had neuer looked to him hee had neuer beene an Apostle nor a Christian man But what sayes hee thereafter The grace of the LORDE IESVS superabounded and for as high and weightie as my sinne was yet His mercie was greater and it weighed it downe So then yee see the LORDE cares for them that lye in miserie to tell them of it I tell you this daye yee are lying in miserie and Hee is carefull that the Preacher haue a sense both of miserie and of mercie to tell of the wrath of GOD which is manifest from the Heauen vpon all impenitent sinners And if thou wilt repent thee I assure thee though thou vvere the greatest sinner that euer was thou shalt haue mercie and therefore if thou hast gone long on in sinne yet euen for GODS cause at last take vp thy selfe and I promise thee exceeding mercie in that bloodie Sacrifice of our LORDE and SAVIOVR IESVS CHRIST who hath died both for thee and mee and all penitent sinners To Him therefore with the Father and Holie Spirit bee all Honour and Glorie for euermore AMEN THE XXXVI LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST MATTH CHAP. XXVIII verse 11 Nowe when they were gone beholde some of the watch came into the Citie and shewed vnto the High Priestes all the thinges that were done verse 12 And they gathered them together with the Elders and tooke counsell and gaue large money vnto the Souldiours verse 13 Saying Saye His Disciples came by night and stole him awaye while wee slept verse 14 And if this matter come before the Gouernour to bee hearde we will perswade him and so vse the matter that yee shall not neede to care verse 15 So they tooke the money and did as they were taught and this saying is noysed among the Iewes vnto this day MARKE CHAP. XVI verse 12 After that hee appeared vnto two of them in another forme as they walked and went into the countrey LVKE CHAP. XXIIII verse 13 And beholde two of them went that same daye to a towne which was from Hierusalem about threescore furlonges called EMMAVS verse 14 And they talked together of all these thinges that were done verse 15 And it came to passe as they communed together and reasoned that Iesus himselfe drewe neare and went with them verse 16 But their eyes were holden that they could not know him WEE hearde hitherto in the Historie of the Resurrection of IESVS CHRIST Beloued in Him of sundrie vvitnesses of His Resurrection First Angels and next vvomen Namelie MARIE MAGDALENE vvas the first that gotte the sight of Him after His Resurrection and after her other vvomen gotte a sight of Him also and a direction to His Disciples to assure them that Hee vvas risen againe Nowe in this TEXT vvhich vvee haue read out of the Gospell of MATTHEVV vve haue a piece of Historie of another sorte of vvitnesses that testified of the Resurrection of IESVS euen of the men of vvarre who were sent out to watch the graue they came not to the Disciples but to the High Priestes and tâ—ey testifie vnto them of the Resurrection of IESVS Then in the Historie vvritten by MARKE and LVKE vvee returne to the true vvitnesses to vvit two of them that vvere His Disciples Hee meetes with them as they vvere journeying from Ierusalem to Emaus and thereafter these two tell the rest that the Lord vvas risen Now to goe thorow these two pieces of Historie shortly as God shall giue the grace and as time shall permit When the vvomen that had met with Iesus had returned Some of the souldiours that had watched the graue returnes home to Ierusalem to tell the things that had fallen out but they came not to the place where the Apostles vvere but to the place where the High Priests vvere from whome they vvere sent and they tell the Lord was risen The Historie is plaine these witnesses are the souldiours that vvatched the graue they haue not such a commission as the other witnesses had they are not sent by CHRIST nor by His Angels but runne of their owne accorde but yet they runne by the speciall prouidence of GOD No doubt His prouidence directed them to the High Priestes and not so much to instruct them for they vvere hardened as to let them see that they vvere disappointed of their expectation They obtained of Pilate to let men goe out and to keepe Him in the graue and to haue smoothered His Resurrection that it had neuer come to light and yet the LORD sendes these same men to Ierusalem as witnesses of that resurrection that they would haue smoothered as if they had bene sent out by the High Priestes to this ende that they should be witnesses they could testifie no better of it the LORD turnes it about so that they could doe no better if the High Priests had hired and waged them to be witnesses of His Resurrection It is a vaine thing to striue with GOD and to hide that thing that Hee will haue brought to light for hide it as thou vvilt in despite of thee He shall bring it to light to thy shame that Hee may bee glorified Novve to speake what they testified they testified the same thing that the vvomen had testified they testified the trueth they testified All that was done that IESVS vvas risen yet there is a great
difference betvveene them and the vvomen when the vvomen vnderstood that Hee vvas risen they came home vvith joy the men of vvarre came home vvith sadnesse and vvith discontentment and they preach this to them that were sad to heare it and ashamed of it they preach it not to the Apostles as the vvomen did but to the High Priestes Marke this Lesson Looke how ye tell tythings there are some that will make good tithings of euill tithings and euill tithings of good as they please albeit they be neuer so good if they be not contented with them they vvill make them euill but be they neuer so euill if they be contented with them they will make them good and tell them vvith joy Bevvare hovv ye tell tithings of the Church of ENGLAND of FRANCE or of GERMANIE or of other partes Looke when thou speakest of the prosperous estate of the Church that thou speake it with joy and vvhen yee heare that the Church is troubled speake that not with joy but vvith sadnesse Thou that art not content vvith the prosperous estate of CHRISTS Church thou vvouldest haue hid CHRISTES Resurrection as the Scribes did and if thou hadst beene liuing with them So in a vvord if the Church be sad tell it vvith sadnesse and if she be joyfull tell thy tithings vvith joy if thou speakest of IESVS and His glorie speake of Him vvith joy and pleasure in thine heart Novv to goe forvvard The High Priests when they heare these newes they are nothing content therevvith but are ashamed They call a Councell of the High Priestes and the Senatours of the people The thing that they decerne is to bribe the men of vvare that vvatched the graue and to hire their tongues to lie they gaue them a great summe to say That the body of the Lord was stollen out of the graue by the disciples in the night whilst they slept and lest the men of vvarre should bee affrighted for Pilate and so refuse to lie they preuent that for say they take no thought of Pilate ye shall get no harme If hee heare of this wee will perswade him and so keepe you harmelesse Well these men were once disappointed and yet leaue they off No they will haue His glory and Resurrection smoothered and because they could not get it by violence nowe they will smoother it by craft No that thing that they cannot doe by violence they shall seeke to bring it about vvith lies No thinke yee that these Traitours and Apostate Lordes doe rest No that thing that they could not get done by violence they seeke to doe it by craft Well yee vvould maruell at this yee vvould aske Whether or not they were assured that the LORD IESVS was risen and beleeued the report of the men of warre I answere It could not bee but they beleeued that He rose by a diuine power No it could not be but they thought it and if they had thought that the disciples had stollen His body away they would haue pursued them and gotten the bodie againe Then seeing the arme of GOD raised Him vp and they knew that the Lord was risen Is not this a wonder that they repent not but will oppone them to the power of God No wonder not at it Men who haue once begunne to fight against the Holy Spirit and God Himselfe immediately can scarcely euer repent and turne backe againe but rather goes forward to fulfill their sinnes as the Apostle sayes 1. Thess 2.16 the wrath of God is come vpon them to the full This is not the first time they fought against God immediatly but they had often times done so before and beginning they leaue not off but goe forward So learne this lesson marke how dangerous a thing it is once to beginne to oppone thy selfe to God if thou beginnest once to oppone thy selfe against that Majestie the wrath of God shall so sease on thee that thou shalt not get leaue to goe backe till thou bee shut in hell So Steuen Acts 7.31 speakes of these same Iewes O stiffenecked people yee euer resist the Holy Spirit that is as yee haue begunne to sinne against that Holy Spirit so yee continue ye cannot goe backe againe So that they are set out as a spectacle of Gods judgement and it should learne vs to tremble once to thinke euill against that Holy Majestie these people may be a document to all them that oppone themselues to Him The Lord saue vs from all sinnes but namely from this sinne against the Holie Ghost that can haue no repentance Nowe to goe forwarde The souldiers against their owne conscience sell themselues miserably to lie and it was a wonder that the Iewes knew it not to be a lie the men who made this lie were prophane men of warre who commonly vse to haue litle godlinesse or religion Indeede I grant the Lord hath His owne of all sortes but seldome finde ye that men of warre are either good or godly Besides this they were Ethnikes and without God in the world in a word they were prophane hearted men then what wonder was it that they sell their tongue their conscience No if thine heart be prophane thou shalt soone sell thy tongue and thy conscience to any man and thou shalt soone sell thine hande to murther albeit it were a King as ye haue heard of sundrie Our Kings Majestie had neede to take heede to this that there bee no prophane men about Him for they will sell him his kingdome for a litle price It is said of Esau Heb. 12 16. He solde his birthright he solde Heauen he solde his part of Paradise for a messe of pottage What was the ground of all this The Apostle sayes Let no prophane man be among you as Esau prophanitie was the ground and hee brings in this as an effect following prophanitie if thou be prophane thou wilt sell thy conscience and I say this marchandise of buying and selling of consciences that is so frequent in this Lande tells that this Land is ouerspread with prophanitie The Apostle sayes It is the will of God that yee bee holy but Scotland may say farewell holinesse Alas if thou kept in thine heart holinesse thou wilt keepe thy conscience but if thou be prophane like Esau thou wilt sell thy conscience for a pennie So I direct mine exhortation to all sortes of men to Traffiquers be not prophane but keepe an holy heart and thou shalt keepe a good conscience and if thou be a Iudge if thou bee prophane thou wilt sell thy conscience for a crowne art thou a Marchand if thou wantest an holy heart thou wilt sell thy conscience a Minister if his heart be not holy hee will soone sell his tongue and his conscience So in a word Let vs striue with our conscience to haue an holy heart Alas the ground of all this mischiefe in Scotland is prophanitie of heartes When they haue sold their tongue they went and said He was stollen
for this was but the third day after He vvas crucified Yee see Brethren for all this leauing of the LORD and desparing euer to see Him yet heere is a piece of godlinesse in their heartes and a sponke of Hope that keepes them that they drowned not into despare for if they had not preuented they would haue perished with the rest of the Iewes and as they are thus wrestling betwixt Hope and Despare the Lord takes them by the hande to helpe them It is a good thing to haue if it vvere but one sponke of grace yea if it were but to speake of Him For none can call Iesus the Lord as the Apostle sayes except he haue gotteen the Spirit of Christ So holde on and speake of Him if thou canst doe no more Yet to goe forward When they are talking He comes in and goes with them Marke it This is an argument that the Lord heard what they were speaking and as He heares them Hee joynes with them side for side Well take heede to thine heart to thy words The Lorde is nearer to thee than thou thinkest walke as if thou werest speaking to Him and as if He heard thee or saw thee and when thou speakest abhorre not the presence of the Lord Thou that wilt runne to an hole wilt abhorre His presence but ay say this Lord be present at my speaking what meanes all this baudrie talke and blasphemie Euen this Thou seekest not to haue thine heart sanctified by the presence of thy God so if thou wilt speake say Lord be into mine heart and Lord rule my tongue and open my mouth then when He openeth thy mouth gracious words will come out So in a word seeke that presence to sanctifie your speech and actions It is said when He joynes with them Their eyes are so bound vp that they could not know Him They know not His face nor His voyce Marke sayes That he appeared to them in another forme Luke sets downe in plaine wordes how this was to wit not that He was of a diuerse forme indeed but because their eyes were holden closed that they could not know Him so the change was in them not in Him Hee remained in one forme and was euer like Himselfe in all His appearance He neuer altered His presence but He altered their eyes that behelde looked vpō Him I thinke some of you would aske In what forme appeared Hee Was Hee naked The souldiours got His clothes Whether was He naked or not No I thinke not that Hee was naked but Hee appeared with His Ioynes girded as a man addressed to a journey as He appeared to Marie cled like a Gardener yet ye will aske had He indeede cloathes on Him or not I haue no warrant of that alwayes He appeared to them to be clothed indeede they thoght He had cloths on Him these men thought He had clothes on for their eyes vvere bound vp It is a wonder that they could not know Him nor His voyce He altered not His voyce and yet they could not know Him albeit it be naturall by the sight of the eye to know one with whō wee are acquainted it is naturall by the eare to know the voyce yet this place lets vs see that the Lord hath a commandement of these gifts when Hee sayes looke that thou see not thou shalt not see and if He say to thee looke that thou know not thy father thou shalt not know him and more if He say know not the voyce of thy wife thou shalt not knowe her voyce All this tends to this We should beg our eyes our eares and all at the hands of God ay for that gift that thou hast thanke God hartily and say Lord I thanke thee for this that I can know the voyce of one creature frō another so all our lifetime should be a begging of His gifts if we moue we should thanke our God Now if we should beg this naturall sight that we haue much more are we bound to beg the thing we haue not to beg a spirituall eye to see heauenly things then when thou gettest it thou shouldest render thanks to Him Now of graces this is the best that the Lord giues an eye to see that life for if thou gettest one blencke certainly thou shalt see Heauen that joy and glorie at the which one day thou shalt wonder Now glory bee giuen to Him for all His giftes and euen for this that Hee hath giuen vs these bodily eyes I beseech Him to giue euery one of vs spirituall eyes that we may get a blencke of Him here and in the Heauens enjoy His presence for euermore through Christ our Lord. To whome with the Father and Holy Spirit be all praise and honour for euermore AMEN THE XXXVII LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST LVKE CHAP. XXIIII verse 17 And hee saide vnto them What manner of communications are these that yee haue one to another as yee walke and are sadde verse 18 And the one named Cleopas answered and saide vnto him Art thou onelie a stranger in Hierusalem and hast not knowne the thinges which are come to passe therein in these dayes verse 19 And hee saide vnto them What thinges And they saide vnto him Of Jesus of Nazareth who was a Prophet mightie in deede and in worde before God and all the people verse 20 And howe the high Priestes and our Rulers deliuered him to bee condemned to death and haue crucified him IN this Historie of the Resurrection of IESVS CHRIST welbeloued in Him wee haue heard hitherto of sundrie witnesses testifying His Resurrection from the death The Angels began and they testified His Resurrection to the women The women testified it to the Disciples who were conuened at Hierusalem and namelie to Peter and Iohn Then MARIE came foorth the seconde time and shee meetes with the LORD Then there are other women who came foorth and meetes vvith the LORDE And after these women there comes other witnesses to vvit enemies who were sent to watch the graue by PILATE and the High Priestes and they witnessed That Hee was risen But they solde their tongues to the high Priestes and the IEVVES to make a lie and to affirme that the LORDES DISCIPLES had come in the night and stollen awaye His bodie vvhile they slept And after these vvitnesses yee hearde the last daye wee returned to other two vvitnesses vvho both vvere the Disciples of the LORDE the one is named CLEOPAS but the name of the other is not expressed These two euen in a manner despairing that euer they shoulde see the LORDE they depart out of Hierusalem where they were with the rest of the Disciples to a Village not farre off called EMMAVS and they were talking by the waye of the thinges which immediatlie had fallen out before The Lorde who sawe them and hearde them addresses Himselfe shortlie to them and goes with them as a passenger going out the waye
from morning till euening we should vvonder at that God and his works at that mighty GOD whom the Prophet calles Deum admirabilem To goe forward The Lord who knew all things for all thinges are naked to His eyes He knew better what was done than Cleopas did yet Hee will not take vpon Him that Hee knevv He misknowes them and He askes What are these things Marke it Brethren Hee got a rough and sharpe answere before and yet Hee leaues not off Hee will not leaue them but Hee beares vvith their infirmities and novv Hee giues another pull to the heart deales againe vvith them that they should povvre out their sadnesse and griefe to Him No if thou pertainest to the Lorde Hee vvill not leaue thee for an hard meeting suppose thou dravvest abacke Hee vvill giue thee another pull Albeit wee be vnfaithfull sayes the Apostle yet the Lord abideth faithfull Change as thou wilt the Lord shall neuer change but remaine ay constant in mercie to His ovvne till they be perfected and crovvned vvith glorie Then Cleopas seeing him to bee troubled with a stranger at the last hee must tell the vvordes that he and his companion vvere speaking as they vvent on the way Marke this lesson Repine as thou vvilt when the Lord dravves thee at the last thou must yeeld But vvhat is the cause that any sinners vvill yeelde vvhen the Lord dravves Euen the secret operation of His Holy Spirit and if he that drew them by the vvorde had not a secret power and operation by His Spirit in their hearts they vvould neuer haue yeelded Albeit the LORD vvould prooue them by speech and language albeit Hee vvould exhort them admonish them threaten them yea and scourge them to come to Him and vvell is the soule albeit it be scourged yea if it vvere harled thorovv the middes of Hell if it were thorow neuer so great difficulties in the world if once it get grace to come to Him yet none outward thing will make vs to come to Him it is the inward draught of His Spirit that makes vs to come to Him and drawes vs by the eye by the eare and by the hand if He take vs not by the hand we can neuer come to Him It is saide in the 2. Chapter to the Romanes and the 4. verse Hee drawes the reprobate and calles them but all that calling is but outwarde Hee vvill scourge them and dravv them outwardly but Hee neuer puts the feeling of His holy Spirit in their heartes and so they can neuer come to Him therefore whē the Lord is outvvardly drawing and calling thee say alwayes this Lord draw thou mine heart inwardly by thine Holy Spirit or els it will bee long ere it come to thee if all the sicknesses all crosses troubles scourges judgements that can bee and all this preaching that I heare will neuer cause mee come to thee except thou draw mine heart Now to come to the vvords that Cleopas speakes there is none of them but they vvould be marked he beginnes and rehearses to Him the vvhole summe of these things that hee and his companion had bene speaking and he propones them summarily he sayes All the things we haue spoken was Concerning Iesus of Nazareth Alas fewe of vs take pleasure to talke of Him therefore when the Lord comes takes thee by the hand looke thou mayest say Lord I haue bene talking of thee in some measure for as sure as the Lord laid to His eare to heare what Cleopas and his companion talked as sure He layes to His eare to heare vvhat thou speakest Then vvhen he hath tolde the generall hee lets the stranger know what a man Iesus vvas and then he telles shortly what had befallen him these two dayes and after he speakes of the effects that it had wrought in his heart and in the heartes of His disciples to wit that He was no Redeemer This is the whole conference I shall goe thorovv this conference as God shall giue the grace and as time shall permit First in describing of Him hee calles Him Iesus of Nazareth That was the stile hee gaue Him Marke it The first thing that hee speakes to Him is an vntrueth he calles Him Iesus of Nazareth No doubt he thought He had beene borne at Nazareth suppose they had the Prophecie that Hee should be borne at Bethlehem in Iuda Micah Chapters verse 2. and that He vvas borne there The ground of this errour that vvas amongst the Iewes vvas because of Ioseph and Marie dwelt at Nazareth and Iesus was brought vp there with them that false rumor spred that Ioseph vvas His father and that He was borne there but He was not borne there I grant it is true that after His resurrection Peter in the Actes and the Apostles themselues called Him Iesus of Nazareth as Cleopas here calles Him Iesus of Nazareth Also Paul in the twentie sixe Chapter of the Actes of the Apostles and the ninth verse calles Him Iesus of Nazareth but neither Peter nor Paul spake this of ignorance as if Hee had bene borne there but because they to vvhome they spake knewe Him best vnder that name they submitted themselues to their capacitie But as for Cleopas he knevve no better for he thought indeede that Iesus had bene borne at Nazareth so the first word he speakes is plaine vntrueth so yee see what it is to judge vvith the multitude The Papists will send thee to beleeue that which the multitude beleeues and makes the multitude a token of the true Church but thou shalt be beguiled with the multitude and if thou follovvest them because they walke in the broad vvay thou shalt perish vvith them Next consider His description Hee calles Him Vir Propheta Indeede He failed not in this stile Hee was a man and was a man indeede blood and bone as we are yet there is a defect in this vvord Cleopas knewe no more but that He vvas a man hee knew not that He was GOD and man in one person It is true Peter in the 2. of the Actes calles Him Vir Propheta yet hee knew Hee was the Sonne of GOD blessed for euer so as in the first wordes there is an vntrueth so in the next wordes there is a defect I marke this to let you see the ignorance that was in them before the LORD ascended to the Heauen It was a wonder that they who walked so long with Him should haue beene so ignorant the third time he calles Him A Prophet Indeede He was such a Prophet as was neuer before nor after Him yet there is a fault here he giues Him the greatest stile he thought Hee had but Hee had farre greater stiles for Hee is not a Prophet onely but also a Mediatour King and High Priest Then hee comes on and hee telles what a Prophet Hee was saying that Hee was powerfull in word and deede Nowe would to GOD we could speake of Him in loue with this poore man
his glorie There is the necessitie It behooued that the Lorde Iesus by manie and sore sufferings shoulde enter into His glorie Marke this vvho can tell it clearer than Hee Himselfe tolde it So I will tell it againe Iesus by His suffering behoâ—ued to enter into His glorie IESVS CHRIST once leauing His glorie got no entrie againe into it till Hee was so inanited as neuer creature was The LORDE putteth to a necessitie of suffering saying Jt behooued him to suffer and so saye I There was such a necessitie layed vpon Him that Hee behooued to suffer and all the vvorlde coulde not saue Him from it beeing once come downe into this vvorlde Therefore the LORDE by His Prophets had fore-tolde this necessitie That hee shoulde suffer death and therefore seeing Hee fore-telles it it behooued him to suffer All the vvorlde shall not bring it backe againe The Lorde as Hee had fore-tolde it so Hee had ordained it from all eternitie Wilt thou call backe againe that that the LORDE hath decreede Thou mayest reduce the decreet of man but all the world cannot reduce the decreet of GOD. These are the causes of His suffering but I shall come to a lower and a subordinate cause I saye to thee thy sinne made this necessitie The LORDE taking vpon Him the burthen of thy sinne and becomming Mediator that immaculate Lambe that had no sinne neither in bodie nor in soule Hee taking once the burthen of our sinne vpon Him Hee was in a manner holden out of Heauen for a time and Hee was made accursed and therfore before He suffered for sinne He could not get entrie into Heauen for wheresoeuer sinne is there is death bee it inherent within thee if thou get not one to die for thee thou must die for this is plaine talke but would to God it were vvell learned death must euer followe sinne if thou laye it not on Him and Hee die not for thee thou shalt die for euer Thou makest but a pastime of harlotrie and murther and theft but I say There is no satisfaction of thy harlotrie and murther but death I saye to thee harlot thou art dead murtherer thou art but dead albeit thou be a lord I tell thee thou art but dead if thou get no reliefe in the Mediator without satisfaction for thy sins thou shalt neuer see HeaueÌ„ Christ saw not HeaueÌ„ after He tooke on our sin till He was dead and offeâ—ed His blood The high Priest durst not enter into Sanctum sanctorum without a basen full of blood vnder paine of death Euen so Christ entered not into heauen but with his owne blood And if thy sinne helde an innocent out of heauen O miserable bodie thinkest thou that thou who art altogether defiled canst come to heauen Nothing can enter there that is defiled Murtherer thou shalt neuer see heauen except thou goe to Iesus and laye on the burthen of thy sinne vpon him and saye Lord take this burthen from mee and if thou canst saye this from thine heart he will take it from thee Now Brethren a question would be asked If Iesus hath died for thy sinnes and mine that we might get an entrie Thou mayest say to mee What to doe haue I to suffer seeing the Lorde hath prepared the way What to doe haue I to suffer in soule or body or why shoulde I bee afflicted seeing the Lorde hath made the way patent I will not answere with the Papistes for they will saye Thou must paye one part but I saye to thee in despite of thine heart if thou paye anie part thou must paye the whole But I answere All these sufferinges is no satisfaction to bring thee to Heauen Then thou wilt saye Why should I suffer if it helpe not to bring me to HeaueÌ„ I answere All the afflictions which are laide on thee are laide on thee for the slaughter of the remaining corruption feelest thou not a remaining corruption within thee All th'afflictioÌ„s which are laid on thee as sicknesse want of goods losse of friendes c. all is laid on thee to slaye that remaining corruption Brethren I will tell you plainlie The death of Iesus and His suffering is the only meane to enter into Heauen in despite of all the Papistes Againe I saye Looke what neede wee haue of His death wee haue as much need of affliction in our owne persons to slaye that sin which remaines in vs Suppose there be manie wayes to slay sinne yet except thou be chastised and vexed with affliction outwardly and inwardly as it pleases the Lord to laye it on thee thou shalt neuer see Heauen So cast thee not to sleepe but make thee for affliction and trouble to mortifie thy sinne or else thou shalt neuer see Heauen And vvell is thee that art afflicted and made like Christ by thine afflictions What wordes can be tâ—uer than the words of Paul and Barnabas Act. 14. It behooueth you to enter into heauen by manie tribulations The Apostle sayes there is a necessitie And againe he sayes Heb. 12.14 without holinesse affliction brings holinesse no man shall see the Lord. Well thou that delitest to polâ—ute thy body I tell thee if thou be not holie thou shalt neuer see God And I saye more Without affliction either in soule or bodie thou shalt neuer bee holy Thou that sleepest securely and hast mind of nothing but thy dinner and thy supper good chiere and good companie I tell thee once twise yea thrise thou shalt neuer be holy and thou shalt neuer come to Heauen and if thou sleepest on in this estate thou art not one of His compt Booke Let him or her who is afflicted thanke God and take it out of His hand and saye The Lord hath sent it to sanctifie me Lord giue me thy Spirit that I may bee holy that I may see thy blessed face one day to my euerlasting joye in Iesus To whom with the Father and Holy Spirit be glory for euermore Amen THE XXXIX LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST LVKE CHAP. XXIIII verse 27 And he beganne at Moses and at all the Prophets and interpreted vnto them in all the Scriptures the thinges which were written of him verse 28 And they drewe neare vnto the towne which they went to but hee made as though he would haue gone further verse 29 But they constrained him saying Abide with vs for it is towardes night and the day is farre spent So he went in to tarrie with them verse 30 And it came to passe as hee sate at table with them hee tooke the bread and blessed and brake it and gaue it to them verse 31 Then their eyes were opened and they knew him and hee was no more seene of them verse 32 And they saide betweene themselues Did not our heartes burne within vs while he talked with vs by the way and when hee opened to vs the Scriptures WEE insist yet Beloued in Christ in this part of Historie concerning the two Disciples of CHRIST who in the
preaching No not an Angell hath power to set thine heart on fire So thou that hast this burning thou mayest saye that the Lorde Iesus is present in thine heart But marke this We see in these men that our eyes are so blind that we cannot discerne the Lord so long as we liue here we cannot get full sight but we are in a strife if the heart shall say The Lord is here the flesh will say He is not here so that we hing here betwixt hope and despaire But when Hee once manifestes Himselfe in glorie then that burning which we felt in this life that sense which we then felt shall bee brought to our remembrance Thinke not that thou shalt loose that sense No Thou shalt take it vp with thee to the Heauen and we shall say one to another Remember yee not what burning wee had when wee spake and hearde of CHRIST in the earth Then it behooued this LORDE to haue beene then with vs in the earth So the remembrance of that joye which thou felt in the vvorlde shall bee a part of thy joye which thou shalt haue in the Heauens in the life to come Therefore get much joye here and laye it vp in store in thine heart goe on in feeling and I promise thee in the Name of GOD it shall neuer depart but it shall euer augment and enlarge thy joye and glorie in the life to come No as the worde of GOD which is the immortall seede of GOD euanishes not so neither shall the effect of the worde euer euanish Then euer striue to get a sense of the working of this worde in thine heart Nowe a worde and so I shall ende Yee woulde thinke this a sober conclusion As wee walked by the waye when hee spâ—â—e to vs our hearts burned therefore it was he that spake with vs So they concluded that it must bee his Spirit onelie which settes the heart on fire May we not in like manner conclude At the preaching of Paule the Spirite settes the heart on fire therefore Paul is Christ This is a false conclusion And I answere to this That if these men had felt no more but a common feeling in an ordinarie measure their argument had not beene good But they had another feeling than can be at the preaching of a man for no doubt vvith the vvorde Hee sent His Spirite to vvorke in them extraordinarilie And I put it out of question They had such a vvonderfull feeling as they coulde neuer haue had at the preaching of anie man vvhosoeuer So their conclusion is sure Seeing as Hee spake Hee breathed His Spirite vpon vs Hee must bee CHRIST It is a vvonder of them vvho haue gotten GODS SPIRITE howe they vvill discerne of GODS SPIRITE in others And manie are beguiled for fault of this SPIRITE There is verie much spoken of our feeling at the PREACHING And vvhat serues all They call it a fire for the Spirite which raises that feeling is like a fire and therefore He is compared to a fire Matth. 3.11 And a fire hath euer an vp-burning and if thou haue true feeling thine heart shall bee set on fire that fire is mightie will burne vp the drosse of thy saluation which is in thy foule heart No speake not of feeling except thou be regenerate Thou that art an Harlot speake not of feeling except thou feele it burne vp thine harlotrie And thou that art a murtherer saye not that thou hast a feeling and if it burne not vp thy bloodie heart So I charge thee before God heare not one worde except thou findest that Spirit to burne vp thy corruption thou tellest mee that thou feelest and yet thou remainest an harlot fye vpon thine harlotrie let not that word come out of thy mouth Againe as the fire of Gods Spirit burnes vp the drosse of thy corruption so it will inflame thy loue to God it will inflame thine heart and all the power of the soule to the loue of GOD and righteousnesse so that it vvill binde thine heart to God as the Apostle sayes The loue of God constraineth me so that thou wouldest bee content to die to liue with Him and to pleasure Him thou wouldest not care to liue or to die and what more as a fire is nourished with some matter that is meete for burning so this fire once kindled in our soules is nourished and fed by the continuall presence of GOD in IESVS CHRIST and that precious oyle of the Holy Spirit Further a flame tendes alwayes vpward and it will lift an heauie thing that falles downe vpon it ye see a traine of powder will blow vp an house Wee are heauie by nature and loadned with sinne yet that fire of loue will raise thee vp and place thee with the Lord whom thou louest and thine heart will bee lifted vp to Him There is neuer one that loues IESVS in the Earth but they are dwelling with Him in the Heauen and shall enjoy that presence euerlastingly So yee see what it is to haue the heart set on fire till we meete with our LORD and then our heartes shall haue the full fruition of His presence for euer To this IESVS with the Father and Holy Spirit be glorie for euermore AMEN THE XL. LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST MARKE CHAP. XVI verse 13 And they went and tolde it to the remnant neither beleeued they them verse 14 Finally hee appeared vnto the eleuen as they sate together and reproched them for their vnbeliefe and hardnesse of heart because they beleeued not them which had seene Him beeing risen vp againe LVKE CHAP. XXIII verse 33 And they rose up the same houre and returned to Ierusalem and found the eleuen gathered together and them that were with them verse 34 Which saide The Lord is risen indeede and hath appeared to Simon verse 35 Then they tolde what things were done in the way and how Hee was knowen of them in breaking of bread verse 36 And as they spake these things Iesus Himselfe stood in the middes of them and said vnto them Peace be to you IHON CHAP. XX. verse 19 The same day then at night which was the first day of the weeke and when the doores were shut where the disciples were assembled for feare of the Iewes came Iesus and stood in the middes and said to them Peace be vnto you WEE haue heard Beloued in Christ these dayes past of the conference which was betwixt Christ and these two Disciples who were going to Emmaus Christ reproued theÌ„ sharplie because they thought that Christ being crucified all hope of Redemption was past Next He instructed them affirming that it behooued Him to suffer and by suffering to enter into His glorie This His doctrine which Hee prooued by manie Testimonies of Scripture beginning at Moses and from Moses Hee comes to the Prophets interpreting vnto them what they had spoken concerning Christ concerning His Passion and concerning His glorie after His Passion for the preaching of
the Gospell is nothing else but an expounding of Moses and the Prophets and Iesus Christ is the foundation whereupon the doctrine of Moses and the Prophets is builded He is the end of the law all tendes to Him Thereafter we heard how Christ manifested Himselfe to these Disciples for when as Hee made Himselfe as though Hee woulde haue left them beeing constrained by them Hee went in to tarrie with them and as He sate at table with them in the blessing and breaking and distributing of the bread their eyes were opened and they knowe Him Last wee hearde vvhat effectes vvere vvrought in them vvhen they sawe Hee vvas their Lorde and Master Howbeit Hee left them yet they vvere not sadde but that sight which they got of Him left exceeding great joye and comfort in their heartes and so they call to mind that burning which they found in their heartes when He spake vnto them whereby they are more confirmed that it was the Lorde that spake to them for the burning of the heart which a man will finde in himselfe is a sure token of the presence of Christ Nowe in the Text which we haue presently read we haue set down their returning to Hierusalem with great expedition how they declare to the Apostles others who were there assembled all things y t fell out vnto theÌ„ by the way these things which they saw with their eyes which they had heard with their ears Therafter we haue set doun another appearing of Christ which fell out this same very time y t these two Disciples are talking together with th'eleueÌ„ of these things TheÌ„ to come to the words It is said They rose vp the same houre and returned to Hierusalem The circumstance of the time of their returning vvould be weighed They make no delay they stay not all night in Emmaus albeit it was late and they were before of intention to haue remained there till the morning but they vse all possible expedition and they rise that same houre to returne to Hierusalem that they might shew the Disciples what they had heard and seene make them partakers of their joy Compare this their returning to Hierusalem with their comming out of Hierusalem to Emmaus ye will find a great difference WheÌ„ they came out of HierusaleÌ„ to Emmaus they went slowly with sad hearts sad conference and when the Lord whom they supposed to be a passenger met them inquires what conference that was that they had amongst themselues They take leasure enough to tell Him the sorrowfull newes that had falleÌ„ out in Hierusalem of the crucifying of Iesus of Nazareth But in their returning to Hierusalem they make great speede they goe quickly they goe with joyefull heartes hasting to communicate to the disciples the great joye which they themselues had conceiued vpon the things which both they sawe and heard The lesson is plaine When the children of God are casten downe when their hearts are grieued when they haue no joyfull and comfortable newes to tell but sadde and heauie tidinges concerning Christ and His Gospell and the estate of His Kirke then they will goe slowlie and with heauie cheare they will speake slowly and with sadnesse they will haue little pleasure in any thing that they doe for the griefe of their hearts takes hand and foote from them so that they can doe nothing willingly and with chearefulnesse But by the contrarie when their hearts are joyfull when they haue joyfull and comfortable tidinges to tell to others of Christ and His Kirke then are they quicke and speedie and chearefull in al their doings they will goe with expedition and chearefulnsse they will speake with chearfulnesse with chearfulnes they will make haste to communicate their joye to others for y e joy which they conceiue in their hearts cheares vp and encourages all the members of their bodies to doe their duetie vvillinglie vvith chearfulnesse and pleasure Yea such is the force of the joye in the heart that it will swallow vp ouercome all troubles all stayes impediments which can be casteÌ„ in to hinder a good purpose and therefore if thou seest a man slow to a good action and namelie to preach the Gospell of IESVS thou hast just occasion to suspect that he hath found little joy in his heart through the Gospel as by the contratrie if thou seest a man hasten with chearfulnes to preach the Gospell it is a sure token that he hath his heart filled with the sense of joye through the Gospell Nowe when they came to Hierusalem They founde the eleuen Disciples of the Lorde and beside them they founde sundrie others gathered together with them Appearinglie these men vvho were gathered together vvith the Disciples vvere such as had heard the Lord Iesus teaching when He was conuersant in the worlde and had founde the power of His Preaching effectuall to their conuersion for as euill men delite in the societie of euill men because conformitie in manners makes men to entertaine societie together as the harlot with the harlot the drunkarde with the drunkard the thiefe with the thiefe c. EueÌ„ so good men take pleasure in the company of good men that they may be a mutuall furtherance one to another of the glorie of God their own saluation When these two Disciples finde th'eleuen the rest that were with them in Hierusalem looke howe they are exercised They are telling one to another that the Lord Jesus was risen indeed These two Disciples came to tell theÌ„ these newes supposing they had knowne nothing of them but they found themselues preueÌ„ted they found that the Lords disciples tel them that same that they came to haue informed them of to wit that the Lord Iesus was risen indeed And this they prooue by the testimonie of Simon Peter who had affirmed to them that he had seene the Lord for among others to whom the Lord appeared after His ResurrectioÌ„ He appeared in particular to Simon Peter as Paul testifies 1. Cor. 15.5 where he telles that He was seene of Cephas before He was seene of the rest of the twelue So these two disciples that made haste vpon set purpose to further strentheÌ„ and comfort others they are furthered strengthened comforted by others and so they find their comming to bee profitable to themselues The lesson shortly is this Often times it comes to passe that they who come of set purpose to declare to others that joy which they haue found to be wrought in their soules by the Holy Spirit by the preaching of the Gospell are preuented by others heaâ—e of others these same glad tidings that they came to speake themselues before they can get time or leasure to vtter them theÌ„selues and so they finde that same joye communicated to them vvhich they come to communicate to others or if they be not preuented then it falles out that they heare these same glad tidings of others that they themselues declare to others and
so receiue mutuall comfort or if others speake nor to them at least this fall out that of their owne message and of that speach that they vtter of IESVS CHRIST they will find their joye to encrease more and more to abounde so that it falles out that their preaching is not onelie powerfull and comfortable to the soules of others but euen to themselues when they preach to others they preach to themselues If thou hast gotten a spiritual grace or comfort to thy soule bee carefull to communicate it vnto others for by so doing thou shalt find thy grace and joye to encrease feare not that by communicating of thy grace it shall bee empaired for these spirituall graces are not like worldlie benefites whereof the more thou giuest to others there is the lesse behinde but the more thou giuest of these spirituall graces vnto others the more thou hast behinde to thy selfe the more shall they encrease For to him that hath it shall bee giuen and hee shall haue abundance Matth. Chap. 25.29 But it vvoulde bee marked Albeit these two Disciples finde themselues to bee preuented by the eleuen who were telling that same thing that they came to tell them yet they are not so silent nor conceale not the thinges vvhich they had hearde and seene but it is saide that they also tolde what thinges were done in the waye and howe CHRIST was knowne of them in breaking of bread and so they goe about to confirme the APOSTLES in that which they themselues were telling of the Resurrection of CHRIST Nowe a question may bee mooued heere Howe is it that LVKE sayes that vvhen the two Disciples came of purpose to tell the eleuen what had befallen to them in the waye and vvhat they had hearde and seene concerning IESVS the eleuen preuentes the two and telles them that IESVS was risen and had appeared to Peter seeing MARKE speaking of this same matter sayes that when these two went and tolde Christes appearing to them to the remnant that they beleeued Howe agree these two together To this I answere First That when LVKE sayes that they tolde the two Disciples that the Lorde was risen indeede and that hee had appeared to Simon Peter hee meanes that there was a number among them who beleeued and that which was proper to some hee ascribes it indefinitelie to the whole And on the other part when MARKE sayes they beleeued not it is to bee vnderstoode that there vvere certaine of them vvho beleeued not And so both the EVANGELISTES according to the accustomed forme of speaking in the Scripture attribute that indefinitelie to the whole which was proper to a part Next I answere When Marke sayes they beleeued not he speakes of a full and perfect Faith that was free of all doubting wauering and vnconstancie but Luke speakes of a begunne Faith which in the meane time wantes not the owne doubting for wee may perceiue in the Historie that sundrie times after this they were in doubt as yee see hereafter in the 41â— verse of this Chapter where it is said that after Hee had shewed them His hands and His feete they beleeued not their heartes were not constantly settled with an assurance of His resurrection Novv in the next part of our Text vve haue set dovvne another appearing of Christ after His resurrection which falles out in this same very time when these two disciples were talking with the eleuen this is His first apparition we haue heard of foure alreadie His first appearing was to Marie Magdalene the second was to certain other women the third was to y e two disciples who were going to Emmaus the fourth was to Peter which we shewed you before Luke touched in a worde verse 34. Now in this His fift appearing He appeares vnto the disciples beeing assembled together The three Euangelists Marke Luke Iohn set downe particularly the circumstances of their assembling meeting together which circumstances would be well considered because they serue for the clearing of the Historie the first circumstance is of the persons that were conueened who and how many they were Marke sayes that He appeared vnto the eleuen yet we must vnderstand by the Historie y t followes in Iohn that Thomas was not present at this meeting but here he giues y e name of the whole to y e most part after Iudas death they were commonly called the eleuen Iohn sayes generally indefinitely That the disciples were assembled Of this circumstance we marke The disciples of the Lord for the most part euer vsed to meete and assemble together they assembled together before His Passion they assembled together euen in the verie time of His Passion and hanging on the Crosse for it is saide in the 23. Chapter of Luke and the 49. verse And all His acquaintance stood afarre off and the women that followed Him from Galile beholding these things and now they assembled together after His Passion So yee may see They who are Christes are euer going about to meet to holde themselues together that they may speake conferre of all thinges that fall out concerning Christ and the estate of His Church whether they be joyfull and comfortable or sad sorrowfull that they may edifie further one another mutually in the course of their saluation that they may be joyned together and make vp and compleete one body And why not For as there is one GOD the Father one head the LORD Iesus one Spirit one Faith one Baptisme one hope of vocation so there should bee but one body the members whereof should endeuoure to entertaine loue and vnitie amongst themselues Ephes Chapter 4 verses 3 4 5 6. This meeting together of the members of the body of Christ and their mutuall conference brings with it an exceeding great consolation and joy for the Lord hath promised to send that Comforter the Holy Spirit to these meetings of the Sainctes and Christ sayes in the 18. Chapter of Matthew and the 20. verse Where two or three is gathered together in my Name there will I be in the middes of them If thou despisest these holy meetings and disdainest thou the holy conference I denounce to thee in the Name of Christ thou shalt neuer finde a solide joy or consolation manie there are who contemne the meetings of the faithfull and the assemblies of the Sainctes and disdaine the meanes of grace godly speeches and conferences and yet will dreame to themselues that the Holy Spirit vvill dvvell in their soules and that they will finde joy and consolation but the end will prooue that their corrupt and false hearts haue deceiued them Nowe I come to the second circumstance which is concerning their exercise in that meeting What were they doing Marke sayes They sate together Luke sayes They were speaking of these things that they had heard by the report of sundrie persons concerning the Lords Resurrection so ye see their exercise was holy their conference was spirituall
this was a very good preparation going before the Lords comming appearing to them yea no question it was wrought by the force and power of the Lord Himselfe when He was approaching and drawing neare to them for when the Lord is drawing neare approaching to vs then that Holy Spirit who dwelles in our heartes beginnes to moue and vtter Himselfe He wakens vp joy in our heartes Hee opens our mouth to speake with freedome and libertie and to entertaine purpose of spirituall and heauenlie thinges for that Spirit in our soules hath a forecast and feeling before hand of the LORDS comming this is it that shall mooue the godly in that great day when they shall see the tokens of the comming of the LORD to looke vp and lift vp their heades knowing that their redemption dravves neare Luke 21.28 for except the Lord did send before a ligt to shine in their soules as a messenger going before Him to tell Him that the Lorde is comming they would neuer lift vp their heads and therefore when the Lord commands His disciples to looke vp and to lift vp their heades before His comming it is as much as if He had saide to them that Hee will furnish them strength at His comming to lift vp their heades and to be waiting for Him Nowe followes the third circumstance concerning the time of this meeting Iohn in setting it downe is more particular than any of the rest of the Euangelists He sayes It was the same day at night which was the first day of the weeke That is it was the same day that He rose which for that same cause is called the Lords day and it was in the Euening after Sunne-setting when it began to be darke night for it was after the returning of the disciples from Emmaus and they returned not to Ierusalem vntill it was very late for wee heard before it was towards night when they desired the Lorde to stay with them and they returned from Emmaus to Ierusalem after the Lord had stayed some space with them and had eaten and manifested Himselfe to them in the breaking of bread Luke 24.29.30 Iohn telles the cause why they assembled in the night rather than in the daye For feare of the Iewes who as they were malicious against the Lord Himselfe so would they haue vttered their malice against His disciples and all them that loued Him so they make a choyse of a time that was least dangerous for Brethren it is the Lordes will that His children make a choyse of the time that is most conuenient which may serue most for their safetie in their assemblies and meetings it makes not at what times meetings be kept whether in the daye or in the night if so be that they who assemble and meete together be holy for all times are sanctified to the faithfull and them who are holie themselues for it is true that Paul sayes To the pure all things are pure Tit. 1.15 Likewise Christ Himselfe shewes His presence to His own indifferently at any time when they are met together whether it be day or night it is not these outward things that Christ chiefly respects neither the time nor the place nor no such outward circumstaÌ„ce but Christ lookes chiefly to the persons that meete together to their disposition whether they be holy or not the outward things sanctifie not the person but the person sanctifies the outward things manie thinke thâ—t if they come to the Church on the Lordes daye because both time and place is holy that they are holy enough but if thou hast no holinesse in thine heart all thinges are polluted vnto thee the time is polluted the place is polluted the exercise of the word is polluted For vnto them that are defiled and vnbeleeuing nothing is pure but euen their mindes and consciences are defiled Tit. 1.16 The last circumstance is of the place The Euangelists make no particular mention of a speciall place wherein they did meet only Iohn markes That the doores were shut and therefore that they kept themselues close and quiet and in this their meeting exercise they were secret so that the Iewes knew not either where they were or what they were doing Iohn sayes it was for feare of the Iewes that the doores were shut As they had holy wisdome in choosing of the time so they had holy wisdome in choosing of the place God will haue His children to be wise in all things and when Christ sendes out His Apostles He exhortes them To be wise as serpents Matth. 10.16 The faithfull are compassed about with many perills and dangers on all sides which hardly they will eschew except they haue holy wisdome Now it was not only the feare of danger from the Iewes that made them shut the doores but likewise that they might be secret for when the Sainctes are exercised in godly conference and in spirituall and heauenly exercises and when they are handling secret and hid mysteries of saluation then they should bee separated from the worlde and from the societie of prophane men prophane men should be debarred from such holy exercises and from the meetings of the Sainctes and one day they shall be fully debarred and put out of their companie for when they shall be gathered vnto the Lorde Iesus to enjoy His glorious presence in the Heauens the wicked shall get none entrance there to trouble them any more with their prophanitie Thus farre wee haue spoken shortly of the circumstances of the disciples meeting Now it followes we should speake of the appearing it selfe Whilst the disciples thus gathered were speaking one to another of the Resurrection of Christ in the meane time Iesus himselfe comes stands vp in the mids of them He presentes Himselfe to them when the doore were shut after an extraordinarie manner a marueilous manner and verie suddenly for a glorified bodie hath a very swift and speedie motion Iohn lets vs see that His appearing and comming to the house to them was miraculous for hee sayes Hee came when the doores were shut but the particular â—â—nner of His entering in by what way Hee came into the house is not expresselie set downe by anie of the Euangelists and therefore sundrie men haue sundry opinions of the manner of His comming in euerie one farre different from another First The Papistes affirme That the bodie of our Sauiour pearced thorow the doore the substance and bodie of the doore remaining whole vnbroken vnaltered in anie part so that both the bodie of the LORDE and the bodie of the doore at one time vvere in one place And this they affirme that they may haue some appearance of a grounde to establishe that vaine and foolishe dreame and fantasie of the bodily and locall presence of the bodie of our Lorde in the Sacrament of the Supper Of the which doctrine of necessitie it must follow That one and that selfe same bodie may be in manie places at one time for
if it were true y t two bodies might bee in one place at one time then it would followe that one bodie at one time might be in manie places But both these assertions are directlie repugnant to the nature of a bodie whatsoeuer it bee whether it bee a glorified bodie or a bodie not glorified It is but a vaine distinction which the Papistes haue inuented betwixt a bodie glorified and a bodie not glorified for a glorified body remaines a true body the glorifying of it takes not away the nature nor the natural properties of a bodie and therefore it cannot bee at one time in manie places but onelie in one place neither can it bee in one and the selfe same place with another bodie Next others thinke That when the body of the Lord went in at the doore the body of the doore was rarified and yeelded and gaue place to the Lords body that it might enter in when it had gone in it returned to its own estate was thickned made solide as of before euen as when the Lord was walking on the sea the sea was thickned made hard solide vnder His feet y t it might beare Him aboue therafter again incontinent it returned to its own nature This opinion is more tollerable than the former because it stands well enough with the Omnipotent power of God where as y e former sentence of the Papists cannot stand with His omnipotency because it includes a manifest contradiction Thirdly some thinke That whē the Lord was entring in the dore opened to Him and after He was come in the dore incontinent most speedily closed again This opiniō semes to be most probable wee read in sundrie places the like to haue bene done as in the 5. Chapter of the Actes the Angell of the Lorde opens the doores of the Prison where the Apostles were and shuts them againe And in the 12. Chapter of the Actes when the Angell brings Peter out of prison the yron gate opened vnto them of the owne accorde And likewise in the 16. Chapter of the Actes When Paul and Silas beeing in prison prayed and sung Psalmes to God all the doores of the prison opened and euery mans bands were loosed in the which places yee see When the Lord deliuered His seruants whether by the ministerie of His Angels or without their ministerie the doores were opened But in no place of Scripture we reade of the rarifying of a bodie and much lesse any thing of that vaine opinion of the Papists That two bodies may be in one place at one time and therefore this last opinion seemes to be most likely But in this point wee insist not Only one thing we marke out of this place that the LORDS comming is very sudden and vnlooked for how so euer it be that the LORD comes vnto men vvhether it bee in mercie as Hee vses to come to His ovvne vvhether it be injustice to the vvicked His comming is euer sudden and vvithout their expectation and therefore we should not be so carefull curiously to enquire about the particular comming of the LORD as vve should be carefull to prepare our selues that vvee may bee readie vvaiting for His glorious appearing that vvhen euer Hee comes Hee may finde vs with oyle in our lampes readie to enter in with Him Watch sayes the LORD for yee knowe neither the day nor the houre when the Sonne of man will come Now to end shortly Hauing spoken already of the circumstances of the meeting of the disciples as also of the marueilous appearing of the Lord to them it followes last that we speake of His saluting of them when He comes in amongst the mids of them He is not silent but He salutes them sayes Peace be vnto you This was His cōmon salutation which they were acquainted with no question He vttered it with such a homely familiar voyce that they might easily haue known that it was He none other y t appeared spake vnto them for Hee vvent about by all meanes possible to remooue all doubting out of their heartes that so they might haue a full assurance of His Resurrection and yet for all this very hardly could they bee perswaded that it was He and therefore Marke sayes He reprooued them for their vnbeliefe hardnesse of heart because they beleeued not them which had seene him beeing risen vp againe For such is the infidelity dulnes of our hearts that al the meanes that GOD vses is litle enough to make vs to beleeue Now when the LORD sayes to His disciples Peace be vnto you wee must not thinke that this was a bare and simple vvishing and desiring of peace vnto them without any further effect No wee must not thinke so This word was powerfull this wishing of peace behooued to bee effectuall in their soules because it proceeded from Him who is the fountaine and author of all peace and who Himselfe is our peace as the Apostle sayes Ephes 2.14.17 And when the Lord who is peace Himselfe comes to preach peace How can it be possible except the heartes of men be harder than the flint or adamant but that preaching of peace must be effectuall in their soules The Lord in this wishing of peace is not like man the most that a man can doe is to wish peace and to desire peace to others No man albeit He were neuer so holy can doe more hee cannot giue his peace that he wishes he cannot make his peace effectuall But Christ when Hee wishes peace Hee giues and communicates that same peace He workes that same peace in their heartes and therefore when Hee is departing out of the world comforting His disciples Hee sayes Peace I leaue with you my peace I giue vnto you not as the world giues giue I vnto you Ioh. 14.27 He sayes not only I leaue peace with you but I giue you my peace and that not as men in the world who can doe no more but wish I make my peace effectuall by giuing you peace The Lord make euery one of vs partakers of this peace that wee may euer haue matter of rejoycing in IESVS To whome with the Father and Holie Spirit be all praise and honour for euermore AMEN THE XLI LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST LVKE CHAP. XXIIII verse 37 But they were abashed and afraide supposing that they had seene a spirit verse 38 Then hee saide vnto them Why are yee troubled and wherefore doe doubtes arise in your heartes verse 39 Beholde mine handes and my feete for it is I my selfe handle mee and see for a spirit hath not flesh and bones as yee see mee haue verse 40 And when hee had thus spoken hee shewed them his handes and feete verse 41 And while they yet beleeued not for joye and wondered c. IOHN CHAP. XX. verse 20 And when hee had thus saide hee shewed vnto them his handes and his side Then were the Disciples gladde when they had seene the Lord.
see Christ that hee woulde not care for death nor for the graue to see Him Howbeit they cannot beleeue yet they haue joye and their soules are rauished with admiration Faith is not so much in a rauished and carried heart as in a setâ—ed soule A faithfull heart is the moste setled heart in the worlde If there bee vanitie in the heart faith is so solide that it will presse out vanitie Faith is a solide thing in a setled heart A faithfull man is a setled man and a man without faith is as an emptie vessell and as a bagge of winde his joye is light and proceedes onely from the swarfe of the soule But after once faith bee setled there will bee solide joy that comes in with pleasure and searches the least corner of the heart a joye vnspeakeable and glorious begunne heere which will haue none ende till wee see Christ So this their joye goes not farre enough downe in their heartes for they are rauished with joye but had not solide faith When I marke this place I see in it what shall be the estate of the godlie when they shall meete with their LORD The first sight shall rauishe them so that they shall wonder that euer there coulde haue beene such a glorie Wilt thou but suspende thy judgement for a while thou shalt see that which thou neuer sawest and that which thou neuer heardest tell of and that which neuer coulde enter into thine heart When thou shalt see this thou shalt fall into an admiration Then after once thou knowest Him then after the admiration shall follow a solide faith a solide joye and a setled apprehension of thinges spirituall and that not for a time but for euermore Nowe it lastes not scarcelie is it present when it euanishes But after the full sight shall followe the solide joye that neuer shall haue ende As by the contrarie This shall bee the estate of the reprobate The first sight and sense of that wrath that shall ceaze vpon them so fearcelie as neuer before they coulde haue suspected shall astonishe confounde and dammishe them Thou knewest neuer what measure of wrath is hidden vp in the treasure of GOD. Thou who art a reprobate till thou feelest it there shall come such a terrour vpon thee that it shall cause all the haires of thine head stande ouer ende and it is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 such an astonishment as Christ suffered in the Garden a little before Hee was taken Then shall followe on them that anguishe and fearefull dreadfulnesse pressing them when they haue beene astonished at the sight and sense of vvrath vvhich is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 vvhich vvas the LORDES seconde perturbation vvhich is a more setled feeling of vvrath and more constant apprehension of dolour sorrowe and anguishe for euermore in the Helles And it shall bee so vveightie vvhen they are shotte into Hell that it shall presse the sappe out of them The LORDE saue vs from it and giue vs grace to bee founde in CHRIST that wee maye bee saued from that vvrath vvhich is to come in Him To vvhome vvith the Father and the Holie Spirite bee all Praise Honour and Glorie for euermore Amen THE XLII LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST LVKE CHAP. XXIIII verse 41 Hee saide vnto them Haue yee heere anie meate verse 42 And they gaue him a piece of a broyled fish and of an honie combe verse 43 And hee tooke it and did eate before them verse 44 And hee saide vnto them These are the wordes which I spake vnto you while I was yet with you that all must bee fulfilled which are written of mee in the Lawe of Moses and in the Prophets and in the Psalmes verse 45 Then opened hee their vnderstanding that they might vnderstand the Scriptures verse 46 And saide vnto them Thus it is written and thus it behooued Christ to suffer and to rise againe from the dead the thirde day WEe continue as yet beloued Brethren in the History of the appearing of Christ after His glorious Resurrection His fift appearing was to the eleueÌ„ who were so called after the defection of Iudas and the others The common ranke of His Disciples conuened together in the night in a secret plâ—ce of Hierusalem and while they are sitting together hauing their conferences one with another each one perswading certifying another of the Resurrection of the Lord in the meane time the doore being shut the LORD on a suddaintie comes in ere they wist and Hee standes in the middes of them standing in the middes of them He wishes His peace to them and He sayes Peace be vnto you they seeing Him and supposing Hee had bene a Spirit or an Angell in the likenesse of a man they were abashed and astonished The Lord aftherwards settles them with a litle sharpe rebuke Hee beginnes to shew vnto them that He was no spirit but a very body and that same very man called Iesus vvho before His Passion vvas conuersant with them that same man that suffered and therefore He holdes out His handes and His feete which were both marked with the print of His wounds on the Crosse See sayes He feele sayes He looke if I be not that same man which suffered a Spirit hath not flesh and blood as I haue Ergo I am no Spirit When He had in this manner led them by the very sense to know Him by the eye to beholde Him by the eare to heare His familiar voyce salutation by the hand to handle Him What effect followed Yet sayes the Scripture they beleeued not and they could not beleeue for exceeding joy wherewith they were rauished for admiration and wondering they could not beleeue for a piece of time Faith dwelles in a setled heart and if there be any vanitie and any emptinesse in the heart Faith will presse out the vanitie and will fill vp that emptinesse in the heart and the faithfull man is the most solide and settled thing in the world and hee who is the vnfaithfull man is a vaine hearted man his heart is blowne vp with vanitie albeit he had all the naturall wit in the world Now the joy that Faith brings with it is not an admiration and rauishing of the heart but it is a solide joy a solide apprehension of spiritual things in the heart so the heartes of the disciples at the first sight became rauished in admiration the vaile of their heartes were not touched with joy they had not that settled joy that they had afterward Nowe to come to the Text that wee haue read In it first the Lord yet continues in assuring them that it was He He striueth on with their infidelitie then when He hath shewed them visibly the action of a body in eating in their sight then He comes to a sweete Sermon wherein Hee instructes them in two points first that all things that befell to Him as His Passion and Resurrection behooued to haue befallen to Him secondly againe
naturall wit thou hast if it be not sanctified the more foolish shall the Crosse of Christ and His Resurrection to glorie seeme to thee for the wisdome of the flesh is enimitie against God I tell thee thou must not bring thy naturall wit to the Scriptures Paul telles thee If thou wouldest bee wise in God thou must be a foole that thou mayest be wise Art thou wise in the world when thou commest to the Church leaue thy wisdome behinde thee art thou a Lawyer keepe it to the Session-house art thou a Mediciner Hast thou any great wisdome leaue all behind thee and come like a sillie childe that hath no wit or els the more thou hearest the greater shall bee thy blindnesse and induration Now come to the conclusion of the Argument Hee concludes That it behooued Christ to suffer and to rise againe from the dead the thirde day There is a necessitie of Christs death and Resurrection and so a necessitie that they shoulde beleeue them for to the ende that we may beleeue in the Gospell there must be a necessitie laid vpon vs to wit that wee be assured that otherwise it could not be but it behooued Christ to suffer and rise againe as the Euangell recordes Now this necessitie we shew you before We may know by the olde Testament Moses the Prophets the Psalmes for this we must lay as an infallible ground that whatsoeuer was foretold by them of necessitie it behooued to come to passe and so wee see that the Olde Testament serues greatly to strenthen our Faith for vvhen vvee see the thinges that vvere foretolde to be all fulfilled in Him all matter of occasion of doubting is taken away The Lord worke this Faith in our heartes for Christs sake To whome with the Father and Holy Spirit be all praise honour and glory for euermore AMEN THE XLIII LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST LVKE CHAP. XXIIII verse 47 And that Repentance and Remission of sinnes should be preached in His Name among all Nations beginning at Hierusalem IN opening vp of the fift appearance of the Lord after His Resurrection to His Disciples conueened in Hierusalem in the night time well beloued in CHRIST we haue heard how the LORD hath trauelled by sundrie meanes to make them to knowe Him while as He appeared to them and stood vp in the middes of them suddenly He spake to them familiarly and after His owne accustomed manner yet they beleeue not nor vnderstandes Him not by His speaking but thought that He had bene a Spirit or an Angell in the likenesse of a man Then He comes nearer them and shewing out His handes and His feete and markes of the nailes wherewith Hee vvas vvounded on the Crosse He sayes to them See feele and touch mine handes and my feete with your hands see I am euen He I am not a Spirit as yee suppose I am a verie bodie a Spirit hath no flesh nor bones therefore I am no Spirit yet they beleeue not for joy sayes the Text but they stoode wondering Then Hee comes nearer them and demandes whether if they had any meate amongst them and they gaue Him a piece of rosted fish and of an hony combe Hee eates in their presence testifying to them by His action of eating Hee was no Spirit a Spirit cannot eate nor drinke yet Hee leaues them not but Hee preaches to them a sweet Sermon whereof the last day ye heard there was two partes In the first Hee propones to them a necessitie of all these thinges that befell vnto Him all behooued to come to passe He behooued to be crucified He behooued to rise againe the third day And why Because it was written First in Moses Secondly in the Prophetes and lastly in the Psalmes What euer was written all behooued to be accomplished not so much as one sillable of it might perish because whatsoeuer was written by Moses the Prophetes and Dauid all was ordained and decreed all was bound in a fast decree from all eternitie This was the first necessitie Nowe this day Brethren as God will giue the grace we shall come to the other necessitie which is of the preaching and then we shall come to the second part of His Sermon concerning a direction vnto His Disciples to goe out to the world and testifie of these thinges that they heard and saw of Him Then to come to the purpose as it behooued that all these thinges that were foretolde of Christ should come to passe so there was al 's great a necessitie that all should be preached That repentance and remission of sinnes should be preached in His name among all Nations Now to speake somewhat of this necessitie of preaching Men thinke commonly all this preaching to be for a piece of policie and for the fashioun a man to stand vp preach to the rest they thinke it a piece of folie ueening to the Church to bee but for the fashion But I shall tell thee except there be preaching no saluation no life shall pertaine vnto thee except there bee preaching Christs comming into the worlde is in vaine for thee all His suffering is for nothing His Resurrection shall bee of no value to thee they will doe thee no good For to speake of the ordinance of God and of that eternall decree for as the Lord ordained from all eternitie Christ to come in the world to suffer to rise againe so He ordained preaching to be in His Name But to leaue that thinkest thou to come to Heauē without faith No thou shalt neuer see it without faith thou shalt neuer see y e face of Christ thinkest y ◠to get Faith without hearing If thou contemnest hearing thou shalt neuer get Faith in Christ But hovve canst thou heare if there bee no preaching thou must heare a voyce So vvithout the sounding of the Gospell no life Christ His suffering His rising is but dead to thee vvithout preaching That life that flovved from the Resurrection of Christ is conueyed in the soule by hearing and without hearing thou shalt ly deade and die euerlastingly Therefore Christ vvhen Hee came into the world He vvas no dumbe sufferer He preached on night and day Paul sayes Ephes 2.17 When Hee came Hee was the peacemaker and Hee preached peace And to the Romanes Chapter 15. verse 8. Hee is called a Minister of Circumcision and CHRIST knowing this necessitie of preaching vvhen He goes His vvay to Heauen leaues Hee the vvorlde vvithout preaching No Paul to the Ephesians Chapter 4. verse 11. sayes Hee gaue some to be Apostles some to be Prophetes some to be Euangelists some to be Pastours some to bee Doctours and all to the end that they might preach the Gospell of peace to His comming And Paul sayes of himselfe Woe to mee if I preach not the Gospell 1. Cor. Chapter 9. verse 16. Hee left His Spirit behind Him as yee see He promises in Iohn Chapter 14. verse 26. But marke He left His Spirit to
thou restrainest that grace that should bring poore soules to Heauen and saluation But to goe forward We haue heard the necessitie of preaching in whose name we should preach what we should preach and last to whome it should be preached to all Nations euen to the Gentiles O! if we Gentiles should not rejoyce that mercie and grace is preached vnto vs who were aliants from the grace of GOD. Now albeit this grace bee extended to all yet there is a difference in order of preaching for the Lorde sayes Beginning at Hierusalem As He would say this preaching must first be preached at Hierusalem and beginne there and before grace bee offered to the Gentiles grace first of all must be offered to the Iewes Grace pertaines first to the Iewes they were the people of God of olde and therefore they must haue their owne right and then when grace is offered to the Iewes grace is extended and runnes abroade ouer all the earth Paul sayes to y e Iewes It was necessary that the word of God should first haue beene spoken vnto you Actes 13.46 There is the order yet the Lorde loues Hierusalem forgets it not Hierusalem that crucified the Lord the Lord forgets it not the Lord will not cast it away but will send His Apostles to preach there first O how loth was He to cast away that Nation that He had chosen of olde from among all Nations a people that He hath once begunne with O how loth will He be to cast away that people Scotland hath a proofe of this I dare say it had not bene the patience that the Lord beares vnto this Land He had not spared vs so long because of the great contempt and disdaining of the Gospell But aboue all the rest that Nation which the Lorde hath chosen from among the rest to be a peculiar people to Himselfe He will offer grace to it first therefore the Iewes got this honour first to haue grace offered to them And as grace in this life is offered to the Iew so shall the Iew get first glorie in Heauen Paul Rom. 2.10 sayes Glorie and honour and peace shall be to euery man that doeth good to the Iew first and also to the Grecian And as the glorie shall belong vnto the faithfull Iew first so by the contrarie the vnfaithfull Jew shall first bee dishonoured for the Apostle sayes in the words immediatly preceeding Tribulation and anguish shall bee vpon the soule of euery one that doeth euill of the Iewe first and next of the Grecian But to ende heere I beseech you to striue vnto vnfained Repentance and to get an assurance of the remission of thy sinnes here if thou wilt be honoured in this life by grace and in the life to come by glorie in Heauen for neither grace nor glorie pertaines vnto impennitent sinners who lye like swine in sinne and delite in sinne But only to all penitent sinners where sinne aboundes grace and mercie superaboundes and that in the blood of Iesus Christ To whom with the Father and Holy Spirit be all honour and glorie for euermore AMEN THE XLIV LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST LVKE CHAP. XXIIII verse 48 Now yee are witnesses of these things verse 49 And behold I doe send the promise of the Father vpon you but tarie yee in the citie of Hierusalem vntill yee be endued with power from high AFTER that the Lord belooued Brethren in Christ in His fift appearing after His Resurrection by sundrie euidences hath gone about to perswade His Disciples that it was Hee Hee vtters a sweete Sermon for their instruction wherein first Hee instructes and informes them in two necessities the first is that all thinges that befell to Him as His Passion and Resurrection behooued to befell vnto Him the second is that as these things befell to Him of necessitie so of necessitie these things behoued to be preached in the world Next Hee giues them a direction to goe out and to preach this Gospell to the worlde We haue heard alreadie of the two necessities First that it behooued Him to suffer the death and to rise againe from death because these things were foretold of Him in Moyses and the Prophets and the Psalmes therefore of necessitie they behooued to come to passe We heard thereafter of the necessitie of the preaching of these thinges Profane men thinke preaching is for the fashion but they deceiue themselues for if there be a necessitie that thou shouldest beleeue that thou mayst be saued there is as great a necessitie that there should be preaching of the word for Faith is by hearing and without hearing no Faith no life no saluation In opening vp of this necessitie of preaching we marked vnto you the particular circumstances that are set downe in the Text Namely first in whose name this preaching behooued to be to wit in the Name of IESVS CHRIST Next whereof it behooued this preaching to bee to wit of Repentance and Remission of sinnes for that is the summe of the Gospel Thirdly to whome this behooued to be preached not to the Iewes only but to all Nations and last in what order this doctrine should be preached first to the Iewes beginning at Ierusalem and thereafter to the Gentiles Now in the Text that we haue presently read the Lord comes to the second part of His Sermon wherein Hee giues direction to the Apostles to bee Preachers and witnesses to the world of all these thinges promising againe to them that Spirit which Hee had promised to them before His suffering and that they might haue the greater securitie Hee giues them a commandement not to depart from Ierusalem vntill they were endued with power and vertue out of Heauen But to come to the wordes after that Hee hath set downe the necessitie of preaching Hee giues them a direction and charge to bee preachers of these thinges vnto the worlde Now sayes Hee yee are witnesses of these things that is These things that yee haue heard and seene come to passe according as they vvere foretolde yee must not keepe them close and secret with your selues but yee must declare preach and testifie them vnto the world Nowe it is not without great cause that the Lord directes and sendes them out to preach for looke how necessarie it is that the word bee preached as necessarie it is that some bee directed and sent out by the Lorde to preach for How shall they preach sayes Paul except they be sent Rom. Chapter 10. verse 15. A man must not runne vnsent but before hee preach hee must haue a commission from God If we will enter in a particular consideration marke all things set downe in this Sermon we will finde there is nothing either concerning Christ Himselfe His suffering and rising againe or concerning the Gospell of Christ and preaching of it or concerning the Ministers Preachers of the Gospell falles out rashly or by fortoun chance but that all things come to passe by the
and quicknesse of his wit may doe some things without the speciall assistance of the Spirit of Christ but in the Church no man can doe any thing without the presence of the Spirit the man that hath not the Spirit and His graces in some measure is altogether vnprofitable and vnmeete for the Lordes worke for this cause the Lorde makes a speciall promise of this Spirit to them whome He places in His seruice because their calling and function in all respects is spirituall Looke to experience and ye will finde the trueth of this promise There is not a faithfull Minister but in some measure hee hath the Spirit of God to bee powerfull with him in his calling in such sort that not himselfe only but others also who see and heare him will sensiblie perceiue and take it vp The Apostle Paul found sensibly the Spirit of God to be powerfull with him in his labouring in the Ministerie when hee sayes It was not I that laboured but the grace of God which is with me 1 Cor. Chapter 15. verse 10. And againe when he sayes That hee laboured and stroue according to His working which worketh in him mightily Col. Chapter 1. verse 29. And on the other part when hee sayes to the Corinthians Yee see the experience of Christ that speakes in me which toward you is not weake but is mightie in you 2 Cor. Chap. 13. verse 3. he importes that as he himselfe found the power of the Spirit within him so they to whome he preached found it by His Spirit But I insist not to bring in particular places for if we consider well the Epistles of Paul vvee will finde many sentences testifying to vs that not only he himselfe found the power of the Spirit in his Ministerie and the life of Iesus working mightely in him in the middes of his infirmities yea euen in death it selfe 2. Cor. Chapter 4. verse 8. but also that same power was manifest vnto them that heard him Naturall men thinke all is but scorne that is spoken of the Spirit and of His power in the preaching of the Gospell they laugh at it as if there were no such thing but the faithfull man findes that it is not for nought that Christ promised His Spirit to them whom Hee sends as also that vvithout that Spirit no grace could haue bene wrought in their soules Now in the last wordes of this Text to assure them the more that they should receiue this Holy Spirit that was promised the Lord commands them That they goe not out of Ierusalem but that they tarie there vntill they be endued with power from on high that is Vntill they haue receiued this Spirit that He promised to send vnto them So in a manner for their further assurance He prescribes to them a particular time within the which they should receiue the Holie Ghost The Lord commonly when Hee makes a promise of anie thing to His owne Hee will giue them some waâ—rand to confirme and assure them vntill Hee fullie performe His promise for because He knowes our weaknesse and infirmitie He giues vs as it were an earnest pennie to strengthen our Faith and Hope vntill He pay the whole summe to vs for such is our weaknâ—sse that albeit vve haue no more wee cannot bee able long to depend vpon His naked word It is true indeede that the Lord sometime for the triall of the Faith of His owne will charge them to rest vpon His bare and naked word only to beleeue His promise Hee will giue no furâ—her assurance as likewise for a season it may bee that they depend vpon His bare word but it is as true that this cannot continue long for except as by Faith they depend vpon the worde so also they haue some feeling and foretasting of the thing promised and some earnestpennie and securitie to assure them of the obtaining of the promise their Faith will faile and decay So weake are we in Faith so ready are we to mistrust that we cannot stand nor continue except wee bee vnderpropped and vpholden by some speciall warrand from God Now to end One thing further may be marked in these words The Lorde discharges the Apostles to goe out of Ierusalem vntill they haue gotten tâ—is Holy Spirite that Hee promised them The lesson is A Minister should not couet to goe to the worlde to preach the Gospell vntill the time hee bee assured that the Holie Spirit accompanies him and his trauells for if the Apostles themselues might not goe out to preach vntill the Spirit were sent vnto them it is a foolish thing for any man after them to presume to doe it But alas it is a thing greatly to be lamented in this age that there are so fewe that waite vntill they be accompanied with the Holy Spirit in their Ministerie and that so many goe rashly to vndertake such an high calling Many vpon a conceite that they haue of their naturall giftes their wisdome their quicknesse ingine memorie eloquence and such other giftes will start vp to the pulpet and preach confidently to the people in the Name of Iesus But the Lorde in His just Iudgement not only withdrawes all blessing from their labours but also heapâ—s shame and ignominie vpon them and makes it manifest to the world that He sent them not but they ranne vnsent But thou who wouldest haue a good conscience who wouldest haue the Lord to blesse thy trauells in His Ministerie presume not too farre of thy naturall giftes how great so euer they be but waite vpon the Lordes leasure vntill Hee preuent thee with His Spirit and endue thee with power from on hie and in the meane time be crying earnestly for the presence of that Spirit who when Hee comes will open thine heart and loose thy mouth to speake with boldnesse and freedome in the Name of Iesus To whome with the Father and that blessed Spirit be all praise and honour for euermore AMEN THE XLV LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST IHON CHAP. XX. verse 21 Then said Iesus to them againe Peace be vnto you as my Father sent me so send â— you verse 22 And when He had saide that He breathed on them and saide vnto them Receiue the Holy Ghost verse 23 Whosoeuer sinnnes ye remit they are remitted vnto them and whosoeuer sinnes ye reteine they are reteined HITHERTO beloued Brethren in Christ wee haue insisted in the opening vp of that Sermon that the Lorde vttered to His Apostles in His fift appearing after His Resurrection as it is set down by the Euangelist Luke wherein first He lets them see that it behooued Him to suffer and to rise againe from the death because it was so foretolde of Him and that it behooued Repentance Remission of sinnes to be preached in His Name to all Nations beginning at Jerusalem Next He giues them a direction to goe out to the world to be witnesses and preachers of these things albeit they were altogether vnmeet and vnsufficient and had
deserued no such thing at His hand because they were ashamed of Him and fled away at His Passion yet He honoures them with this high calling then to encourage them the more chearfully to vndertake this calling He promises to send vnto them the Holy Spirit who was before promised to them by the Father to accompanie them and their trauells And last that they might haue the greater securitie and assurance to receiue this Spirit He giues them a commandement not to depart from Ierusalem vntill they finde His promise performed vnto them and vntill they were endued vvith power from on high Thus farre vve haue heard out of Luke of this Sermon Now in this Text that vve haue read Iohn followes out cheifly y e latter part of the Lord concerning the sending out of the Apostles and he insistes therein more largely and particularly than Luke does marking especially the things that vvere omitted by Luke for he vvrote after him First in these vvordes vve haue set downe a preface to prepare their heartes the better to receiue the vvorde which Hee vvas to speake vnto them thereafter vvee haue the preaching wherin first He sends out the Apostles to preach the Gospel Next He confirmes them partly by giuing them the Holy Spirit partly by arming them with power and authoritie But to come to the words Iohn sayes that before He sent them out He said againe to them Peace be vnto you Before at the first meeting with them this was His salutation Peace be vnto you Now He repeates these wordes againe Wherefore is this It was to prepare their heartes to receiue the more reuerently and attentiuely and with the greater comfort these things that Hee was to speake to them concerning their charge to preach in His Name to the world The man that would receiue the word of the Lord especially the Gospell of peace and consolation must haue His heart prepared with the assurance of peace for the message of peace and consolation requires First that the soule be prepared with peace to the end it may receiue the word with peace and joy for except the soule haue some perswasion of peace it can finde no comfort and if we receiue the message of peace with a perswasion of peace and vvith a joy in the soule then the more vvee heare the greater shall our comfort bee the more shall vvee drinke in that joy of the Holy Spirit The messengers of peace should follow this example of the Lord When they are to preach the Gospell of peace they should prepare their heartes that by foretelling that all their message and the worde that they are to speake tendes to peace and likewise they who come to heare shoulde haue their heartes prepared vvith some sense of peace and joye but such a joye as followes vpon sorrow for sinne and a sense of their owne miserie and vvhich euer is accompanied with true Repentance for there is no true joye of a Christian man in this life but that which is conjoyned with Repentance and sorrow for sinne Nowe vvhen the Lorde hath prepared their heartes vvith this preface of peace Hee comes to the Sermon and first Hee giues them a direction to goe out to preach the Gospell As my Father sayes he sent me so send I you Wee haue spoken some thing alreadie of this sending out of the Apostles in opening vp of the Lordes wordes as they are set downe by Luke and therefore heere I shall be the shorter in speaking of it Yee see the Lorde sets downe this sending of the Apostles by vvay of comparison with His owne sending I sent you euen as the Father sent mee This comparison importes first that the Sonne only vvas sent immediatly by the Father the Sonne only hath gotten this honour to be sent immediatly by the Father The Apostle sayes Christ tooke not this honour to Himselfe to bee High Priest but Hee that saide vnto Him Thou art My Sonne this day haue I begotten Thee gaue it Him Heb. 5.5 And the Father by sending the Sonne immediatly Himselfe gaue Him all power to send all others so that all others are sent by the Sonne albeit not all after one manner for some are sent by Him immediatly as the Prophets Apostles some mediatly as the Pastors the Teachers Indeede I grant The Prophets and Apostles were sent also by the Father but they were sent mediatly by the Father immediatly by the Sonne therefore Paul vses to call Himselfe The Apostle of Jesus Christ by the will of God the Father whereby he meanes that immediatly he was sent by the Sonne mediatly by the Father the Sonne sent the Prophets and Apostles immediatly therefore it is said when He ascended vp to Heauen He gaue some to be Apostles and some to be Prophets Eph. 4.11 Next this comparison importes that the office of the Apostleship is not only lawful but also that it is furnished with authority for Christ who sent His Apostles was first sent by His Father not only had Hee a lawful calling but He had it with authority euen so all true Pastors Teachers in the Church haue not only a lawful calling to preach the Gospell but also authoritie joyned with their calling because they are sent by the Sonne for it was the Sonne that gaue some to be Pastors some Teachers Eph 4.11 for albeit true Pastors in y e Church be called by y e ministerie of mē yet they are sent by the Son therfore men haue their authoritie frō Him for in a maner they represent His person as the Son represented the person of His Father was His ambassadour to the worlde so they are ambassadours of the Sonne and must represent His person Men in this Lande despise the Ministers of the Gospell and count most vilely of them in respect of the basenesse of their persons but they shoulde consider it is not with men but with God Christ Himselfe whose ambassadours they are that they haue adoe the obedience or disobedience and contempt of the Pastour redounds directly to the Sonne and the Father and the Sonne counts it to be done to Himselfe and to the Father for He sayes He that heares you heares me and he that despises you despises me and he that despises me despises Him that sent me Luke 10.15 Thirdly this comparison lets vs see who they are that haue a lawfull calling in the Church not euery one that hath a pretence and shew of outwarde calling but only they vvho are called by them vvho vvere sent themselues before And therefore these only are lawfull Pastours who haue bene called by the Presbyterie and fellowship of the Elders who themselues before had a lawfull calling The people and flocke haue no power to call a man to the Ministerie they may indeede nominate and present a man and giue their consent but the calling and admission of a man to the function of the Ministerie belonges only to the Eldership and
Pastours vvho before vvere called themselues But to goe forward When He hath charged them to goe out to preach the Gospell because it was a very weightie and painfull charge therefore He encourages and strengthenes them the more willingly to vndertake it First by bestowing vpon them the Holy Spirit and His graces Next by arming them with power and authoritie To come to the first it is said When Hee had saide this Hee breathed on them and saide vnto them Receiue the Holy Ghost In giuing to them the Holy Spirit He vses an outward and visible signe Hee breathes vpon them for this breathing vpon them was not the sending and giuing of the Holy Spirit it selfe but it was an outward signe and Sacrament to represent to signifie and assure them of the giuing of the Holy Spirit the outward breathing vpon them was a signe of the inward breathing of the Holy Spirit vpon their soules and a signe verie fit and conuenient to expresse the thing signified for the wind serues very well to represent the Holy Spirit and is vsed for that same purpose by the Lorde Himselfe Ioh. 3 8. Thâ— wind blâ—wes where it listeth c. But it would be marked that the Lord vses not only the bare and naked signe No that could haue profited them very litle but to the signe He joynes words telling the meaning of it He sayes Receiue the Holy Ghost For the Lorde in all Sacraments vses commonly to joyne the word to the Sacrament As in Baptisme and the Lords Supper to the end that not only Hee may declare and open vp the meaning of the signe but also to worke and confirme Faith in mens heartes that so the Sacrament may be powerfull and effectuall in them for the outward signe alone is not able to worke Faith in the soule but it is the word chiefly that workes Faith the worde is the life of the Sacrament and therefore except the word be joyned with the outward signe it cannot bee a true and effectuall Sacrament Nowe it is to be considered that this breathing of the Lord vpon His Apostles was not a thing that Hee would haue to bee kept ordinarily in His Church but it is an extraordinarie signe vsed extraordinarily by the Lorde in the sending out of extraordinarie men the Apostles to an extraordinary calling whereby the Lord at that time endued them with extraordinarie graces necessarie for that great calling And therefore foolish and damnable is the practise of the Pope his Cardinalls and his Bishops which they vse in sending out their shauelings into the world for when they admit them with their vile and stinking mouths they breath vpon them and say Receiue the Holy Ghost filthily abusing this action of the Lord as if it lay in their hands with their breathing to giue the Holy Spirit whereas the Lord hath reserued this power to Himselfe alone and communicates it not to any man they are but counterfaiters of such things as the Lord will not haue to bee counterfeited for this His action in all pointes was extraordinarie and therefore ought not to be vsed ordinarily but I leaue them to their owne vanitie A question may bee heere mooued How agrees this doing of Christ on His Disciples and giuing them the Holy Ghost recorded here by Iohn with the wordes that we heard before out of the Gospell of Luke where the Lord sayes Beholde I doe send the promise of my Father vpon you but tarie in Ierusalem vntill ye be endued with power from on high Which wordes importe that at this fift appearing to His Disciples which is one with this that John recordes He gaue them not the Holy Ghost but only promised to send Hâ—m to them I answere Both these places agree well enough together for in Luke the Lord promised to send His Spirit with His graces in a full measure vpon them which promise indeed hee performed on the daye of the Pentecosts when they beeing gathered together there appeared vnto them clouen tongues like fiâ—e and sate vpon each one of them and they were all miraculously filled with the Holy Ghost Act. 2.1 But the Lord heere only giues them the Holy Ghost and His graces in a small measure to be as it were a beginning of that full accomplishment which they were to receiue in the daye of the Pentecoste for wee may not thinke that the Holie Spirit and all His graces were giuen fully and compleetely to the Apostles at one time No but they were giuen piece and piece by degrees for first they got the fruites of the Spirit when the Lorde was conuersant with them in the flesh in the dayes of His infirmitie Next after He rose from the death they receiued them in a greater measure as we may see in this place of Iohn and last after the Lordes ascension Hee powred downe in abundance His Spirit with all His graces according as He had promised to them Luke 24.49 and was long before foretolde by Ioel Chap. 2. verse 28. But why would Hee not giue them the Holy Spirit and His graces in a full measure at the first Because there behooued to be a certaine proportion and correspondence betweene the Head and the members the Lord Iesus was their Head they were members of His body so long as He was not fully glorified Himselfe it was no reason that they should haue receiued the fulnesse of grace but when He was fully glorified He filled them abundantly with grace Ephes 4.10 The Lord now glorified in the Heauens hath store and abundance of grace to giue to His Church but our heartes are not prepared to receiue grace wee offend Him continually with our sinnes and grieue His Holy Spirit for this is the last age of the world wherein sinne aboundes and thâ—refore that vve are not so skant of grace the fault is not in the Lorde there is no scarcitie nor want of grace with Him but the fault is in our selues who entertaine sinne in our heartes whereby wee banish grace out of them and makes the Spirit who should be our Comforter to be a witnesse against vs in that great day of the Lord. Now after that the Lord hath encouraged His Apostles by giuing them His Holy Spirit and His graces in the words following to make them the more willing He armes them with power and auâ—hoâ—itie before He send them out He sayes Whosoeuer siâ—nes ye remit thâ—y are remitted vnto them and whosoeuer sinnes ye retaine they are reteined As if Hee had said to them I will not send you out powerlesse with a fectlesse worde in your mouth but to the end ye may the better discharge your commission I enarme you with power I will giue you power to binde and loose to forgiue sinnes and retaine sinnes The Lord sendes none out to his warfare till first Hee furnish them with weapons and armour But what weapons are they Euen spirituall weapons Paul sayes The weapons of our warfare are not carnall but mightie through
he hath a speciall warrand from the Iudge otherwise hee cannot haue a good conscience in his intimation then how shall the Pastour knowe Gods sentence pronounced in Heauen that hee may haue a good conscience in his proceeding To this I answere It is true indeede the Pastour hath none extraordinarie reuelation of that sentence vvhich is past in Heauen but all the warrand that the Pastour hath is ordinary wrought by the Spirit accompanying His own word vvhich He left in vvrite vnto vs and the Pastour gets this vvarrand out of the vvord by the applying of the generall sentences of the vvorde to particular persons according as they finde their disposition and behauiour and by this meanes gets such a sufficient warrand out of the vvorde as his conscience may rest vpon As for example to speake first of the sentence of the Remission of sinnes Before the Pastour absolue a man and remit his sinnes he lookes first to the generall sentences set downe in the worde that may be his warrand as namely that sentence which the LORD Himselfe vtters Ioh. 3.13 Whosoeuer beleeues in the Sonne of God shall not perish but haue euerlasting life Nowe to Faith in Christ joyne Repentance for the Gospell joynes Repentance and Remission of sinnes together Luke 24.47 and sayes Whosoeuer beleeues and repents shall be safe To this generall proposition the Pastour will assume particularly This sinner repents and beleeues whereupon he concludes declaring the sentence that is alreadie past of Him in the Heauen therefore this sinner hath his sinnes forgiuen him and he shall be saued Againe before the Pastour binde a man and retaine his sinnes hee lookes to this generall sentence of the worde Hee that beleeues not and repents not is alreadie condemned Ioh. 3.18 Then he assumes particularly But this sinner beleeues not neither repents whereupon hee concludes the declaration of the sentence which is alreadie past in Heauen Therefore this sinner is condemned and is bound in Heauen The Lord worke in our heartes true repentance and Faith in the Lorde Iesus that not only wee may heare the voyce of the Pastour absoluing vs but likewise our owne consciences may assure vs of the Remission of our sinnes through the mercie of God in Iesus Christ To whome with the Father and the Holy Spirit bee all praise and honour for euermore AMEN THE XLVI LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST IHON CHAP. XX. verse 24 But Thomas one of the twelue called Didimus was not with them when Iesus came verse 25 The other Disciples therefore saide vnto him Wee haue seene the Lord but hee saide vnto them Except I see in His handes the print of the nayles and put my finger into the print of the nayles and put mine hand into His side I will not beleeue it verse 26 And eight dayes after againe His Disciples were within and Thomas with them Then came Iesus when the doores were shut and stood in the middes and saide Peace be vnto you WEE haue heard hitherto Welbeloued in Christ of fiue sundrie appearings of our Lord after His Resurrection The first was to Marie Magdalene The second was to other women The third was to two Disciples as they were going from Jerusalem to Emmaus The fourth was to Simon Peter The fift was to the eleuen assembled together in one place In this fift appearance the Lord hath a Sermon to His Disciples wherein first He lets them see the necessitie that He should suffer and rise againe and that these thinges behooued to be preached to the world and thereafter giues them a direction to goe out to preach Repentance and Remission of sinnes to the worlde in His Name and to the end He may encourage them the more willingly to vndertake this charge Hee promises to giue them the Holy Spirit with His graces y t was promised before for their further assurance He enters them presently in some measure in possession of the Spirit for Iohn sayes Hee breathed vpon them and saide vnto them Receiue the Holy Ghost and then Hee enarmes them with authoritie and power to forgiue and retaine sinnes And Hee sayes Whosoâ—uer sinâ—es ye remit they are remitted vnto them and whosoeuer sinnes ye retaine thâ—y are retained Now in the words that we haue presently read out of the Gospell of Iohn wee haue set downe a particular Hâ—storie concerning Thomas and his incredulitie this Thomas is he who is also called Didymus we read of him first that he was called and receiued to be one of the twelue Apostles Matth. 10 3. Next we â—ead that hee was offended that the Lord purposed to returne againe to Iudea beeing requestâ—d by Martha and Marie to come to Lazâ—rus their brother and that he burst out in words full of anger aâ—d iâ—dâ—gnation saying Let vs goe also that we may die with Lazarus Ioh 11.16 And last wee haue in this place set downe the Historie not only of his great incredulitie but also of his stubburnesse and wilfulnesse therein for neither did hee beleeue neither had hee a will or purpose to beleeue Of this doing of Thomas we may learne that by nature there was no difference betweene y e Apostles of the Lord Iesus other men albeit moste vile most vnworthie but grace made the difference they were as incredulous as stubburne as hard hearted as any other by nature while it pleased God of His mercie to open their heâ—rtes to make them to bâ—leeue And therefore the Lord Iesus when He calles them to be Apostles and ordaines them to preach the exceeding gâ—eatnesse of His mercy to others He makes them to stand for eâ—samples of that same mercie that they preach to others that they might y e more easily perswade others make them to come to seeke mercie in Iesus This was the ende why the Apostle Paul sayes The Lord shewed mercy on him who was a mâ—serable wreth and had called him to bee an Apost Iesus Christ saies he shâ—wed on me all long suffeâ—ing vnto the ensample of them which shall in time to come beleeue in Him vnto eternall life 1 Tim. 1.16 Thus much concerning the person of Thomas we come next to the Historie of his incredulitie first to the occasion of it the rest of y e Apostles Disciples who were assembled together in one to whom the Lord Iesus had manifested Himselfe declares preaches to Thomas y e ResurrectioÌ„ of Christ y e cause of their preaching thereof to him was because Thomas was absent when the Lord appeared to the rest What was the cause of his absence it is vncertaine neither will we curiously inquire what it was It may be that after Christ His Master was apprehended he kept himselfe close lurked secretly for feare of danger through the malice of the Iewes and durst not manifest himselfe so soone as the rest or it may be that he was entangled with his owne priuate affaires at that time when the rest met together and were speaking of
Christ His ResurrectioÌ„ from the dead Alwayes what euer hath bene the cause of his absence wee may perceiue that he was depriued of that grace and presence of the LORD which the rest who were met together found Whereof we learne this lesson That whosoeuer doe absent themselues from the assembly of the LORDS Sainctes from these holy meetings whereinto the LORD hath promised His owne blessed presence they procure no small skaith and damage to themselues they depriue themselues of some grace and comfort that the LORD ministers to them that meet together What euer be the cause of thine absence it caÌ„not be but hurtfull to thee albeit all causes of absence be not alike hurtfull for if thou be absent by negligence the lesse is thy danger and losse but if wilfully and vpon contempt thou absentest thy selfe then not only depriuest thou thy sâ—lfe of grace and comfort but also thou procurest the wrath of GOD vpon thee for the contempt of His blessed ordinance Therefore if wee would bee partakers of the grace and blessing that the LORD hath promised to these holy assemblies we should postpone our priuate adoes and the cares of the world vnto these Holy exercises and we should embrace that counsell of our Sauiour Seeke first the Kingdome of Heauen and His righteousnesse and all other thinges shall bee ministred vnto you Matth. Chapter 6. verse 33. The man that makes this his first and his chiefe care to seeke the Kingdome of God when he hath gotten it hee will finde by experience that there is nothing necessarie for the sustaining of this present life that shall be inlaking to him It is a foolish thing to be too carefull for these worldly things for if thou seekest first the Kingdome of Heauen all these things will be casteâ— to thee Nowe to come to the preaching of the rest of the Disciples to Thomas it is said The other Disciples said vnto him We haue seene the Lord They preach to Thomas the Lordes Resurrection for the benefite they had receiued themselues in Thomas absence they willingly communicate to him they knewe and they sawe that the Lord was risen they tell this to Thomas as they beleeued so they wished and desired that hee should beleeue also This Example of the Apostles we ought all to followe When the Lorde communicates any spirituall benefite to vs we should not keepe it close to our selues but wee should bee carefull to communicate it to the well of others And thus doing we need not to feare that the grace shall be empaired and grow lesse No by the contrarie this communicating of the grace and vsing of the talent that the LORD hath giuen vs is the hie and readie way to augment the grace and to reape profite of the talent that wee haue receiued Albeit thou hast taken great paines and spent much time with the losse of some worldly goods to attaine to grace yet that should not make thee the more sparing in communicating it to others It is the Lords will that thou giue it to others freely chearfully and liberally Therefore trie and examine whether thou wilt be willing and carefull to communicate to others the grace that God hath giuen thee and if thou findest this then thou hast a good conscience and if thou findest it not thou hast no matter of rejoycing because thou doest not that which the LORD requires at thine hands When the Disciples haue informed Thomas of the Lordes Resurrection looke howe Thomas takes with it What is his part In a word hee beleeues not their report His incredulitie was very vvonderfull for albeit hee vvas compassed vvith such a cloud of witnesses of faithfull witnesses of eye-seeing witnesses yet he beleeues not Apparantly euery one of them who had seene the LORD course by course had tolde him of the LORDES Resurrection and first Marie Magdalene who got this honour first to see the LORD after His Resurrection hath witnessed to Thomas that she saw the LORD and spake with Him Next the other women who did meete with Him as they were returning froÌ„ the graue testifies the same Thirdly the two disciples who were going from Ierusalem to Emmaus informed him that they did meete with Him in the way of the conference they had with Him Fourthly Peter to whoÌ„ also y e Lord had appeared stroue to perswade him and last the whole number of the Apostles and the faithfull there assembled testified with one voyce that they had seene Him and spoken with Him yet Thomas is nothing mooued with all these speeches their witnessing makes not him to beleeue he remaines still in incredulity This example of Thomas telles vs that all the outward meanes that can be vsed all the testimonies of the worlde the testimonies of the most faithfull most godly most wise of the eye-witnesses will not mooue the heart of a man to beleeue will not perswade him of any point of doctrine necessarie to Saluation if there bee no more What then will make a man to beleeue Nothing but the Spirit of IESVS CHRIST it must be He that must witnesse vnto our heartes what is the will of GOD concerning vs it must be Hee that must take away the vale and illuminate our darke soules it must bee Hee that must open our heartes as Hee opened the heart of Lydia and make vs to beleeue If this Holy Spirit of CHRIST bee not present a man will not beleeue his owne eyes his owne senses will not perswade him We sawe the trueth of this before in the rest of the Disciples when the LORD stood in the middes of them when they sawe Him with their eyes when they heard Him speake face to face they beleeued not While as Luke sayes the LORD opened their vnderstanding that they might vnderstand the Scriptures Luke Chapter 24. verse 45. This doctrine would bee well marked because it serues to decide a controuersie that this day is betwixt vs and the Papists The controuersie and question which is betwixt vs and them concerning the chiefe and principall witnesse and judge First of authenticke Scripture Next of true interpretation of particular places of Scripture that is How shall a man knowe that this Scripture that wee haue and wee reade and vse dayly is the very worde of GOD and not the worde of any creature And againe Howe shall a man knowe what is the true meaning of any particular place of Scripture and whether this or that sense of the word is to bee receiued The Papistes affirme that the chiefe and principall witnesse judge both of the one or the other is the Church they say y t we could not be assured that y e Scripture is authenticke y t it is y e very word of God except y e church affirme it so to be likewise they say y t we cannot be assured of y e right meaning of any place of y e Scripture except it be by y e testimonie of y e same Church they teach
that we ought to beleeue that the Scripture is the word of God and that this or that is the true interpretation thereof because the Church sayes so so they make the testimonie of the Church to bee the chiefe and almost the only Argument that should mooue men to beleeue that the Scripture is authenticke and the word of God and that this or that is the true and proper interpretation of any place of Scripture for these are their common speeches The Church is aboue the Scripture the Church is of greater authority than the Scripture without the authority of y e Church no man is obliged to beleeue that y e Scripture is thâ— word of God the Church is y e supreme Iudge of y e right interpretation of the Scripture many such others But by the contrarie Wee affirme that the chiefe and principall Iudge and witnesse both of the Scripture that is the worde of God and also of the true interpretation of the Scripture is the Holy Spirit because He only is able to perswade mens heartes He only is able so to testifie that He can mooue them to beleeue Hee only is able to open the vnderstanding of men to make them to vnderstand and take vp the right meaning of the Scripture Then will the Papist object Yee make the Spirit that is giuen to a priuate man to be the Iudge and witnesse of the authentike Scripture and the interpretation thereof and it is an absurde thing to preferre the Spirit speaking by the authoritie of any priuate man to the authoritie of the Church I answere It followes not that we make the Spirit of a priuate man to bee Iudge either of the one or of the other because we affirme that the Spirit who is Iudge speakes in the Scripture and by the Scripture and by the Scripture as by the moste powerfull and effectuall meane mooues men to beleeue and therefore that this Spirit who is Iudge is not the Spirit of a priuate man but the Spirit of the Scripture it selfe for this Spirit by the Scripture teaches vs that the Scripture is auâ—henticke and that it is the worde of God and againe this same Spirit by the Scripture teaches vs that this or that is the proper meaning of the Scripture for the principall voyce of the Holy Spirit whereby He speakes to vs is the Scripture which this day is to vs in stead of the vine voyce of God Himselfe and ought to bee esteemed and embraced of vs as if God Himselfe spake to vs out of Heauen As for the voyce of the Church when I speake of the Church I meane not the Romane Church for she is but an adulterous Church and falsely clames to her selfe the name of a Church but I speake of the true Church militant it is not the chiefe meane whereby the Holy Spirit vses to perswade men but it is an inferiour meane of lesse importance than the Scripture neither hath it that force to make men to beleeue that the Scripture hath But to leaue this and to returne to the incredulitie of Thomas not only he beleeues not but hee vtters great stubburnesse in refusing to beleeue not only was hee incredulous but also malitious neither did hee beleeue neither was he willing to beleeue for he sayes Except I see in His handes the print of the nailes and put my finger in the print of the nailes and put mine hande into His side I will not beleeue it he would not beleeue except hee sawe Him except hee saw His hands and His feete except hee saw the print of the nailes where with His hands and His feete were pierced and except he had put his hand in the wound of His side which one of the souldiers had pierced with a speare We may heere see his stubburnesse and obstinacie that was joyned with his incredulitie incredulitie is commonly accompanied with obstinacie and stubburnesse in such sort that when the way is laide before vs and the doore opened whereby vvâ—e may escape out of this bondage of sinne and thraldome of darknesse wherein wee are kept captiues yet wee refuse to goe out of that bondage and rather striues more and more to thrall our selues to sinne and to holde our selues in the bands of darknesse This contumacie and stubburnesse in sinne is that poyson and that gall of bitternesse that Sathan hath spued into the heartes of all the children of Adam and this is that band of iniquitie whereby as by a strong chaine we are ledde boâ—nd as miserable catiues vnto eternall condemnation except we be relieued from it by the mercie of God in Iesus Christ Peter perceiuing the impietie and deuilish practises of Simon Magus he takes vp this to be the ground and fountaine of all when he sayes I see that thou art in the gall of bitternesse and in the bands of iniquitie The Lord saue vs and free vs from this miserable bondage wherein we are by nature yet if we consider more narrowly the wordes of Thomas we shall finde that not only was hee incredulous not only was hee stubburne but also proud and arrogant and contemned and despised all the rest in respect of himselfe esteeming himselfe onely to bee wise and the rest to be fooles scorning their witnessing and report as a fable not worthie of credite and a vaine dreame An incredulous man that beleeueth not the trueth is not only stubburne and obstinate in his incredulitie but also he swelles in pride and seemes in his owne conceite to be only wise contemning others as fooles hee will count the preaching of the Crosse of Christ and of His Resurrection to bee but plaine follie hee will count them that beleeue the doctrine of the Crosse and Resurrection of Christ to be fantasticke and doated fooles and yet in very deede of all the fooles of the worlde they themselues are the greatest although they bee counted wonders in the worlde for their naturall wisdome Therefore the Apostle sayes in the first Epistle to the Corinthians the third Chapter and the eighteenth verse If any man amongst you seeme to bee wise in this world let him bee a foole that hee may be wise hee sayes not if any man among you be wise for he that hath not the wisdome of God and is not wise in Christ he hath no wisdome he is but a very foole but hee sayes If any man seeme to bee wise in this worlde let him bee a foole that hee may be wise that is let him renounce and forsake all carnall and worldly wisdome which is enimitie against God Rom. Chapter 8. verse 7. and can no more stand with the wisdome of GOD than darknesse with light yet it would be marked that Thomas sayes not simply and absolutely that in no câ—ce he would beleeue that Christ was risen againe but hee sayes Except I see in His handes the print of the nailes c. The wordes are conditionall importing that in some cace and vpon some conditions hee would
beleeue There are two sortes of contumacie and stubburnesse in sinne and vnbeliefe the one is conditionall and such vvas the vnbeliefe of Thomas the other sort is absolute vvithout any condition vvhen in no case vpon no cause nor vvarrand vvill beleeue and of this sort vvas the sinne and vnbeliefe of the Priestes and the Pharises for vvhen the souldiers that vvere appointed to keepe and guarde the sepulchre came in to the towne and tolde them that IESVS CHRIST vvas risen out of the graue not only did they not beleeue but also they stroue to keepe themselues in such vnbeliefe and hardnes of heart that in no cace nor condition they vvould suffer themselues to bee reformed so they deteined the vvord of GOD into vnrighteousnesse There is a great difference betweene these two sortes of vnbeliefe The first sort may obtaine mercie Thomas obteined mercie the LORD pardoned his vnbeliefe The other sort verie hardly can obtaine mercie the Priestes and the Pharises found no mercie their vnbeliefe vvas laide to their charge the LORD forgaue them not but as they remained in vnbeliefe so they perished in their infidelitie The LORD saue vs from this cursed sinne of vnbeliefe and infidelitie and namely from this absolute vnbeliefe that in no cace vvill suffer reformation for through processe of time it brings on this sinne against y e Holy Ghost which neuer will be forgiuen neither in this world nor in y e world to come Now last ere I leaue these words of Thomas we may see what is y e grouÌ„d fountaine of this vnbeliefe obstinacie and pride of Thomas the grouÌ„d of all was he leaned too much to his grosse bodily senses to his seeing feeling handling he makes his eyes his hand to be y e ground of his faith Thomas indeede failed not in this that he desired to see y e Lord with his eyes to handle him with his hands for ye heard before how y e Lord by y e sight of the eyes y e feeling of Him with their hands perswaded y e Apostles of the certaintie of His ResurrectioÌ„ Luke 24.39 likewise we see that y e Lord hauing regarde to y e infirmitie of His owne pitying the weaknesse of their faith dayly in y e Sacrament teaches them by y e outward senses as by the seeing tasting handling of y e Elements But herein Thomas sailed that he addicted tied himselfe so to his senses to his sight to his handling that he affirmed professed plainly except he saw him with his eyes handled him with his hands he would neuer beleeue that y e Lord was risen againe from the death notwithstanding of the witnessing of so many so godly so faithfull persons who euery one after another testified of the Lords Resurrection Then marke it Bâ—ethren It is not vnlawfull for a man to desire to see the Lorde euen with his bodily eyes No that desire is lawfull and acceptable to God for all the Sainctes that euer haue beene since the beginning of the world desired to see our LORD face to face Manie Kings and Prophets haue desired to see Him and yet sawe Him not Luke Chapter 10. verses 23.24 Abraham the father of the faithfull desiâ—ed to see Him and olde Simeon who got a reuelation that hee should not depart while he saw the LORD earnestly waited and thirsted for to see Him Luke 2 25. So that it is a lawfull and acceptable thing to desire to see the Lord. But in desiring to see Him we must beware that our faith be not so tied to the outward senses that we refuse altogether to beleeue except wee see the Lorde with our eyes and handle Him with our hands No I say more thou must be so farre from tying thy Faith to the outward senses that thou must not tie it to the very inward feeling of the soule thou must not say except I ay feele I will no wise beleeue for albeit that at all times thou haue not a feeling findest not grace into thy soule albeit thou findest not the Holy Spirite who is the earnest pennie of thy saluation to be presently working within thee and sealing vp thine adoption yet thou art obliged to relie and depend vpon the bare word and naked promise of God and so to seale in thy soule that the Lord is true for he hath made a verie small progresse in Faith that will not trust in GOD and depend vpon His naked worde except ay hee haue some feeling of grace of joy of comfort and of the Holy Ghost The Sainctes of God many times vvhen they had no feeling depended vpon the worde of promise and waited vpon the accomplishment of it Job when he felt not the Lords fauour but conceiued that the Lord was angrie with him he sayes Although thou slayest me yet will I trust in thee Iob 13.15 And Abraham when hee saw none appearance that the Lords promise concerning his seed could be performed yet it is said of him That aboue Hope hee beleeued vnder Hope Rom. 4.18 Likewise Dauid vvhen he vvas in great danger of his enemies and sawe litle appearance of deliuerie still trusted in God and depended vpon His promise for he sayes I will reioyce in God because of His word I trust in God and will not feare what flesh can doe vnto me Psal 56.4 It may be that the Lord exercise thee with the conscience of sinne and with the terrours of His vvrath in such sort that thou findest no sense of grace nor of His fauour yet in this case despare not but by the example of the Sainctes learne to depend vpon the worde and promise of God till thou findest the performance of it to the comfort of thy soule Now to goe forwarde and to end shortly After that the Euangelist hath set downe after this manner as ye haue heard the historie of the incredulitie of Thomas hee comes to another appearing of the Lorde after His Resurrection which is the sixt in number for of fiue wee haue heard alreadie and this appearing seemes chiefly to bee for Thomas cause The time of this appearing is noted It was eight dayes after that is from that day in the which Thomas had plainely professed that hee would neuer beleeue that the Lord was risen except that both hee sawe Him and felt Him and His wounds and it was the eight day likewise after the Lords Resurrection for the former fiue appearings of the Lord whereof we haue alreadie spoken were al vpon the first day in the which the Lord rose from the dead So ye see that Thomas the space of whole eight dayes interueening remained in incredulitie vnbeliefe This example of Thomas le ts vs see what is the disposition of the soule of a man after he hath committed a sinne against the Majestie of God after he hath once sinned he is wrapped vp in a senslesse securitie hee sleepes sound in his sinne there is a vale casten ouer the
eyes of his soule that he cannot see sinne in its own colour hee cannot consider the way wherein hee is walking nor the judgement which he is drawing on his own head Whereupon it falles out that he proceedes from sinne to sinne and either hee falles ouer againe in that same sinne which before hee hath committed or in some other sinne Wee haue a proofe of this in the person of Peter for after that once he had denied his Master hee slept in a senslesse securitie he made litle account of the great sinne hee had committed whereupon it came to passe that soone after he falles ouer againe in the same sinne of denying of the Lord and alitle after being demanded he denies Him the third time and if he had bene oftener demanded no doubt but he would haue denied Him oftener if the Lorde had not looked vpon him fauourably The like also wee see in Dauid albeit otherwise a man after Gods owne heart after that he had committed that foule adultery with Bathsheba the wife of Vriah hee is twitched with a griefe or remorse but lyes still sleeping securely in sinne and so from adulterie with Bathsheba hee falles in abhominable murther of Vriah her husband and after this hee continued for a long season as it were benummed and without a sense of his sinne or feare of judgement and as all sortes of sinne leaue some senslessenesse and induration in the heart so chiefly stubburnesse and contumacie in not beleeuing the knowne trueth of God brings greatest senselessenesse and induration An example of this Paul lets vs see in the Gentiles who followed not that light that the Lord had left in nature and which the Lord shew to them in the workes of His creation that they might glorifie God but repined against it and therefore sayes the Apostle As they regarded not to acknowledge God euen so God deliuered them vp vnto a reprobate minde to doe those thinges which were not conuenient Rom. 1.28 Because they would not glorifie God as became them to doe there was such a dimnesse in their eyes such senslessenesse and blindnesse ouertooke them that they regarded not to doe the thinges that were most vnnaturall They past all feeling and gaue themselues ouer vnto wantonnesse to worke all vncleannesse euen with greedines Eph. 4.19 And they had their consciences burned as it were with an hote iron 1. Timoth. 4.2 It is a dangerous thing once to fall in sinne for if the Lord leaue thee to thy selfe thou shalt neuer stay while thou râ—nne headlong to destruction Therefore pray continually that the Lord would looke fauourably vpon thee and that He would lay holde on thee that thou fall not away from Him and if thou haue fallen that Hee would put out His hand and draw thee to Him againe that thou mayest returne and be saued Thus for the time of the sixt appearing of the Lord now He appeares after y e same maner that He had appeared to the Disciples before For the Disciples beeing within and Thomas with them Iesus came the doores beeing shut and stood in the middes Of this manner of appearing we haue spoken at length before therefore we will speake no more of it When He is come in among them He vses that same forme of salutation which He vsed before for He said Peace be vnto you We passe by this salutation also because wee haue spoken of it already No question it was a very effectuall powerfull salutation because Hee that wished peace vnto them was the author of peace Only one thing I shall marke and so I shall ende I see there is nothing that is able to waken the soule of a sinner that is lying sleeping in sinne and wrapped vp in a senslâ—sse securitie but only the gracious presence of the Lord Iesus What was it that wakened Peter when he had thrise denied his Master It is said The Lord turned backe and looked vpon Peter whereupon immediatly his heart smote him and hee went out and wept bitterly Luke 22.61 62. How was Dauid wakened when he had long lien in his sinne without any remorse How but by the fauour of Iesus Christ the Sonne of God who pitied Him and sent His Prophet Nathan vnto him for this yee must vnderstand that all the Prophets which spake of olde to the Fathers were sent immediatly by Iesus Christ and spake by His Spirit 1. Pet. 1.11 and 3.19 And what was it that wakened Thomas out of his securitie What mooued him that was so obstinate in his incredulitie to beleeue What but the gracious presence of Christ for except that mercie of God in Iesus Christ waken vs out of securitie all the Iudgements of God that euer He hath powred out vpon any from the beginning will not mooue vs the most fearfull and terrible examples of His wrath vpoÌ„ others will not waken vs. Iudas lets vs see the proofe of this in his Epistle when he tells that they who turned the grace of God into wantonnes were not mooued to absteine from sinne by the example of that fearfull and terrible Iudgement of God which ouertooke Sodome and Gomorrhe and the cities about them but that they likewise notwithstanding of these great Iudgements continued in the like sinnes and defiled the flesh Iude 7 8. Then seeing we are naturally sleeping in sinne and none outward thing in the worlde no judgement neither temporall nor spirituall seazing on vs in neuer so high a measure can bee able to waken vs. Let vs pray earnestly that the LORD would preuent vs with His owne gracious presence that wee sleepe not while death oppresse vs. The Lord make euery one of vs to finde this presence of the LORD Iesus To whome with the Father and the Holy Spirit be all praise and honour for euermore AMEN THE XLVII LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST LVKE CHAP. XXIIII verse 27 After said He to Thomas Put thy finger here and see Mine hands and put foorth thine hande and put it into my side and be not faithlesse but faithfull verse 28 Then Thomas saide vnto Him Thou art my Lord and my God verse 29 Iesus saide vnto him Thomas because thou hast seene me thou beleeuest blessed are they that haue not seene and haue beleeued verse 30 And many other signes also did Iesus in the presence of His Disciples which are not written in this booke verse 31 But these thinges are written that ye might beleeue that Iesus is that Christ that Sonne of God and that in beleeuing yee might haue life through His Name AFTER that we had spoken at length Well beloued in Christ of the first fiue appearings of the Lord after His Resurrection wee beganne the last day to speake of this sixt appearing the occasion whereof was premitted by y e Euangelist John to wit the absence of Thomas from the rest of the Apostles when the Lord appeared vnto them and his great incredulitie when they tolde him for notwithstanding that many faithfull witnesses
he came to himselfe bethought himselfe for it is a wonder to see howe soone the soule of the most obstinate and indured man will be turned when it pleases the Lord to be effectuall in it by His presence The rest of the Apostles beleeued not so soone as they sawe the Lord heard His voyce albeit their incredulitie was not so great as was the incredulitie of Thomas yet when it pleased the Lord to open their eyes and to illuminate their vnderstanding they beleeued And Thomas vvho by many degrees surpassed all the rest in incredulitie after that once he saw the Lord and heard Him incontinently he beleeued and gaue a notable confession of Him Then marke it Brethren Faith dependes not on our selues on the strength of our nature on the free wil of man or vpon such such disposition of the soule but it dependes vpon the free mercie and good pleasure of God It is not in him that willeth nor in him that runneth but in GOD that sheweth mercie Rom. Chapter 9. verse 16. Therefore when wee see any beliefe in CHRIST let vs euer giue the praise thereof to GOD and not to the man as if it were of his naturall strength power and inclination But let vs consider this confession of Thomas and the grounds vvhereupon it arises he sayes Thou art my LORD and my GOD. This confession that hee giues of the LORD proceedes from a cleare light whereby his minde was suddenly illuminated and that by the powerfull and effectuall presence of the LORD his minde was first illuminated to see CHRIST to be the LORD as He is man for CHRIST as Hee is man is LORD ouer all thereafter to see Christ as He is GOD for by the vaile of the flesh and of the nature of man Hee is led in and gets accesse to see the fulnesse of the Godhead dwelling in Him bodily Next this confession proceedes frō the apprehension of the heart whereby it felt the Lord and tooke holde of Him for as that cleare light shined in his minde so also the heart of Thomas was opened to embrace the Lord and to draw Him in to himselfe and therefore hee calles Him not simply Lord but my Lord he stiles Him not simply God but my God For no question this plaine and cleare confession testifies that there was a cleare illumination in the minde and a full perswasion in the heart of Thomas of that which he confessed If wee compare Thomas with the rest of the Apostles wee will finde that as he surpassed them farre in vnbeliefe so he surpasses them farre in beleeuing and confessing of the LORD for such a confession hath not beene hitherto vttered by any of the Disciples so that in this example we may see verified that common saying The last shall be first and the first shall be last The rest of the Apostles were before Thomas in Faith they beleeued before him but nowe Thomas by a suddaine change runnes out before them hee hath a clearer sight and a greater measure of Faith than they had The rest of the Apostles had the Holy Spirit giuen them and that strengthened their Faith but Thomas who then was absent after that once hee see and heare the Lord he findes such a cleare and marueilous light in his soule that hee vtters a more glorious and notable confession than any of the rest had done before And this likewise teaches vs to ascribe the praise of all the benefites and graces that is in man to the grace and mercie of GOD who distributes to euery man according to the good pleasure of His will that which Hee thinkes meete for as was said before It is not in him that runneth nor in him that willeth but in God that sheweth mercie This sudden change and notable confession which Thomas giues of the LORD teaches vs yet further that there was some sponkes of grace and of spirituall desire left into the soule of Thomas to see the LORD and to enjoy His presence for except there had bene some piece of desire to haue seene Him how could hee vpon a suddaintie haue embraced Him so willingly and joyfully as one long desired and looked for For the wordes of Thomas importe first that hee had great sorrowe and sadnesse in His soule because as hee thought hee had lost the LORD Next that hee had a desire to finde Him and to see Him againe And thirdly that hee had an exceeding great joy when he found Him and by his expectation saw Him and enjoyed His presence This serues for thy comfort who hast gotten a measure of grace albeit the corruptions and infirmities of the flesh striue to drowne and smoother and suffocate it yet neuer shall it altogether be abolished and extinguished but at last it shall wrestle out and preuaile and ouercome the corruption Now to come forward to the LORDES replie to Thomas Hee answeres him Thomas because thou hast seene thou beleeuest blessed are they which haue not seene and haue beleeued Hee sayes not because thou hast touched Mee but because thou hast seene Me. So in my judgement Thomas touched not the Lord but contented himselfe with the seeing of the LORD and hearing of His voyce Hee acknowledges the Faith of Thomas but Hee extetenuates it in comparison of others Hee praises not Thomas for His Faith because hee tied his faith to his senses Hee beleeued because hee sawe Him but Hee praises and commends the Faith of others who no counting of the outwarde sense should beleeue in Him albeit they saw Him not Albeit Hee acknowledges the Faith of Thomas Hee calles him not blessed for it but Hee pronounces them to be blessed who haue not seene Him and yet doe beleeue These wordes of the LORD to Thomas le ts vs see that the case and condition of them who beleeue without seeing is nothing worse nor inferiour to the case and condition of them who haue not seene the LORD and vpon sight haue beleeued We this day who haue not seene the LORD face to face but only haue heard His worde and beleeue are nothing inferiour to them who sawe Him and beleeued and namely to Thomas who would not beleeue except he saw the LORD and if there were no more to assure thee who hast not seene the LORD IESVS and yet beleeuest that thou art blessed this joy that thou shalt finde in the middes of thy greatest sorrow and affliction might be a sufficient argument to perswade thee for Peter sayes The Godly in the middes of their affliction beleeuing in Christ whome they haue not seene reioyce with a ioy vnspeakable and glorious 1. Pet. Chapter 1. verse 8. Indeede in this life the blessed estate of them who beleeue in Christ is neither clearly seene by others neither is it throughly felt by themselues for it is not seene what wee shall be and heere only haue wee the first fruites of the Spirite and a foretasting of these things that shall bee reueiled but in that
thou wilt and as long as thou wilt neuer shalt thou get any other true miracle from God except only this miraculous and wonderfull effect that the Gospell workes in bringing foorth in our heartes this true and justifying Faith in renewing vs and in beginning that life eternall in our soules for the faithfull finde by experience that this Gospell of Christ is the power of God vnto saluation to them that beleeue If thou be not content with this marueilous effect but wilt goe on to seeke outwaâ—d signes and miracles thou declarest plainely to the worlde that thou neuer didst finde this powerfull effect of the Gospell into thy soule and if thou findest not this powerfull effect to bee wrought into thy soule by the preaching of the word and by the miracles that were wrought by the Lord Iesus and His Apostles thou wilt neuer beleeue albeit thou sawest ten thousand new miracles wrought before thine eyes Now we tolde you before that both the worde and doctrine and likewise the miracles were written by the speciall will direction of Christ but there is a difference betweene their writting for all the doctrine of Christ that is necessarie to life and saluation in substance not so much as a sentence excepted is set downe in write the Holy Spirit He omitted nothing But all the miracles that the Lord wrought are not set downe in write for it was necessarie for our Faith that y e substance of the whole doctrine should be set down in write but it was not necessary for our Faith that all y e miracles which He wrought should be writteÌ„ Our Faith required the one but our Faith required not the other for the Lord in writting and registrating of His word and miracles had not respect vnto the curiositie of vaine man which is vnsatiable and can neuer be satisfied but Hee had regarde to the Faith and Saluation of man and therefore Hee set downe these things in write which were sufficient and necessarie for Faith and Saluation Our Faith and Saluation was the rule and measure of the Lords reuelation and not the curiositie of vaine man Now if all things are written that are necessarie to life and Saluation then thou who is not content with these thinges but seekest other thinges and claimes vnto vnwritten verities which are the fantasies of mens braine and cry for new miracles What can any man thinke that that thou art doing but seeking something aboue and beyond eternall Life and Saluation thou seekest but fantasies that thine owne head conceiteth Indeede vaine Papist if thine vnderstanding were capable and if thy faith were able to comprehend all these thinges all the doctrine and miracles that are written in the Olde and New Testament thou wouldest haue some shew of reason to require more to clame to vnwritten verities and to desire moe miracles and I would the more willingly giue thee leaue to require them But seeing such is the weaknesse and infirmitie of thy Faith and vnderstanding that thou art not able to comprehend these same things that are written which farre surpasses the capacitie and vnderstanding of man why shouldest thou miserable wretch deuise other thinges to thy selfe Why goest thou about to clout and clamp to the word of God which so long as we liue in this worlde we are not able fully to attaine to the dreames and fantasies which thou hast forged in thine owne braine Now to end shortly The Euangelist in setting downe the ende wherefore these miracles were left in write which is that we might beleeue in Christ and get life through Him lets vs see what are the things that chiefly we ought to beleeue of Christ These things sayes he are written that yee might beleeue that Christ is that Sonne of God These wordes comprehend summarily the substance of all these things that are necessarie to be beleeued of Iesus we must beleeue in Iesus euen that Iesus who was borne of the Virgine Marie who walked in Iudea and was conuersant among the Jewes And what must we beleeue of Him These words tell vs we must beleeue two thinges of Him First that Hee is That Christ Next that Hee is That Sonne of God The first respecteth His office the next respecteth His person By reason of His office Hee is called That Christ because He is annointed of God the Father to bee our King Priest and Prophet for these three sortes of persons Kings Priestes and Prophets vsed to bee annointed in the Olde Testament In respect of His person wee must beleeue that He is That Sonne of God for as Christ is GOD and the Sonne of GOD properly Hee is a person euen the second person of the Trinitie The nature of man that Hee assumed makes not vp a part of His person but was only assumed to the diuine person and was so straitly conjoyned and vnited to the person of the Sonne that whole Christ GOD and man is called but one person Now looke what benefit we receiue by beleeuing these things of Iesus He sayes In beleuing we haue life through His Name How comes this that Faith in Iesus we get life First we flie as it were mount aboue while wee come vnto CHRIST and take holde of Him For where the Carioun is thither will the Eagles resort Next when wee haue honoured Him so that wee count nothing of our selues while we rest in Him by Faith then through our Faith as a conduit He conuoyes life into our soules and that not an euanishing life but Eternall life and this life is the life of God So this life thâ—t we liue here by Faith flowes first from the Sonne of God and from Iesus as He is God then it comes to vs from the Sonne of God as He is Christ and annointed our King Priest and Prophet for first as He was annointed to be our Priest by His death and sacrifice vpon the Crosse Hee merited life vnto vs thereafter as Hee was annointed to be our King and Prophet Hee applies powerfully and effectually vnto vs the benefites which as our Priest Hee merited vnto vs by His death for as He is our Prophet He applies them to vs by His teaching as He is our King He appliets them to vs by working powerfully and effectually into vs by His Spirit Now we see what we ought to beleeue of Iesus what gaine we receiue by this Faith the gaine is very great but the meanes to come by it lyes not in our hands wee are not able by our owne free will or by the strength of Nature to beleeue flesh and blood cannot teach vs this Faith for as it is true which Paul sayes No man can say that Iesus is the Lord but by the Holy Ghost 1. Cor. Chapter 12. verse 3. So none can beleeue that Iesus is that Christ and that Sonne of GOD but by the same Holy Ghost as the LORDE Himselfe tolde Peter after that Hee had confessed that Hee was the CHRIST the Sonne of the
liuing GOD for Hee sayes vnto him Blessed art thou Simon the sonne of Iona for neither flesh nor blood hath reueiled that vnto thee but my Father which is in Heauen Matth. Chapter 16. verse 17. And therefore we must craue continually of the LORD that Hee would vouchsafe His Spirite on vs to worke Faith in our soules that beleeuing in IESVS CHRIST wee may get life and Saluation through Him To whome with the Father and the Holy Spirit be all honour and praise for euermore AMEN THE XLVIII LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST IHON CHAP. XXI AFter these thinges Jesus shewed Himselfe againe to His Disciples at the sea of Tiberias and thus shewed He Himselfe verse 2 There were together Simon Peter and Thomas which is called Didymus and Nathanael of Cana in Galile and the sonnes of Zebedeus and two other of His disciples verse 3 Simon Peter saide vnto Him I goe a fishing They saide vnto him Wee also will goe with thee They went their way and entred into a shippe straightway and that night caught they nothing verse 4 But when the morning was nowe come Iesus stood on the shore neuerthelesse the Disciples knew not that it was Jesus verse 5 Iesus then saide vnto them Sirs haue yee any meate They answered Him No. verse 6 Then Hee saide vnto them Cast out the net on the right side of the ship and ye shall finde So they cast out and they were not able at all to draw it for the multitude of fishes verse 7 Therefore saide the Disciple whome Iesus loued vnto Peter It is the Lord. When Simon Peter heard that it was the Lord hee girded his coate to him for he was naked and cast himselfe into the sea WEE continue as yet Brethren Beloued in Christ in the Historie of Christs appearings after His Resurrection whereof this which we haue set downe in the beginning of the 21. Chapter of Iohn is the seuenth if wee reckone precisely all the particular appearings whereof any mention is made in the Gospel But if we count only the appearings vnto His Apostles assembled together this is the third in number as the Euangelist himselfe hereafter telles In the first two appearings He manifested Himselfe vnto the eleuen beeing assembled together in an house the doores beeing closed only Thomas was absent in the first appearing nowe heere Hee appeares only vnto seuen beeing together not in an house but without at the fishing As concerning the particular time of this appearing what day it was from the first daye of His Resurrection or howe many dayes it was from His last appearing vnto them it is not particularly set downe and therefore we will passe by it but the Euangelist markes particularly the place of this appearing for he sayes Iesus shewed Himselfe againe at the sea of Tiberias which sea is otherwise called the sea of Gennesareth for according to the accustomable forme of speaking among the Iewes a lake is called the Sea Before wee come to the rest of the circumstances of this appearing it is expedient that we answere to a question that may bee mooued It may bee asked What is the cause that the Lord appeared so oft times vnto His Disciples and so many wayes Had it not bene enough that He had appeared to them once or twise What needed there any moe appearings To this answere There are many great and weightie causes wherefore the Lord so oft times appeared and first because Faith in the Resurrection from the dead is a thing very hardly and with great difficultie is obtained for among all the Articles of Faith there is none more contrarie to Nature none appeares to be more vncredible therefore the Lord that He might assure them that He was risen and that they who are in Him one day shall rise againe Hee appeared so oft times after His Resurrection Next Hee appeared so ofâ— to His Disciples because they were to be the first witnesses of His Resurrection to the worlde and therefore they needed oft times to see the Lorde to haue heard to haue handled Him and beene conuersant with Him they needed all sortes of helpes to their Faith that they might haue full assurance themselues that the Lorde was risen to the ende that with the greater assurance and with a full perswasion as the Apostle speakes of himselfe 1. Thess 1.5 They might testifie of that Resurrection both by viue voyce and by writting vnto others euen to the comming of the Lord Himselfe indeede so it came to passe for because Hee appeared and reueiled Himselfe so oft times to them therefore they had exceeding great libertie and boldnesse both in their speaking and writting for the frequent seeing of Him hearing of Him speaking and conuersing with Him made them to haue a full perswasion and this full perswasion made them to haue great libertie freedome for he that hath not a full perswasion in his owne heart should not take vpon him to be a witnesse and preacher of the graces and benefites of God to others neither will he euer be able to speake of them with freedome to mooue others to beleeue Thirdly He appeared so oft vnto His Apostles not for their causâ— only but for our cause also who should liue in the ages to come Hee had respect vnto the weaknesse of our Faith for euery particular appearing of Christ serues to helpe and further something our Faith our Faith degree by degree is helped by euery one of them and all His appearings beeing joyned together are a sure and stedfast ground to our Faith to repose vpon they serue to consummate our Faith and to bring it to a full perfection for when wee heare or reade that our Lord appeared at any time to His Disciples wee should thinke and settle this in our minde that when Hee appeared vnto them Hee appeared vnto vs when they saw Him we saw Him when vvee reade that the Lord appeared vnto Peter I should thinke that He appeared vnto mee vvhen Iohn and the rest of the Apostles sawe Him vvith their eyes I should so esteeme that I sawe Him vvith mine eyes and whensoeuer they sawe Him I should lay my count that I saw Him for vvhen that Peter sayes That with his eyes he saw His Maiestie 2. Pet. 1.16 hee pointes out Christ as it were with his finger to bee seene with mine eyes When Paul sayes That the Lord was seene of him after His Resurrection 1. Cor. 15.8 hee pointes out the Lord to be seene by me When Iohn sayes Wee declare vnto you that which wee haue heard which we haue seene with these our eyes which we haue looked vpon these handes of ours haue handled of that worde of life 1. Ioh. 1.1 hee sets the Lord as it were before my face that I may see Him with mine eyes I may heare Him with mine eares and may handle Him vvith mine handes To the end that my ioy may be full as he speakes there verse 4. And therefore thou
who art a faithfull Christian hast cause to rejoyce that the LORD so oft times appeared to His Disciples for it was for thy cause for the helping and confirming of thy weake Faith that Hee appeared so oft that so thy joye may bee the more full Now I goe forward vnto the circumstance of the persons to vvhom the Lord appeared There vvere seuen of the Disciples gathered together for hee sayes There were together Simon Peter and Thomas who was called Didimus and Nathanael of Cana in Galilie and the two sonnes of Zebedeus and two other Disciples No question it vvas not by fortune or chance or rashly that so manie of the Disciples met together at this time but it vvas by the determinate counsell and prouidence of GOD that they vvere assembled together to the ende that hee might manifâ—st and exhibite himselfe vnto them beeing assembled together When the Lord hath a purpose to communicate his graces and benefites in a great measure hee vses commonlie to call together a number of his owne in one place that hee may communicate his graces the more liberally vnto them beeing assembled together for he giues not his great graces nor vouchsafeth not his glorious presence so much to priuate persons alone as hee does to a companie of the Sainctes assembled together it is to them chiefelie that hee manifestes himselfe When the Lord was purposed to bestowe the holie Spirite what does hee hee gathers the whole number of the Apostles together in one place vpon the daye of the Pentecoste and then hee sendes vpon them all the holie Spirite in the forme of fierie and clouen tongues as wee reade in the seconde Chapter of the Actes and the thirde verse Our owne experience may bee a sufficient proofe vnto vs of this for when finde we the Spirit of God to worke moste powerfullie and the graces of God moste aboundantlie to bee bestowed vpon vs not when wee are our selfe alone but when we are assembled together with y e Saincts to exercise the meanes of grace to heare the worde to offer vp our prayers together vnto God and to be partakers of the SacrameÌ„ts And therefore if thou wouldest haue the Spirite of GOD present with thee and looke for anie grace despise not the fellowship contemne not the assemblie of the Lordes Sainctes Now amongst the rest that are here counted out we see Thomas is reckoned to be one The first time that the Lord appeared to his Disciples assembled together the doore beeing shut THOMAS was not present but the seconde time that the LORD appeared vnto them hee vvas present vvith them Now in this thirde appearing of the Lord to his Disciples he is also present vvith them This example of THOMAS letteth vs see that a man vvho is gone astraye and hath wandred out of the way after that once the Lord mercifully takes him by the hand and sets him in the way of grace that he will be carefull constantly to walke into that way with the rest of the faithfull who are walking in that way he will be loath to separate himselfe from their societie after that once the Lord beginnes freely to giue grace He ceases neuer to heape grace vpon grace while grace be crowned with glorie for it is true that the Apostle sayes That Hee who hath begunne the good worke in vs will performe it vnto the day of Jesus Christ Phil. 1.6 And our Sauiour sayes To euery man that hath it shall be giuen and he shall haue abundance So happie is the man in whom the Lord hath once begunne to worke for He will neuer leaue him while He performe His worke in him Now when they are met together what is their exercise They goe to the fishing the occasion of this exercise comes of Peter hee purposed to separate himselfe from the rest and therefore hee sayes vnto them J goe a fishing The rest cannot bee content to sunder from him but they offer their companie to him and they say We also will goe with thee What made Thomas and the rest of the Disciples so vnwillingly to sunder from Peter and what made euery one of them so desirous to enjoye the companie of another Was this by chance or fortoun No but it was by the speciall prouidence of GOD that same prouidence that before gathered them together now keepes and retaines them together in such sort that albeit some of them were of purpose to haue sundred themselues from the rest yet the rest will not sunder from them The Lord will keepe them together that Hee may communicate vnto them such grace as Hee would not bestowe vpon them beeing sundered one from another He shewes Himselfe He vouchsafes His presence in them to their exceeding joy and comfort beeing now together whereas if they had bene separated if Peter had gone one way Thomas another and the rest the third it is not likely that the Lord would haue manifested Himselfe vnto them But how is this that the Disciples of the Lord who were ordained and appointed by the Lorde Himselfe to an higher calling to the Apostleship to be witnesses and preachers to the world of these things which they saw and heard of Him goe to the fishing Might they leaue that high calling and take themselues to so base and contemptible an exercise I answere that heerein they doe nothing amisse for albeit they were appointed and designed by the Lord to be Apostles yet in effect they were not as yet Apostles they had not entered to that calling neither were they meete for it vntill the time that they were endued with power from on high and before they had receiued the Holy Spirit in the forme of firie and clouen tongues in the day of the Pentecoste And further what fault was it albeit they had entred to their office of the Apostleship that they should bee exercised in an honest and lawfull occupation and should worke with their handes as we read of the Apostle Paul vvho in sundrie places professes that he laboured with his owne hands for his liuing Read 1. Cor. 4.12 1. Thess 2.9 2 Thess 3.8 Now when they agree to remaine together They went their way and entred into a ship straightway and they goe to take fish and to seeke bodily food for themselues but the Lord in the meane time is calling them to a better thing euen to see the Lord and to enjoy His gracious presence which was a great deale better than all their fishing and all that they could haue gained by that exercise and Peter after that once he knew that it was the LORD which spake to them counted more of His presence than of all the huge and great number of fishes that were inclosed within the nette for hee leaues them all after that once he knew that it was the Lord that spake and shewed Himselfe present vnto them yea he castes himselfe into the Sea and hazardes his life to the end he may come speedily and soone vnto the Lord.
them with the confession of their owne want thereafter He giues them the blessing Cast out the net on the right side of the shâ—p and theÌ„ He promises them a good successe for He sayes Ye shall find But what needed y â— Lord to bid theÌ„ cast out the nets that they might get fishes Might not the Lord haue giuen them fish enough without their trauell labour Might He not by His omnipotent power haue coÌ„manded the fish to haue inclosed theÌ„selues within the nets Yes no doubt without their trauell labour He might haue filled the ship abouÌ„dantly with fish yet it was His pleasure good will y t they should worke labour take paines vpon theÌ„ first before He gâ—ue them any blessing He would not blesse theÌ„ with a good successe except they laboured Further ye may see here how great pleasure and liking the Lord has to see men painful in their calling for albeit they had bin molested troubled all the night with labouring yet the Lord will haue theÌ„ to cast out their net again in the morning to the end y t He might giue a blessing to their trauels Indeed it is true that Hee desires not our labour as if it could staÌ„d Him in any stead He giues not a successe to it as if it merited any thing at His hands for Hee giues successe increase only for His own names sake and for His Christs sake without any merit of ours for if He had not respect to Himselfe His Christ if we tooke neuer so great paines we would find but a sober successe Many find by experience y t without Him if they would paine themselues from morning till euening they can find no successe Yea when the Lord withdrawes His blessing the children of God themselues finde the proofe of this Peter and the rest of the Disciples who were with him toyled and pained themselues all the night without anie successe or profite Then the cause chiefely why the Lord requires our trauell and labour is because it is an ordinarie meane appointed by Him whereby we should finde and receiue His blessing and it is a part of our seruice and duety that the Lord has appointed to vs. For when with a simple and vpright heart wee are labouring in our calling wee are seruing the Lord. Therefore Paul charges the seruants to bee obedient to their masters with singlenesse of heart as vnto Christ meaning that in their seruice done to their masters they serue not so much men as Christ Ephes 6.5 Now the Disciples obeyed this commandement of the Lord for they cast out the net and they were not able to draw it for the multitude of â—ishes This their obedience is very commendable albeit they had bene troubled and wearied all the night and had caught nothing yet at the request of a stranger a man whom they knew not whom they supposed to be no more but a common man readilie they yeeld obedience cast out the net And this their readinesse testifies that they had exceeding great patience constaÌ„cie in enduring of trauell notwithstanding of all their labour paines preceeding What was the cause of this their patience Euen partlie because their long labouring and paines that they had taken without any successe had humbled and tamed them if they got no fish they got a better benefite they were somewhat mortified and learned patience partly because they had an hope of a good successe that the Lord should blesse them at the last therefore patientlie they endure in labouring for we see commonly that hope of vantage will sustaine a man and cause him to endure much trouble labour And this hope if it bee in the Lord who neuer leaues His owne makes the patience and enduring of labour to gette a good successe So long as thou liuest cast hope neuer off if it vvere no more but because by it thou gloâ—ifiest God for by faith and hope to obtain all good things which are necessary either to soule or bodie from the handes of the Father of lightes from whome all good things descend we glorifie Him in the multitude of His mercy By the example of the Disciples let vs learne that when we haue troubled and pained our selues very long and find but sober successe of our trauels at least to be humbled and mortified and to continue constantly in labouring waiting patiently for y e Lords blessing for as y e dâ—sciples in the end found a better successe than they could haue looked for They founde the net to bee filled with such a multitude of fishes y t they were not able to draw it so shall we find in th' end y t our patient waiting for y e Lords blessing shal not be fruiâ—lesse and without successe Nowe to goe forwarde They knewe not the Lord when at His command they cast the nette into the Sea but nowe when they see such a marueâ—lous draught of fishes inclosed within their nets they beginne to conceiue that it was the Lord that spake to them The first man who discernes Him is IOHN who describes himselfe heere to bee the Disciple whome the Lord loued and commonlie he describes himselfe in the Gospell by this stile and that because hee found the loue of God spred abroade in his heart by His Holy Spirit in an exceeding great measure IOHN saide vnto PETER It is the LORD The thing that makes IOHN to knowe that it was the Lord that spake was the extraordinarie and marueilous successe that they found in their trauels for in that successe hee sawe and considered not onelie an exceeding great power but also a wonderfull bountifulnesse and liberalitie whereupon hee gathers that it was the Lord that spake vnto them and commanded them to cast out the nette and directed them in their labour and made them to gette such successe Learne then heere by IOHNS example when the Lorde bestowes His benefites and graces on thee and when thou seest His workes by His workes and benefites to ascende to God the giuer of them and in them to acknowledge Him and His essentiall properties His power His bountifulnesse His mercie His prouidence c. For if wee weigh rightlie and deepelie consider the benefites and workes of God in them wee will finde as it were a seale of the majestie of God of His power of His mercie of His liberalitie and bountifulnesse which should mooue vs to lift vp our eyes to Heauen to beholde the Lord who is the worker and giuer of all that so with chearefulnesse and pleasure wee may glorifie Him for this is our greatest happinesse and felicitie to glorifie the majestie of our God in all thinges There are manie who when as they see the wonderous workes of God and daylie receiue benefites of Him they so rest vpon the outwarde workes and benefites that they neuer ascende to God the author and giuer of them to see Him and to glorifie Him But miserable are they who so does what euer
they bee for by so doing they not onelie depriue themselues of happinesse but also they turne the blessinges of God into a curse to them When IOHN hath informed PETER that it was the Lord vvhat does PETER It is saide When Simon Peter heard that it was the Lord hee girded his coat to him for hee was naked and cast himselfe into the Sea He shewes a great zeale and forwardnesse for in my judgement this doing of PETER proceeded not from foolish hardinesse and inconsiderate rashnesse but from a true zeale and feruent desire to meete with the Lord. Nowe will yee compare IOHN and PETER together ye will find great diuersitie of giftes IOHN knewe the Lord first and that by sight PETER knew the Lord next but by hearing for IOHN informed him IOHN was before PETER in faith knowledge but PETER who comes behinde passes IOHN who was his teacher had instructed him for he is more zealous than IOHN was IOHN exceeded in knowledge but PETER exceeded in zeale This lets vs see the trueth of that sentence of PAVL One and the selfe same Spirit worketh all gifts distributing to euery maÌ„ seuerally as he willeth 1. Corinth 12.11 Euen in the Apostles themselues for euen among them some excelled in one gift and some in another IOHN excelled in knowledge and had knowledge of the glorious person of Iesus Christ and namelie of His diuinitie as his Euangell declares for it is full of high mysteries sublime doctrine of Christ aboue the rest of the Apostles PETER excelled in zeale and forwardnesse and was more ardent in zeale than the rest as wee may reade in the Gospell PAVL excelled in labouring and painfulnesse in preaching of the Gospell for hee sayes himselfe I laboured more aboundantlie than all the Apostles 1. Corinth Chap. 15. vers 10. The LORD gaue not all graces to anie one of them but to euerie one such a measure of grace as Hee pleased neither had it beene expedient to themselues nor so profitable to others It had not beene expedient to themselues because it might haue beene that they would haue comtemned and despised others in respect of themselues It had not beene so profitable to others because others would haue enuied them for their great perfection of graces And so by this meanes the bodie of IESVS euen His Church which should bee compact and straitlie joyned together would haue beene miserablie rent asunder On the other part this inequalitie and diuersitie of giftes that the Lord giues to men is a speciall meane to joyne and knitte together the members of the misticall bodie of CHRIST for as in the bodie of man the inequalitie and diuersitie of functions giftes that are giuen to seueral members joynes and holds together y e meÌ„bers of y e body eueÌ„ so y t inequality diuersity of spiritual graces giuen to euery meÌ„ber of y e body of Christ euery one hauing neede of the helpe of another joynes and holdes together the members to make vp one compact bodie Reaâ—e of this in the first Epistle of Sainct Paul to the Corinthians Chap. 12. vers 24.25 Nowe I shall onelie marke one thing and so I shall ende All the night preceeding when the Lord Iesus was absent Johns faith and Peters zeale were languishing and dwining but in the morning when Christ returnes both Johns faith and Peters zeale beginne to reuiue and to gette newe strength and vigour Whereof we may learne that this grace of faith knowledge and zeale is wakened and raised vp by Christ who is the onelie matter and object of them for our faith and knowledge proceedes of His gracious light which shines in our darke soules Our zeale proceedes from the Spirite of Christ who by His comming kindleth a burning fire in our heartes and makes vs to burne with zeale who before were colde in the seruice of God PAVL sayes God that commanded light to shine out of darknesse is Hee who hath shined in our heartes to giue the light of the knowledge of the glorie of God in the face of Iesus Christ. 2. Cor. Chap. 4. vers 6. The wordes import that all faith and knowledge of God that wee haue is by looking vnto the face of Iesus For when wee looke vnto His face the beames of that glorie which shines in it is conueyed into our soules and lighteneth them and so workes faith and knowledge in them And when wee shall gette a full sight and see Him as Hee is clearelie face to face then wee shall bee like to Him in glorie for His glorie shall transforme vs into this same image from glorie to glorie 2. Cor. cap. 3. vers 18. Then seeing that no grace can either bee wrought or entertained in the soule without the presence of the Lord Iesus and the beholding of His countenance wee should bee carefull constantlie to looke to His face and beholde His glorie in the mirrour of the worde so long as wee are in this pilgrimage that so hereafter wee may see Him face to face and so bee made partakers of His glorie which Hee hath purchased to all them that loue Him by the shedding of His owne blood To Him therefore with the Father and the Holie Spirite bee all praise and glorie AMEN THE XLIX LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST IOHN CHAP. XXI verse 8 But the other Disciples came by shippe for they were not farre from land but about two hundreth cubites and they drâ—we the nette with fishes verse 9 As soone then as they were come to land they sawe hote coales and fish layed thereon and bread verse 10 Iesus saide vnto them Bring of the fishes which yee haue nowe caught verse 11 Simon Peter stepped foorth and drewe the nette to lande full of great fishes an hundreth fiftie and three and albeit there were so manie yet was not the nette broken verse 12 Iesus saide vnto them Come and dine And none of the Disciples durst aske him Who art thou seeing they knewe that hee was the Lord. verse 13 Iesus then came and tooke bread and gaue them and fish likewise verse 14 This is now the third time that Iesus shewed himselfe to his Disciples after that hee was risen againe from the dead IN this seuenth appearing of Christ Beloued Brethren in the Lord wee haue spoken alreadie of the place of His appearing to vvit at the Sea of Tiberias and vve haue spoken of the persons to vvhome Hee appeared vvho vveâ—e seuen in number the Lord by His secret prouidence gathered them together and kept them together albeit some vvâ—uld haue suâ—dered from the râ—st to the ende the Lord might shew Himselfe vâ—to them being assembled together in one place Wâ—e hauâ— spoken of their exercise how they vvere fishiâ—g but got little successe howbeit they had laboured all the night We told you also of the Lords appearing to them He shewes Himselfe to them in the morning and finding y t they had caught nothing Hee biddes them cast out the net on the
it not saide The violent take the Kingdome of Heauen by force Matth. Chap. 11. vers 12. And doth not the Lord recommend importunitie and earnestnesse in crauing by the Parable of the widowe who importunated the vnrighteous Iudge To this I answere It is lawfull indeede to seeke continually the increase and growth of knowledge as well as of all other spirituall graces yea it is a thing that the Lord recommends vnto vs commands But of what knowledge should we seeke the increase Only the knowledge of these thinges that are reueiled and set downe in the Olde and New Testament it is the Lords will that wee euer grow in knowledge of these thinges and that we goe from knowledge to knowledge But this increase of knowledge is farre different from curiositie in seeking new reuelations besides the thinges that are reueiled in the writes of the Prophets and the Apostles The Lord likes well growth of knowledge but Hee mislikes curiositie yea I say to thee if thou seekest a clearer and more ample reuelation than that which is alreadie set downe in the Olde and New Testament thou offendest highly the Majestie of God for by so doing thou deniest that Christ when Hee came into the world brought with Him a full and perfect reuelation of all things necessarie Read what the Apostle Paul sayes Rom. 10.6 Now to end shortly In the last wordes of our Text wee haue set downe the Conclusion of this appearing of Christ whereof we haue spoken wherein hee telles that it was the third in number for hee sayes This nowe is the third time that Iesus shewed Himselfe vnto His Disciples after He was raised againe from the dead I thinke he calles it the third in number not absolutely but in respect of the Disciples and so the words import for it is said This is the third time that He shewed Himselfe vnto His Disciples for if we number precisely the particular appearing of Christ after His Resurrection vnto this time whereof wee haue any mention made in the Scripture we will finde that this is the eight in number He shewed Himselfe first to Marie Magdalene Next to other certaine women Thirdly to the two Apostles who were going to Emmaus Fourthly to Simon Peter Fifthly to lames as we may read 1. Cor. 15.6 Sixtly to the Disciples assembled together in Ierusalem Thomas only being absent Seuenthly to the same Disciples assembled together Thomas beeing present with them Eightly He appeared vnto these sâ—uen at this time when they were fishing Nowe it was not without cause that the Lord reueiled Himselfe so oft after Hee rose againe No question Hee did it not onely to confirme the Disciples of the trueth of His Resurrection but also for our cause that wee might haue stedfast faith and full assurance that Hee is risen againe for our comfort And it is the Lords will that when wee reade that there were so many that saw Him with their eyes heard Him spake with Him handeled Him and haunted with Him wee should bee fully perswaded and assured of His Resurrection But I will not insist in this matter because I haue spoken of it alreadie Nowe seeing the Lord has had such a great care of our faith that by beleeuing we might haue comfort seeing so oft times and to so manie Hee appeared the LORD make these meanes effectuall to worke and to encrease faith in vs that both in our life and especiallie in the houre of death wee may haue matter of rejoycing in Him To vvhome vvith the Father and the Holie Spirit bee all praise and honour AMEN THE L. LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST IHON CHAP. XXI verse 15 So when they had dined Iesus said to Simon Peter Simon the sonne of Iona louest thou me more than these He said vnto him Yea Lord thou knowest that I loue thee He said vnto him Feede my lambes verse 16 He said to him againe the second time Simon the sonne of Iona louest thou me He said vnto him Yea Lord thou knowest that I loue thee He said vnto him Feede my sheepe verse 17 He said vnto him the third time Simon the sonne of Iona louest thou me Peter was sorie because hee said to him the third time Louest thou mee and said vnto him Lord thou knowest all thinges thou knowest that I loue thee Iesus said to him Feede my sheepe WEE haue hearde these dayes past Beloued in the Lord Iesus of the third generall appearance of the Lord Iesus after His glorious Resurrection The place we heard was by the Sea of Tiberias The persons to whom He appeared we heard were seuen in number The manner how He appeared was by miracle by wonderfull working He shewes a miracle in the Sea by taking of many great fishes there Then by land by the extraordinary preparation of meat fire to His disciples comming off the sea to the land To this He joyned y e third miracle in keeping whole the net so that there was not a threed broken notwithstanding of the great number of fishes taken therein Thereafter as He manifested Himselfe in His Godhead diuine power in working of miracles so He comes on more familiarly manifestes Himselfe in His humane nature lets theÌ„ see y t He was a maÌ„ ate drunk with theÌ„ as other men therfore He sits down dines with them Hee eates Himself giues them to eat also Then hauing dined He enters in conference with Peter which conference we haue to entreat of this day as God wil giue vs grace The end of His conference with Peter was not to make him an Vniuersall Bishop His Vicar here on y e earth as the Papists speake that is to say To make vp a Popedome for the Papists make these words relatiue to that promise which they saye He made to Peter before Matth. 16.18 I say vnto thee Thou art Peter vpon this Rocke I will build my Kirke That was not the end but y e end of it was to restore him again to his own rowm of th'Apostleship from the which he fell for Peter had made a foule defection froÌ„ his Lord he denied Him thrise so by this defection threefold denial he depriued himselfe of his rowm of th'Apostleship wherunto he was called Looke how verily Judas fell by his traitorie as verilie did Peter fall for he that denies the Lord Iesus vnto the time he bee restored againe he cannot be a Christian man let bee an Apostle or Minister So in a word the ende of this conference was to restore Peter again by taking out of his own mouth a threefold confession of his loue to the Lord of the hatred of that foule sin which hee committed by denying of the Lord. Indeed it is true at Christs first meeting with His disciples at HierusaleÌ„ in a maÌ„ner he was restored because he got a dâ—rection with the rest to go foorth preach the Gospel where Christ sayes As my Father sends me so send J
asked here Seeing the Lord recommends vnto Peter only His chosen to bee fed instructed by him should th'Apostles haue care of any other to feed and instruct except of th'Elect onelie Let it bee that these Elect at the first hand bee like wolues and tygers yet the care of them onelie in this place is recommended vnto Peter and the rest by the Lorde I answere Albeit the Lorde recommende chiefelie the care of th'Elect yet He excludes not the reprobate for it is the Lordes vvill that foode should bee offered to them also for the Pastor cannot know who are Elect or Reprobate therfore it is his duety to compt all to be elected to feed all he must not be rash in judgemeÌ„t No man should be so bold as to presume to giue out sentence who are chosen or who are reprobate for the LORD knoweth who are His 2. Timoth. 2.19 Therefore let him stay vntill the Lord discerne who are elect let the Pastor count all to be Lambes and endeauoure to feede all yet his labours shall only be fruitfull in the Elect for there is neuer one that is not chosen that shall bee tamed by the word all the preachings in the world will not tame a reprobate but he shall euer be a Wolfe indeede a reprobate may for a season take on a sheepe skinne that is hee may play the hyprocrite and may seeme outwardly to some to be godly but truely and in effect he will neuer haue true Faith nor godlinesse Now last this would not be passed by that the Lord bids Peter feed His not another mans sheepe but His owne sheepe that is them whome He hath redeemed and ransomed with His owne blood This word containes an argument wherefore the sheepe should be fed to wit because they are the Lords ransomed with His owne blood And more than that this vvord admonishes the Pastor that hee count not the slocke to be his owne but the Lords and that hee feede it not to himselfe to vse the slocke for his owne gaine and aduantage Iohn Baptist sayes Hee that hath the bride is the bridegroome but the friend of the bridegroome reioyces greatly because of the bridegroomes voyce Ioh. 3.29 By these words Iohn signifies that he wooed not the Church to himselfe but to the Lord who is the bridegroome And Paul sayes to the Coâ—inthians I am iealous ouer you with godly iealousie for I haue prepared you for one husband to present you as a pure virgine to Christ 2. Cor. 11.2 For it is the most abhominable and detestable sacriledge that can bee to spoyle Christ the bridegroome of the Church His bride to take from Him His flocke which Hee hath redeemed with such a precious and glorious ransome euen the blood of God Acts 20.28 Seeing then that the Lord hath committed to Pastors the Church which is His owne Spouse and His Flocke which He hath redeemed with no lesse price than His own blood the LORD giue Pastours grace to be carefull in feeding of them with that food of life furnished vnto them by the LORD Iesâ—s To whome with the Father and the Holy Spirit bee all praise and honour for euer AMEN THE LI. LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST IOHN CHAP. XXI verse 18 Verely verely I say vnto thee When thou wast yong thou girdedst thy selfe and walkest whither thou wouldest but when thou shalt be olde thou shalt stretch out thine hands and another shall gird thee and leade thee whither thou wouldest not verse 19 And this spake Hee signifying by what death hee should glorifie God And when He had said thus He said to him Follow Me. THE last day beloued Brethren we heard how the Lord in this third appearing vnto His Disciples after His Resurrection when He dined with them fedde them and giuing them meat out of His owne hande hee entered in conference with Peter especially the ende of the conference Hee had with Peter was to restore Peter to that dignitie of the Apostleship from which hâ—e had fallen and whereof hee had made himselfe vnworthie through his apostasie and threefolde deniall of his Lord and Master Hee askes him one thing thrise Simon the sonne of Iona louest thou Me Peter answeres and giues a threefold confession Lord thou knowest that I loue thee The LORD answeres againe and giues a threefold absolution and pronounces the sentence of his restoring againe three times Fâ—â—de then sayes the Lord My Lambes feede My sheepe This Hee does to confirme him the better in his restoring for when a man hath made a foule defection froÌ„ God his heart is not easily perswaded of grace againe it will not be at one or two sentences it will not be a promise at one time that will giue him an assurance of the fauour of God againe therefore to giue Peter the greater assurance of grace Hee triples ouer the sentence and giues him three times that commission to feede His lambes and sheepe The last day Brethren as the Lord gaue the grace we opened the meaning of these words and last of these words My Lambes my sheepe now only thus farre I adde for your consolation ye see all this loue that Peter confesses toward the Lord Himselfe Hee turnes it ouer vpon His Lambes His Sheepe and flocke in a word vpon His Church Marke it The Pastor or Minister will no sooner professe loue to his Lord that placed him in that roome but as soone the Lord will send him to the flocke people if thou loue me the Lord will say loue my people the Lord will place His people in His own roome looke what loue any will beare to Him He will haue it declared and vttered to His Saints more He does it three times so oft as Peter professes loue so oft He sends him to y e people look how oft the Pastor professes loue to Christ as oft He will send him to y e people if he say I loue thee then He will answere feede my Lambes if He will say a thousand times He wil answere feede my flocke manifest it vpon them that carie mine Image This shewes the wonderfull loue that God beares to His Elect He will haue all that dutie that is due to Him to be translated vpon His Church so that whosoeuer doe not their dutie to y e Church I â—ffirme I say professe as they will they haue no loue to Christ thou mayest stand vp and bable vaunt of thy loue to Christ but I say there is no such loue in thine heart as thou professest with thy mouth If thou sâ—yest thou louest God doest not thy dutie to man thou art a lyar 1. Joh. 4.18 To goe forward to this Text When He hath restored him to the office of Apostleship which by his deniall justly he had lost Hee giues him the office with a knot as we speak He forewarnes him in the entrie that hee shall get no rest in it and when he hath done all what shall be his
haue Christ going before vs bearing our crosse suffering for our sins theÌ„ we following Him bearing His crosse Hee dying first takes away the bitternesse of death and makes our death an entrie to life euerlasting There is a comfort that Peter gettes in death so that death is made sweet to him and a port to life euerlasting Brethren ye must vnderstand That Christ goes before vs not onelie in His death but in His Resurrection and life for at this time Hee vvas risen So PETER followes Him in His Resurrection There is a double comfort Wee followe IESVS CHRIST not onelie in His death but also in His Resurrection to raise vs to life againe for it is by vertue of that life of IESVS CHRIST that vvee rise to life after our death Whereto intendes all this Euen to encourage vs to suffer Martyredome and seale the Gospell with our blood if it shall please the Lord to call vs and happie art thou if the Lord shall honour thee so that Hee will haue thee to beare His Crosse to suffer as an innocent who for a thousand of thine own sinnes art worthy of an ignominious death desperate departure for if He goe before thee if He beare thy Crosse the bitternesse of death is taken from thee because the guiltinesse of thy sinne is forgiuen Now the Lord furnish vs strength courage that we shame not His cause if it shall please Him to call vs to suffer for the Name of Iesus To whome with the Father and Holie Spirit be all praise and glorie for euer AMEN THE LII LECTVRE OF THE RESVRRECTION OF CHRIST IHON CHAP. XXI verse 20 Then Peter turned about and saw the Disciple whom Iesus loued following which had also leaned on His brest at supper and had saide Lord which is he that betrayeth thee verse 21 When Peter therefore saw him he said to Iesus Lord what shall this man doe verse 22 Iesus said vnto Him If I will that he tarie till J come what is it to thee follow thou Me. verse 23 Then went this word abroad among the brethren that this disciple should not die Yet Iesus saide to him he shall not die but if I will that he tarie till J come what is it to thee verse 24 This is that disciple which testifieth of these things and wrote those things and we know that his testimonie is true verse 25 Now there are also many other things which Jesus did the which if they should be written euery one I suppose the world could not containe the bookes that should be written Amen WEE haue heard Brethren that after the Lord had restored Peter to the dignitie of the Apostle shippe from the which hee had fallen by his threefold deniall of his Master in the Hall of the High Priest he addes to his absolution restitution a premonition and forewarning forewarning him that in the end of his Apostleship when he should become an old man he should close vp and seale his Apostleship with his blood When thou wast young sayes the Lord to Peter thou girdedst thy selfe thou knittedst thy clothes when thou wast wont to goe any way and wentedst whither thou pleasedst but when thou shalt be olde thou shalt not get credence to gird thy selfe to put thy girdle about thee but thou shalt stretch out thine hands and another shall giâ—d thee with cordes and chaines and shall lead thee away not where it shall please thee but where it shall please him he shall lead thee to the death We heard Iohn opened vp the meaning of these words and told vs that Christ thereby signified that Peter should glorifie God by a violent death and thereafter to encourage him the Lord goes before him bids Peter follow Him signifying thereby that His death had taken away the bitternesse of death and that by vertue of His Resurrection he should liue againe Now in the wordes that we haue read in the first place we haue set downe a new conference betweene the Lord and Peter for while they are in the waye the Lorde going before and Peter following there they fall againe in a new conference and Peter as he was ay too rash albeit very zealous so here rashly he demandes a curious question and it is about Iohn the writter of this Gospell the question is What should Iohn doe What shall this man doe Shall he not follow the Lord The Lord had not bidden him follow Him it might haue contented Peter well enough that the Lord had kept silence of Iohn and he to haue done the thing that the Lord bade him Nowe Brethren ere I come to the question yee must marke the occasions of this curiositie of Peter I perceiue the first occasion that brings Peter to this question is this When they are going together Peter lookes ouer his shoulder and turnes him about and turnes his eye from the Lord and looked to Iohn that apparantly followed a farâ—e off vpon which followes this curiositie and this learnes vs this lesson If the Lord bid thee followe Him in any calling what euer it be as Hee bade Peter followe Him to the death that was his calling for a man followes God in his calling all lawfull callings are but a following of the LORD learne here to be wiser than Peter hold thine eye constantly vpon Him thine heart vpon Him in thy calling followe Him foot for foot tread thou in the same footsteps so farre as He shall giue the grace decline not neither to the right hand nor to the left as to thine eye looke that it be neuer drawne froÌ„ Him looke not ouer thy shoulder to see what is behind thee but look constantly on the Lord for if thou doe this thou loses y e sight of Him that of need force shall make thee to settle backe in thy calling Peter but once turning goes one foot backward falles back froÌ„ y t course wherin he should haue walked Paul Philip. 3.14 considered this well in that race he ranne to be partaker of ResurrectioÌ„ life euerlasting he sayes I neuer looke behind me I neuer looke ouer my shoulder to see what is behind but mine eye is euer vpon the marke to get the price of the high calling of God Seeing then we haue taken vp a course to walke in to that life Iesus Christ beeing the forerunner and breaking vp the Heauen holde thine eye continually vpon the forerunner follow Him in thine own calling and see that thine eye goe neuer off Him It is the felicitie of the creature to follow Him and thou must follow the Lord in thine owne calling there is the first occasioÌ„ VpoÌ„ this followes another for piece piece he comes to his curiosity turning himselfe about looking to John Whom the Lord loued who was very familiar with the Lord apparantly hath vsed the Lord more homely than any of the rest for he was the man which leaned on Iesus brest at supper for wheÌ„ y e Lord
curiositie First hee forgets his owne calling Secondly hee is too curious in his brothers calling Lastly hee does an injurie to Christ makes an eruption vpon Christes office to spoyle Him of His authoritie and power to call all and thinke ye not albeit the Lord now adayes as Hee did Peter then but He lookes with an angrie eye vpon curious men This rebuke is registrated to rebuke thee if thou be giuen to curiositie But it would bee marked that albeit the Lord be angrie with Peter yet neuerthelesse He forgets not His mercie When He found him to linger in his course the Lord leaues him not but He puts out His hand and takes holde of him therefore He sayes Follow thou me This is the mercie of the Lord towards His owne that when He rebukes them He leaues them not there but He will put out His hand and pull them in againe to Him No neuer one of vs would goe forward except by a new grace pulled vs forward except the Lord led vs by the hand there could not be such a thing as a man could be saued There is such a stumbling and wauering in our nature therefore Paul saide I striue by all meanes to attaine to the Resurrection of the dead Yea rather sayes he I am comprehended of Christ Jesus Phil. 3.11 12. Therefore ay cry for grace after grace otherwise thou canst not goe one foot right forwarde much lesse perseuere to the end Ye will aske a question Should neuer one of vs be carefull of our brother in his calling Humanitie required that Peter should bee carefull of John is this the thing the Lord reprooues and forbids I answere there is a great difference betweene carefulnesse and curiositie it is not carefulnesse Hee findes fault with Woe to him that cares for himselfe only for why should not euery one of vs be helping one another be carefull to bring forward the stragling body But it is curiositie that the Lord reprooues Then the lesson is this shortly Take heede that by thy doing men should be very wise thou hinderest not thy selfe more by thy curiositie when thou enterest into the affaires of thy brother than thou profitest him by thy care when thou beginnest to care for him beware thou fall not in curiositie passe neuer the bounds of thy calling for there is none that hath a calling but it is joyned with care of his brother the higher calling the greater care The Kings calling requires a great care of others in the Policie Such like the Ministers calling is joyned vvith a care for the people not to feed himself but to feed the people It is joyned with a speciall and wonderfull care so that night and day his eye should not bee off his flocke Yet men should beware that their care turne not to curiositie Curiositie is very dangerous A curious man has no loue to thee for he takes pleasure in the hurt euill that falles to thee and it is his meat drinke hee feedes vpon the euill report of others Iohn subjoynes that when the Disciples hearde of these words of Christ they giue them a strange glosse They say Iohn should not die A faire glosse a faire commentarie Iohn sayes This was not the meaning of the Lord He spake not such a thing He saide not to him hee should not die and that was not His minde Hee tolde not whether hee should liue or die But Hee saide If I will hee tarrie till I come what is that to thee Yee see howe readie men are to misconstrue and peruert the one-folde meaning of the LORD If the Disciples vvho heard His owne liuelie voyce vvere so readie to giue a false and a lying glosse to His vvorde vvhich they hearde Him speake I pray you vvhat maruell is it albeit men daylie misconstrue the vvritten vvorde of GOD and neuer leaue off to father lies vpon the Scriptures Yee vvonder at the Papistes I vvonder not Looke the whole Scriptures these Traitors conclude euer a lye vpon the trueth Looke the Rhemish newe Testament and the rest of their vvrittes I vvonder not at them but I vvonder at this Considering this grossenesse of ignorance and the propension of men naturallie to misconstrue GODS Worde and Will that there is so much as one to open the trueth and to vnderstand the right meaning of the vvorde The cause of this misconstruing is not of the Scripture as if it vvere doubtsome harde obscure or as a nose of vvaxe as they blaspheme but the fault is partlie in the blindnesse of the minde of man and partlie in the peruersitie and frowardnesse of the vvill and malice of the heart for it falles out that either such is the blindnesse of man by nature they knowe not the minde of the LORDE or else if they knowe His minde yet vvillinglie they desire not to knowe it but to remaine ignorant for it is true that the Apostle PETER sayes They that are vnlearned and vnstable wreast the SCRIPTVRES to their owne destruction 2 Pet. Chap. 3. vers 16. And PAVL sayes Jf our GOSPELL bee hidden it is hidden to them who perishes whose eyes the god of this world hath blinded 2. Cor. 4.34 Againe we may perceiue that a lye ran speedily abroad and was easily receiued got soone place in the hearts of th'Apostles wherof we may learn that the multitude commonly drinkes in lyes vanities fables and Heresies very suddenly because naturally they are very bent thereunto Yet this errour remained not long vvith th'Apostles for after that according to the Lordes promise extraordinarily in the day of the PENTECOSTE they vvere illuminated and after the Holie Spirite vvas giuen them vvho called all thinges to remembrance which the Lord had spoken vnto them when Hee was present with them and gaue them the true meaning and vnderstanding of all these thinges as CHRIST sayes Joh. chap. 14. vers 26. This lye concerning IOHN euanished then all the Disciples knewe the LORDES meaning when Hee spake these wordes to Peter of Iohn If I will that hee tarrie till I come what is that to thee But the Papishe Kirke and that Antichristian Kingdome this day makes it plaine enough vnto vs howe bent men are by nature to receiue maintaine and entertaine lyes and vanities for in that Kingdome not onelie is this fable of IOHN retained but also an hudge multitude of lyes and of the vanities and fantasies of the braine of man which were deuised by the GENTILES are allowed and receiued for almoste all the Religion of the Papistes like a Beggers cloake is clouted and patched together partlie of the fables and superstitions of the GENTILES and partlie of the Rites and Ceremonies of the Iewes vvhich vvere abolished by the comming of CHRIST If anie vvould knowe what fables they maintaine and giue out concerning Iohn let them reade their golden Legende Nowe in the last two verses of this Euangell the Apostle concludes his GOSPELL and in the conclusion hee telles vs vvho
this vvas of vvhome Christ and PETER vvere speaking of in the vvordes preceeding Euen that same Disciple which testifies of these thinges and wrote these thinges And so telling that it vvâ—s hee that vvitnessed and wrote these things he closes vp his Euangel and puts his seale to it But the vvordes are to bee marked IOHN sayes hee testifies these thinges meaning by worde and then againe hee wrote the same thinges So hee bore vvitnesse of the Gospell of Christ both by worde and writing Whereof wee haue to lâ—arne That wee should striue all manner of vvayes to beare vvitnesse vnto the trueth of the GOSPELL of CHRIST by vvorde by vvrit by confession of our mouthes if need require by the shedding of our blood also for the moe testimonies be giuen to the trueth the greater glorie redounds to God Againe we see Iohn when he hath ended the Historie of the Gospell hee affixes and puts to his seale to it We shuld follow this exaÌ„ple for after we haue preached Christ we should be readie to seale it if it were with our blood Looke to Paul after he had preached Christ to the Philippians and had laboured to make them to beleeue he sayes to them he would rejoyce and be glad with them although hee were offered vp vpon the sacrifice and seruice of their Faith that is hee would bee content to seale vp the Gospel which he had preached to them by his death that their Faith might be the more confirmed Now in the wordes following hee sets downe the cause which mooued him to put to his seale to his Gospel for sayes he We know that his testimonie is true So the cause of his sealing of his Gospell is the full perswasion and assurance which hee had of the trueth And indeede hee only who hath full assurance in his heart of the trueth of these thinges that hee teaches can confidently put his seale to his preaching and therefore a Minister should endeuoure to haue full perswasion in his heart that he may speake with libertie and great assurance as Paul speakes of himselfe 1. Thess 1.5 and that if neede require hee may seale the Gospell with his owne blood Now to come to the last verse and to end shortly The Apostle meetes a question that some curious men might haue demanded they might haue asked Are all the thinges which Christ did and the wonders which Hee wrought set downe in write by thee To this he answeres That all things which Iesus did are not written for sayes hee There are many other things which Iesus did the which if they were written euery one I suppose the world could not containe the bookes that should be written And so hee wrote not all things which Christ did neither was he of purpose to write them neither was he able to write them all for if hee had written them all the whole world could not haue contained the bookes that should haue bene written Vpon this question we may perceiue how curious the braine of man is and how immoderate his ingine and appetite is there is nothing can content it it cannot be contented with all things vvhich are vvritten in the Olde and Newe Testament with all thinges which are written by the Prophets the Euangelists and Apostles but it is euer seeking for more seeking for new reuelations new miracles and such other thinges The Deuill knowes well enough this to bee our nature and therefore he propines to the world an huge multitude of lies vanities fables especially to the Kingdome of the Antichrist to the Pope and his shauelings who caÌ„not content themselues with the written word of God the Olde New Testament but gripes greedily to vnwritten verities as they call them to traditions which falsely they call diuine Apostolicke Ecclesiasticke so that all men may perceiue that the Popish religion serues not so much to worke Faith and bring Saluation to men as to satisfie their curiositie and immoderate appetite Let men take pleasure in that religion as they will they may wel get their foolish appetit pleased satisfied but they wil neuer get true Faith nor Saluation by it Then marke of Johns answere to this question That men should keepe a measure in speaking and writting these thinges which appertaine to religion and the worship of God this did they whome the Lord of olde employed to be penne-men of the Olde and New Testament this did the Prophets this did the Apostles this did the Euangelists for in their writting they respected two things First the infinite and incomprehensible Majestie of God and the vnmeasurable and vnspeakable greatnesse and multitude of those thinges that might haue bene written of that infinite and most glorious Majestie of God and of Iesus Christ his Sonne Next they respected the meane measure of mans vnderstanding and likewise of his Faith which is not capable of all these things which may be written therefore by the Lords directioÌ„ in their writting they applied themselues to our capacity endeuoured to set down these things which y e Spirit of God thought might sufficiently serue for our Faith SaluatioÌ„ for if all things had bene written concerning that infinite incomprehensible Majestie our memories had bene ouerwhelmed our vnderstandings confounded our Faith ouerthrowne Lamentable experience lets vs see this day that the Papist by their vnwritten verities infinite traditions ouerwhelme the world subuert the Faith of men Now last the forme of speech which the Euangelist vses would be considered when he sayes If all things were written the world could not containe the bookes that should be written Men vvould thinke that this speech were hyperbolicke that the speech farre exceeds the matter it selfe but indeed it is not so but rather in this forme of speech the Holy Spirit submits Himselfe to our infirmitie applies Himselfe to our weake capacitie sets down an infinite incomprehensible matter in a forme of speaking which we may easily vnderstand for when John spake this he considered beheld that incomprehensible infinite deepenesse of that glorious Majestie which dwelt in Christ bodily and which manifested it selfe in His works miracles which was able not only to swallow vp all the senses and cogitations of all men but also the Heauen the earth and when He endeuoureth in some measure to expresse that incomprehensible Highnes after such a speech in such tearmes as wee might vnderstand hee sayes The world could not containe the bookes that should be written of Christ His works if they were all written which speech imports that no liuing creature is able sufficieÌ„tly to set out by wordes to expresse that glorious Majestie and His glorious wotks and miracles that He wrought according as their dignitie and excellencie required for the whole world is not able to comprehend that infinite Majestie for this wee should not bee ignorant of that this whole Scripture of the Olde and New Testament written by the Prophets
they saw Him they worshipped Him What made them to fall downe and worship Him What sawe they into Him No question they sawe in Him a glorious Majestie By all appearance at this time He has shewed himselfe in greater glory than Hee did of before So beholding His glorie on the one part and their owne vnworthinesse on the other as Hee approaches vnto them they humblie fall downne and worship Him This their behauiour teaches vs that wheresoeuer the Lord of Glorie is present there He should be worshipped and adored His presence requires adoration Seest thou the Lord present with thee Then in humilitie fall downe and worshippe Him But thou wilt saye I cannot see Him how then can I adore Him Th'Apostles saw His glorious presence with their eyes therefore they ought to haue worshipped Him but as for vs who liue in these dayes after His ascension to Heauen we see Him not and therefore how can wee worship Him But I answere thee It is true thou seest Him not nowe vvith the eyes of thy bodie but thou seest Him with the eyes of thy soule thou seest Him with the eyes of faith thou seest Him in the vvorde and Sacraments first crucified and then glorified And if thou wilt not worship Him when thou seest Him here present in the worde and Sacraments thou wouldest not haue worshipped Him if thou haddest seene Him with the eyes of thy body face to face These profane bodies vvho vvill not vvorship Him nowe vvhen they see Him present in the mirrour of the Gospell they vvill neuer gette leaue to worship Him in the Kingdome of Heauen Thinkest thou not that the Lord is seene present in His word What meanes Paul then vvhen he sayes that an vnlearned man comming into the meetinges of the faithfull where manie are prophecying finding himselfe rebuked and judged of all and the secrets of his heart made manâ—fest that hee will fall downe on his face and worshippe GOD and saye plainlie That GOD is among them indeede 1. Corinth Chap. 14. vers 24. and 25. What sees the vnlearned man among them that makes him to fall down and giue such a confession No question but the glorious light of the GOSPELL shines into his soule and Christ offers Himselfe present to bee seene by the eye of faith The faithfull this daye by experience finde in their meetings this same presence of the Lord And therefore it becomes vs in all our meetinges euer to vvorshippe the Lord and to sit vvith feare and reuerence to heare the worde and to prepare our heartes to receiue the Holie Spirite whome the Lord promises and offers with the preaching of the worde to all His Chosen Againe this their behauiour teaches vs what force and power there is in the glorious presence of Christ Iesus His presence is powerfull to humble and bowe both the bodie and soule of the creature This made Paul to saye that at the Name of IESVS euerie knee should bowe both of thinges in Heauen and thinges in earth and thinges vnder the earth Philipp chap. 2. vers 20. For that sublimitie and highnesse vvhereunto the Father hath exalted Him is so effectuall and powerfull in all creatures and of all sortes that either sweetlie willinglie it mooues them to worship Him in all humilitie or else it breakes bruises them with fearcenesse and violence and compels out perforce obedience of them The sight and sense of this sublimitie and highnesse makes the blessed Angels in Heauen in all reuerence to worshippe Him The sense of this sublimitie makes the Sainctes on earth when either they speake or heare of Him reuerentlie and in humilitie to bow both their bodies and their soules vnto Him And by the contrarie The sight and sense of this same sublimitie raises vp in the Deuill and his angelles such horroures and dread as cannot bee expressed The sense of this sublimitie makes the wicked howe proude and jollie soeuer they bee in their owne conceite oft times when they heare of Him to quake and tremble The Euangelist Matthew notes That notwithstanding of their worshipping of Him yet some of them doubted But who were these that doubted Euen some of these who before worshipped Him And what mooued them to doubt Apparantly that same that before moued them to worship Him moues them also now to doubt to wit that extraordinary vnaccustomed majesty and glory wherein Iesus appeared to them which scarcely they could haue deemed to bee so great wonderfull And certainly the glory of the Lord sitting this day in the HeaueÌ„s at the right hand of the Father is so exceeding great woÌ„derfull that if it were permitted to vs to behold it as it is with our bodily eyes such is y e corruption of our nature we could not but doubt whether He were y e Christ who vvas so far humbled abased in y e earth of whom we heard before in y e Gospel Beside this cause y e difficulty to belieue this article of the ResurrectioÌ„ of y e dead seemes likewise to haue furthered their doubting for indeed amoÌ„g al y e articles of our belief there is none more coÌ„trary to nature nor harder to belieue thaÌ„ this article of y e ResurrectioÌ„ of our bodies froÌ„ y e dead Nature can neuer be perswaded y t a dead body y t has bin a prey to worms is resolued in dust ashes can rise vp againe to life But as of all articles there is none harder to be belieued so there is none more necessary to saluatioÌ„ nor none that brings greater consolation And therefore the Lord that vve might haue the more full assurance and perswasion thereof tooke great paines vpon Himselfe and for the space of fourtie dayes Hee remained vpon the earth after His Resurrection and sundry times shewed Himselfe to His Disciples and manie other of the Faithfull that all occasion of doubting might bee remooued and so their joye and comfort might bee the greater Nowe this doubting of the Disciples lets vs see vvhat is the disposition of the heartes of the Godlie euen in their best exercises For euen their best exercises are euer accompanied vvith a piece of doubting of vvant of infirmitie c. their vvorshipping of GOD is vvith doubting their prayer is vvith infirmitie and vvauering of the minde their meditation falles from GOD and spirituall things to carnall and earthly things their hearing of the word is euer with some piece of loathing their Faith is mixed with infidelitie so that before they can come to any great measure of grace they must striue and wrestle through many infirmities and ouercome many difficulties and tentations so that the best man euen in his best workes hath no matter of rejoycing if the Lord would enter in judgement with him Yee haue heard the disciples behauiour now look how the Lord meetes them First He drawes nearer to them and then He enters in communing with them for it is said Iesus came and spake vnto them He
that is y t by baptisme they should seale vp y t Gospel which they had teached before But to whō should they go out to whō should they preach Whome should they baptize Not the Jewes only but all Nations Marke sayes Goe yee into all the world and preach the Gospell to euery creature As if He had said My power is extended to all Nations to euery creature and therefore this my Gospell your Ministerie whereby my power is manifested and declared to all must likewise bee extended to all creatures in the world These words of the Lord furnishes vs sundrie lessons for our instruction First we may learne heere that this office of the Apostleship which the Lord committes to His Disciples is not a bare stile of honour No but it is a laborious and painefull charge and calling they are commanded to goe out into the worlde to preach diligently the Gospell to euery creature The Pope his Cardinalles and Bishops vaunt bragge that they are the successours of the Apostles they clame this as a stile of honour to themselues but in the meane time they refuse to vndertake any paines and trauell for mans saluation as the Apostles did these idle bellies liue in carnall securitie and sensualitie taking their pleasure and pastime and deceitfully gather in to themselues the substance of the world and commit the charge of Preaching to Vicares and Curates as if the Gospell were too base an exercise for them and a thing whereof they had just occasion to be ashamed and therefore let them clame what stiles they list to themselues they are nothing lesse than successours to the Apostles Next these wordes lets vs see that there are two points of y e Ministerie for y e Lord giues His Apostles commission to preach the Gospell to baptize so the Ministers haue these two things enjoyned vnto them to preach the word to minister the Sacraments we heare nothing spoken here of offering of a Sacrifice either bloody or vnbloody or of a Priesthood and no question if there had bene such a thing or at least if it had bene a matter of such importance so necessarie as the Pope his shauelings say the Lord would altogether haue misknowne it passed it ouer with silence but He would haue spoken something of it to His Apostles so it is but a follie vanitie to thinke that since Christ hath once offered Himself a propitiatory Sacrifice for y e Redemption of the world that now there remaines any propitiatory Sacrifice in the Church The Lord hath put an end to them all by His death Sacrifice there is no Priesthood cōmitted either to the Apostles before or to the Ministers now but that whereby y e preaching of y e word they offer the soules of men womē in a Sacrifice to y e Lord Away with that deuilish sacrifice of y e Masse whereby the Pope and his Clergy deceiues the world making men beleeue that daylie they offer vp Christ againe as a propitiatorie sacrifice to the Father for the sinnes of the quicke and the dead No there is no propitiatorie sacrifice nowe left to the Kirke That sacrifice which the Lord once offered vpon y e crosse is sufficient perfect enough to take away the sinnes of y e world Thirdly these words teach vs y e these two poincts of the calling of the Ministery Teaching Baptizing were not cōmitted to diuerse sundry persons but both were cōmitted to one y e selfe same person So that he who is ordained to preach is ordained to baptize and he who cānot preach has no power nor libertie granted him of the Lord to baptize and if hee baptize he does it without the Lords commandement he has no warrant of Him and therfore his doing is but a profanation of that Holie Sacramēt of Baptisme This baptizing of infants which is ministred by priuate men has no warrant nor allowāce of God much lesse that which is done by women Fourthly out of these words we may learne what order ought to be kept in the ministring of Baptisme to wit the word must be first preached the couenant of grace and the glad tidings of saluation must be first opened vp vnto vs and then Baptisme should be ministred to seale vp that same word and couenant which before was preached Wherefore serues Baptisme except first the word be preached Baptisme is a seale And what serues y e seale for if there be nothing to be sealed Wherefore can it serue if the charter of the word preceed not Therfore except the preaching of the couenant of grace preceede Baptisme is nothing but an vnprofitable ceremony and a dead element Nowe in whose name should this Sacrament of Baptisme be ministred The Lord sayes IN THE NAME OF THE FATHER AND OF THE SONNE AND OF THE HOLY GHOST That is Yee shall baptize by the authoritie power of the Father the Sonne of the Holy Ghost Whereof we haue to learne That the power efficacie of Baptisme depends neither vpon the power of the Minister who baptizes nor vpon the force nor power of the words pronounced by the Minister in Baptisme as if there were any such power or operation in the wordes as the Papists falsely attribute vnto them but all the force efficacie of Baptisme depends vpon the power of God only And therefore it is the duety of him who is baptized to lift vp his eyes his heart to Heauen and to craue the blessing efficacy thereof from God only Next it would be noeed y t He sayes not in a generall tearme Baptise in the name of God but Hee sayes distinctly Baptise in the Name of the Father and of the Sonne and of the Holy Ghost Therefore it is the duety of him who is baptized not to content himselfe with a confused knowledge and consideration of God but hee ought to behold that glorious Majesty y t incomprehensible essence distinctly in the Trinitie of the persons that is three distinct persons in one Godhead for faith is a distinct a cleare knowledge apprehension of the Majesty of God for whosoeuer truely and sincerely beleeues puts his confidēce in God he finds sensibly by experiēce that all good things flowe first from the Father as the fountaine of all grace and goodnesse through the Sonne as Mediator by whom all grace is conueyed and cōmunicated vnto men and by the Holie Ghost who powerfully effectually works all grace in y e heart Last we see here a cleare and a plaine naming of the three distinct persons of the Godhead the Lord names distinctly The Father the Sonne the holy Ghost In all the Old Testament we will not reade so plaine cleare a distinction of y e three persons of y e Godhead Then learne here that Iesus Christ the Sonne of God brought first of all into the world a distinct knowledge of God and that He first of all distinctly named The
hee can contemne Baptisme And if a man contemne Baptisme let him boast of his faith as hee pleases that contempt is a sure token that he had neuer faith neither shall he get eternall life So Baptisme in some respect is necessarie to saluation that is it must not be contemned or neglected for if a man contemne or neglect it he cannot get saluation but it is not simplie and absolutelie necessary to saluation that is incase a man contemne it not nor neglect it he may be saued without it It is the contempt and not the want of it that hurtes man for a man may bee ingraffed in Christ by Faith and may bee saued by Christ vvithout the seale of Baptisme for the grace of God is not so bound and tyed to th' ordinarie meanes and outwarde helpes but that the Lord may vvorke without them when and where Hee pleases And the Lord Iesus as apparantly importes no lesse in these vvordes than that Baptisme is not absolutelie necessarie to saluation for vvhen after the promise He settes downe the cause of damnation Hee speakes not a vvorde of Baptisme for Hee sayes onelie Hee that beleeues not shall bee damned of sette purpose He leaues out Baptisme And if it had beene absolutelie necessarie to saluation no question Hee vvoulde not haue misknowne it and passed it by Now last marke the meaning of these wordes Hee that beleeues not This negation and vvant of faith comprehendes first all sinne vvhatsoeuer against the morall Law whether it be originall sinne wherein we are conceiued and borne or actuall sinne proceeding from originall sinne for if we haue not Faith in the Lord Iesus all these sinnes whatsoeuer will be laid to our charge will bring vs to damnation Next this negation and want of Faith comprehends that infidelitie rebellion stubburnesse whereby men disdainfully refuse reject that grace which the Lord offers freely in Iesus Christ to sinners this sinne of infidelitie of all sinnes is the greatest most detestable and therefore procures most speedie fearfull heauie judgement and therefore Christ sayes He that beleeues not is condemned alreadie Joh. 3 18. These wordes importr that there is no delay of judgement to him who disdainfully rejects grace but the judgement is present and alreadie past against him and hee giues a reason taken from that rebellion and repining against the Majestie of the only begotten Sonne of God hee is condemned alreadie sayes he Because hee hath not beleeued in the Name of that only begotten Sonne of God The Lord saue vs from this cursed sinne of infidelitie for where it is all other sinnes are laid to mens charge it drawes out most speedily most fearfull judgements Now it followes that we speake of the second promise to them that beleeue These tokens shall follow them that beleeue in my Name they shall cast out deuills and shall speake with new tongues and shall take away serpents and if they shall drinke any deadly thing it shall not hurt them they shall lay their hands on the sicke and they shall recouer The former promise was of life eternall to them who beleeue this promise is of the gift of working miracles He promises that the Holy Spirit should giue to them that beleeue a power gift to worke miracles We may not thinke that this power is common to all that euery particular Christian who beleeues should haue this gift neither must we thinke that it should be extended to all times and ages But this promise is to be restrained to a certaine number of particular persons on whome it shall please the Lord to bestowe this gift of working of miracles and it is to be restrained bounded within a certaine time it must bee restrained to that first age and infancie of the Church to the first time that the Gospell beganne to be preached for then it was expedient and necessarie that the Gospell which was vnknowne and not heard of before to the world should be confirmed by miracles and therefore we ought not to looke for new miracles in this age wherein we liue because the Gospell is alreadie sufficiently confirmed by the miracles wrought in that first age of the Church by Christ and His Apostles and them that immediatly succeeded The Papistes indeede bragge much of miracles that are dayly wrought in their Church but their miracles are such as Christ foretold that false Christs and false Apostles should worke and that the Antichrist should worke at his comming Matth. 24.24 And they are these which Paul calles lying signes and wonders which notwithstanding hee sayes are effectuall in them who perish because they receiued not the loue of the trueth Now yee see here there is a promise of sundrie great and excellent things to be wrought by some of the faithfull in the first age of the Church as namely casting out of Deuils of speaking with newe tongues taking away serpents the drinking of deadly and poysonable things without harme the healing of sicke folkes by laying on of their hands wherein I purpose not particularly to insist but onely to marke some thinges generally for our edification Consider first the order of these promises which the Lord makes to them which beleeue First Hee promises life Saluation thereafter He promises working of miracles the promise of life is a promise of the greatest miracle that euer was wrought in the world as for other miracles they are but workes signes and tokens of that life Saluation that was to be wrought which farre surpasses all other miracles The Lord Himselfe testifies vnto vs that all the miracles which were wrought in the first age of the Church were counted but like as many fignes and tokens of life and Saluation to be wrought by Him When He sayes Matth. 9.6 That ye may know that the Sonne of man hath authoritie on earth to forgiue sinnes I will restore to health this man that is sicke of the Palsey then He sayes to the sicke man Arise take vp thy bed and goe to thine house Where He lets vs see that the miracle of bodily health was a signe token of a greater grace miracle euē of Remissiō of sins life euerlasting Whereupō we marke this lesson That Faith is neuer vvithout some miracle it hath euer one miracle or other following vpon it Indeede it hath not alwayes with it such miracles as were wrought in the first age of the Church as casting out of deuils healing of diseases yet it neuer vvants that greatest miracle of all the miracle of Regeneration of life and Saluation vvhich Christ Himselfe lets vs see is more to be marueiled at than all the miracles heere promised for vvhen the seuentie disciples who were sent out with power to worke miracles returned rejoycing that they had wrought such great things that they had cast out deuils and healed diseases He said vnto them Albeit I haue giuen you power to cast out deuils to tread on serpents and
these thinges and none other thinges So that if they teach not these thinges but their owne dreames and fantasies they haue nothing adoe vvith this promise for if they keepe not the condition vvhat vvarrant can they haue to looke for the promise Nowe howe farre the Papistes are from keeping this condition from teaching the doctrine of Christ onelie it is more than manifest and they are blind that sees it not for in stead of the doctrine of the Gospell they teach their owne traditions dreames and fantasies They haue banished the Spirite of Trueth and haue bewitched the vvorlde vvith their lyes and vanities Therefore seeing the felicitie and happinesse both of Pastor and people standes in this To finde the Lordes presence with them in this pilgrimage the Lord grant that both Pastor and people may striue carefullie to holde fast the doctrine of the Gospell and that they may conforme their liues thereunto that so vvith confidence they may claime to this promise of the presence of Christ To whome with the Father and the Holie Spirit bee all praise and honour for euermore AMEN THE LV. LECTVRE OF THE ASCENSION OF CHRIST MARKE CHAP. XXVI verse 19 So after the Lord had spoken vnto them hee was receiued into heauen and sate at the right hand of God LVKE CHAP. XXIIII verse 50 Afterward hee led them out into Bethania and lift vp his handes and blessed them verse 51 And it came to passe that as hee blessed them hee departed from them and was carried vp into heauen verse 52 And they worshipped him and returned to Hierusalem with great ioye ACTS CHAP. I. verse 6 When they therefore were come together they asked of him saying Lord wilt thou at this time restore the Kingdome to Israel verse 7 And hee saide vnto them It is for you to knowe the times or the seasons which the Father hath put in his owne power verse 8 Bu yee shall receiue power of the holie Ghost when hee shall come on you and ye shall bee witnesses vnto mee both in Hierusalem and in all Judea and in Samaria and vnto the vttermost partes of the earth verse 9 And when he had spoken these things while they beheld he was taken vp for a cloude tooke him vp out of their sight verse 10 And while they looked stedfastlie toward heauen as hee went behold two men stood by them in white apparell BELOVED BRETHREN IN CHRIST vvee haue alreadie insisted at length in the Historie of the LORDES Resurrection vvherein vvee shewed you how often Hee appeared to His owne and especiallie to His Apostles to the ende that not onelie they themselues might bee more fullie perswaded of His Resurrection but also vvith the greater confidence and libertie they might speake therof to others In His last appearing to His Apostles vvee sawe Hee gaue them a commission and charge To goe out to the vvorlde to preach the Gospell and to baptize In the Name of the Father of the Sonne and of the Holy Ghost but He willes them to teach nothing else but onelie these things all these things which He had taught them before And to th' end He might the more easily moue them willingly and chearfully to vndertake discharge this calling first He sets down His vnspeakable incomprehensible power wherupoÌ„ is is grounded shewing them that al power in heaueÌ„ in earth was giuen vnto him Next He subjoynes a threefold promise of blessing to them in the discharging of their Ministery The first is a promise of life saluation to them who beleeue are baptized The second is a promise of th'extraordinary miraculous gifts of the H. Spirite The third is a promise of His own powerfull presence to continue with them vnto th' end of the world vpon condition That they faithfully discharge their calling teach these things all these things onlie these things which the Lord had taught no other Now it rests that we speak of the History of His Ascension to Heauen which we haue briefelie and in fewe vvordes in th'Euangelistes for Matthew and Iohn makes no mention of it Marke touches it shortlie in his Gospell Luke also speakes something of it in his Gospell but hee insistes in it more largely in setting downe the Circumstances of it in the first Chapter of the Actes of the Apostles In the words which wee haue presently read we will see how the LORD leades His Disciples out to Bethania we will see what conference communication is betwixt the Lord and them we will shew how He blessed them we will see the manner of His Ascension what was the behauiour of the Apostles while Hee was ascending to Heauen and looked stedfastly to the Heauen as He went vp Then to come to the words Luke sayes He led them out into Bethania This was the place from the which the Lord ascended vp to the Heauen and therefore of set purpose He leades them out of Ierusalem to this place They come not to this place by fortune or chance they come not there of their owne accorde or vpon any foresight that they themselues had No but they were ledde out of Jerusalem to see that glorious Ascension of Christ and to be partakers of His grace But who led them out It is saide The Lord ledde them out none comes to grace by aime none comes to the place vvhere grace is in dealing by fortune or chance No it is the Lord which leades them as then the Lord ledde His Apostles as it were by the hande to Bethania to see His glorie and to be made partakers of grace so it is alwayes by the LORDS secret and powerfull prouidence that any man comes to the place vvhere the LORD distributes His grace for sayes CHRIST No man can come to mee except that Father who hath sent mee draw him Ioh. Chapter 6. verse 44. Therefore if thou findest at any time by this Ministerie grace to bee communicated into thy soule in His Church ascribe neuer the praise of it to thy selfe or to thy trauell but giue the praise and honour of all to the LORD IESVS vvho had a care of thee and by His gracious prouidence bâ—ought thee there But vvho are these vvhom the Lord leades out Not all they vvho heard Him vvho knew Him vvho had conuersed vvith Him but it is only His Disciples vvhome the Lord ledde out these only vvhome He vsed most familiarly vvhom Hee loued most tenderly and vvho in a manner vvere His domestiques The number of them vvhome the LORD chooses and leades out to grace at any time is not great they are but few in respect of the multitude vvhome the Lord passes by but especially at this time it was the LORDES pleasure to choose but a few to be eye-witnesses of His glorious AsceÌ„sioÌ„ for it was y e Lords will that His AscensioÌ„ should rather be manifested made known to the world by hearing than by seeing for y e Lord prefers likes better of that
from the hope of the glorious returning of the Lord Iesus againe to Iudge the world There is nothing that furnishes such joy to the faithfull soule as this hope does Indeed it is true the Lord giues vs other grounds of consolation while we are heere namely He giues vs His Spirit to counsel guide vs through al the difficulties of our pilgrimage the joy that the faithfull finde in His presence is very great He giues vs Faith also to coÌ„fort vs whereby in some measure presently we feele the presence of Christ His spirituall graces in our soules but except with y e Spirit Faith we had a hope y t the Lord Iesus should returne againe in His own time in glory we could not haue solide joy consolatioÌ„ for if in this life only we hoped in Christ had no hope y t He would returne againe in glory raise our mortall bodies froÌ„ y e dead theÌ„ as y e Apostle saies of all men we were most miserable 1. Cor. 15.19 why shuld not y e hope of this returning coÌ„fort our soules make them to rejoyce for at His returning we look hope for y e glorifying of these our bodies for eternall life Paul sayes That froÌ„ the heauens we look for the Sauiour euen the Lord Iesus who shall change our vile body that it may be fashioned like vnto His glorious body Philip. 3.20.21 And when it shal be made manifest we shal be made like Him for we shall see Him as He is 1 Joh. 3.2 Yea we haue greater cause of joy comfort of the hope of His returning againe thaÌ„ all y e Apostles had of y e sight of His ascending to heauen in their preseÌ„ce for y e ascension of y e Lord albeit it was very glorious coÌ„fortable to theÌ„ yet it chaÌ„ged not their bodies nor made theÌ„ like His glorious body but His glorious returning again froÌ„ the heauens shall change both their bodies our vile corruptible bodies and make them conformable to His glorious body Now happie is y e man who earnestly lookes waits for the blessed glorious coÌ„ming againe of the Lord to judgement for y t hope shall comfort vphold him in all his troubles distresses Now come to y t disciples part we haue suÌ„dry things expressed what they doe y e first is after y e Angels reproued them for their standing gazing to y e heauens it is said They returned to Jerusalem with great ioy They take well with the reproofe they stay no longer gazing there but according to y e Lords directioÌ„ they go to Jerusalem to waite for y t Spirit which He promised to them they obey y e Lords coÌ„mandemeÌ„t they obey with great joy But what made them so to rejoyce This joy proceeded partly from y e sight of His glorious ascensioÌ„ into heaueÌ„ which they saw with their eyes partly froÌ„ y t which they heard by y e Angels of His glorious returning descending again out of y e heauens yet all this which both they saw heard would not haue wroght so great a joy in theÌ„ except y e Lord Iesus who was sitting in y e heauens at y e right hand of y e Father had bin effectuall in them had powerfully wroght this joy in their soules for this joy that y e holy Spirit works in y e hearts of y e Lords Elect is a sure argumeÌ„t infallible demoÌ„stratioÌ„ y t y e Lord Iesus is reigning in y e heaueÌ„s for the Kingdome of God is righteousnes ioy peace in the holy Ghâ—st Rom. 14.17 Now if ye will coÌ„pare this joy which at this time they had with all the joy y t euer they had before yea euen when y e Lord Iesus was walking with them in the flesh they enjoyed His bodily presence ye shal find y t this joy surpassed by many degrees all their preceeding joy whereby we may learne this lesson that neither y e bodily presence of y e Lord Iesus augments or perfectes y e joy of y e soule neither His bodily abseÌ„ce stayes or hinders any wise y t joy but y t all this joy which y e faithfull find proceedes from the effectual preseÌ„ce powerful operatioÌ„ of y e holy Spirit in the soule The grosse carnal Papists think they caÌ„not haue mater of rejoycing except in y e Lords Supper they haue y e body of Christ bodily locally present that is except y t with y e mouth of the body they eat deuoure swallow vp the very body flesh of Iesus Christ except that after that same manner they drinke His blood but vaine Papist thou deceiuest thy selfe for neither does the bodily presence furnish joy neither does the bodily abseÌ„ce hinder joy but all true joy that the soule finds proceedes from the effectuall presence operatioÌ„ of the Spirit Yet to speak something further of this purpose It would be narrowly considered what could be the cause ground of this joy of the Disciples for if we looke to it by the outward appearance they had litle matter or cause of rejoycing at this time when the Lord is gone froÌ„ them Indeede when the Lord Iesus was with them when He led them out into Bethania any man might thinke they had matter of rejoycing to follow such a gracious guide but now when He hath left the earth ascended to heauen left them behind Him what matter could they haue of so great joy in their returning to Jerusalem I answere notwithstanding they wanted now the bodily presence of Christ yet they wanted not matter of great joy for in stead of His bodily presence the Lord gaue them Faith Hope Faith apprehending taking holde of the Lord Iesus sitting in the heauens in glorie at the right hand of the Father Hope waiting constantly for His blessed glorious returning againe in the appointed time to Iudgement This Faith Hope that the Lord giues vs in this pilgrimage recompenses sufficiently the bodily absence of the Lord Iesus from vs if wee haue Faith Hope we haue euermore matter of rejoycing where Faith Hope is they bring euer with them patience joy euen in the mids of all afflictioÌ„s The Apostle Paul declares this by his own experience For the Gospels sake sayes he I suffer these things but I am not ashamed for I know whom I haue beleeued and I am perswaded that hee is able to keepe that which I haue coÌ„mitted to him against that day 2. Tim. 1.12 There he lets vs see what made him to bee so patient vnder afflictions to wit the sense of the power of Christ which hee founde in his soule by faith by the which power hee was perswaded that Christ was able to keepe in the heauens that life which hee had committed vnto him and the hope that hee had of His glorious returning in that great day wherin the Lord should render
him that which before he had committed vnto him to be kept The soule y t has this faith hope has no cause to complaine of His bodily absence for they recompense it abundaÌ„tlie but if thou wantest this faith apprehending thy Sauiour w t all His graces this hope waiting patieÌ„tly for His returning thou caÌ„st haue no true matter of rejoycing albeit thou hadst al y â— outward benefits of y e world heaped abundantly vpoÌ„ thee Now come to y e next thing that the disciples doe vvhen they are returned to Hierusalem it it saide that they went vp into an vpper chamber then is reckoned out particularly who they were where abode both Peter Iames Iohn Andrew Philip Thomas Bartlemew Matthew James the son of Alpheus Simon Zelotes Iudas Iames brother after he subjoynes in a general word The women particularly Mary the mother of Iesus his brethren These were they who most familiarly conuersed w t Iesus whom he kept together while he was in the world now when he is gone out of y e world ascended to heauen they abide together And what was their exercise They all continued with one accord in prayer supplicatioÌ„ This was an holy exercise they seuered theÌ„selues froÌ„ y e rest of y e world withdrue theÌ„selues from worldly impedimeÌ„ts kept theÌ„selues alone together to th' end they might entertain nourish y t joy which they fouÌ„d of the beholding of y t glorious AsceÌ„sion of Christ through y e hope y t they had of his glorious returning again to judgemeÌ„t whereof th'Angels had instructed theÌ„ Then mark the lesson they y t rejoyce together in Iesus desire to be seuered from the coÌ„mon society of meÌ„ froÌ„ outward distractions impediments desire to remain liue together The childreÌ„ of God delite take pleasure in the society one of another and good reason they so doe for wheÌ„ this life is ended they shal remain liue together in heauen without any seuering Yea further al spiritual graces are acquired entertained only in the society of the Saints without this society no faith hope joy nor grace of Christ caÌ„ be gotten or intertained al grace y t is giueÌ„ a maÌ„ is giuen to him as a meÌ„ber of y t body as to one of the Saints Therfore wheÌ„ Paul speakes of any grace or benefite y t the Lord is to bestow on any faithful maÌ„ coÌ„monly he vses to say thâ—t that grace is withall the Saints as when he wishes to th' Ephesians the sense of the breadth the leÌ„gth the depth the height of that loue of God in Christ he wishes they might be able to coÌ„prehend it with al the Saints Eph. 3.18 Likewise wheÌ„ he prayes y t y e Thessalonians might haue their hearts established in holines before God he craues that this establishmeÌ„t might be with all the Saints 1 Thess 3.13 speaking of y e riches of y e glory of y e inheritaÌ„ce he sayes y u shalt neuer get it but amoÌ„g y e Saints Eph. 1.18 for as one member being cut off froÌ„ y e body can receiue no sappe nor life froÌ„ it euen so if thou be cut off froÌ„ y e socitie of y e Saints froÌ„ y e Kirk of God y u shalt neuer get any grace of Christ to conclude our joy blessednes will be perfected in the kingdome of heaueÌ„ in y e society fellowship of the Saints Many meÌ„ despise disdaine y e society of y e Lords Saints here on earth they count them vile contemptible the offscourings of the world they scarcely will giue them a countenaÌ„ce yet in the meane time they flatter theÌ„selues foolishly that they shal be in heauen as soone as they but if thou haue no pleasure in their societie here in earth thou shalt finde thou shalt neuer get that priuiledge to enjoy any grace or blessing with them in the heauen I giue thee this doome the Lord shall ratify it one day Now wheÌ„ the disciples are met together in the vpper chamber they stay not there but Luke in the last words of his gospel sayes that They were continually in the Temple praising and lauding God And this is the third thing that y e disciples doe after they haue stayed for a space in y e vpper chamber occupied in holy exercises in prayer and supplication they beginne to be more bold and they take greater courage vnto them and they goe out into a publike place to the Temple to vse these same spirituall exercises which they vsed in the vpper chamber for the Apostles with the Lordes brethren with Marie his mother and other holy women assembled publikely in the Temple and there praised and glorified God We see heere what are these meanes wherby spiritual graces are intertained increased in y e societie of y e Saints to wit the preaching of the Gospel prayers supplications praising blessing of God in Psalmes Hymnes spirituall songs holy communication without these holy exercises no faith no hope no joy no grace of Christ can either be obtained or entertained increased if thou contemnest despisest these exercises thou needest neuer to looke for grace Againe we see here y t they assemble as frequeÌ„tly in as great number as they may or can in y e most publike solemne place they could find for they came together with one accord in y e TeÌ„ple this they do to y e intent y t both greater glory might redouÌ„d to y e Lord greater joy coÌ„fort to theÌ„selues the more frequent that y e assemblies of y e Saints be the more publike solemne the place of their meeting be the greater the more effectuall is the Lords presence among them the greater is their joy the greater glory redounds to God for if the Lord has promised That where two or three are gathered together in his name there he wil be in the middes of theÌ„ Mat. 18.20 Much more where the Saincts are frequently in great number gathered together in a publicke solemne place for spirituall exercises will the Lord manifest His powerful presence amoÌ„g them The fourth and last thing that th'Apostles doe is set downe by Marke in the last verse of his Gospel where we haue two things expressely mentioned First the going out of the disciples to preach to the worlde Next the successe that the Lord gaue to their preaching These two points comprehend the summe and substance of al the history of th' Acts of th'Apostles Then first he saies They went foorth and preached euery where That grace y t they got theÌ„selues they are careful to coÌ„municate it to others But when was this that they went out into the worlde Was it immediatly after the Lords Ascension Was it before they receiued the holy Spirit were sufficiently furnished with grace theÌ„selues No but they stayed still in
Hierusalem according to the Lords coÌ„mandemeÌ„t til they got that promised Spirit with His graces Then assoone aâ— they haue receiued the H. Spirit with His graces and were sufficienly furnishâ—d theÌ„selues they goe out to coÌ„municate that grâ—ce to the world wherewith they themselues were replenished beginning at Hierusaâ—eÌ„ then going throughout all Judea then to Samaria last to the vtmost parts of th' earth This doing of the disciples serues to teach these who intende to entâ—r into that holy calling of the ministery how they ought to behaue theÌ„sâ—lues They must not suddeÌ„ly rashly goe out to preach the Gospel before they bee well furnished themselues but they should keepe themselues close vsing holy meanes and exercises till they find themselues to be furnished with grace in some measure but being once furnished with grace it is the Lordes will that they keepe themselues no more close but that they goe out and communicate that same grace vnto others for the Lord giues them no spirituall graces to keepe to themselues but to th' end that they may employ them to the weale edification of others Men should beware of these two extremities first that they presume not to goe out to preach to others till they bee first well furnished themselues next when they are furnished with grace that they let not Gods graces rest within themselues but that they vse them chearfully for the benefite of the Kirke But if we consider more narrowly this going out of the disciples we wil find it to be extraordinarie and miraculous it fell out altogether vnexspected of the Iewes no the Iewes neuer thought that thinges should haue fallen out so either concerning Christ Himselfe or His disciples for as coÌ„cerning Christ they thought they should neuer haue heard any more of Him except cursed and detestable speaches of Him for they had nowe handeled Him shamefully they had railed on Him and crucified Him putting Him to an ignominious death and after Hee was buried and risen they perswaded the guarde y t watched the sepulchre to noise abroad that his discipleâ— had come by night stollen him away so they thought there should haue bene no more of Him But beholde vpon a suddaine the Lord vnexspected of them by His powerfull prouidence makes His glory to be sounded throughout the whole world and whereas they thought He should haue bene buried for euer in shame Hee is exalted to a wonderfull glory And as concerning the disciples The Iewes thought they durst neuer haue presumed to haue opened their mouthes againe to speake of the Name of Christ for they thought they were all but sillie based bodies who sled away when their Master was taken and were offended at His ignominious death and terrified and astonished with that sorrowfull spectacle that they saw when He hung vpon the crosse neither durst they presume to meete together againe openly for feare of their liues But while the Iewes are thus thinking and beleeue that there shall neuer be any moâ—e worde of Christ behold vpon a suddain when they thinke nothing lesse His disciples come out publickly in their presence and before the whole world holding out bearing before them y t crucifiâ—d man boldly charging the worlde to beleeue in Him From whence comes this that they vvho before vvere so dâ—shed and based that sledde away before durst nowe meet together so openly and preach with such boldnesse and libertie Him of vvhome before they vvere ashamed Euen from that incomprehensible vvonderfull power of Christ their King who was now sitting in the Heauens in glory vvho according to His promise sent vpon them His holy Spirit and indued them vvith power froÌ„ an hight Now the last thing is the successe that the Lord giues vnto their preaching He saies The Lord wrought with them and confirmed the worde with signes that followed If ye reade th' Acts of th'Apostles ye vvill see the successe has bene marueilous for within a short space by their Ministery they brought gâ—eat multitudes not onely of the Jewes but also of the Gentiles to th' obedience of Christ and by them suddenly the face of the world was changed The cause of this great successe th'Euangelist marks to be the Lords vvorking vvith them confirming the vvord that they preached vvith signes and vvonders When it is said that the Lord wrought with them we may not thinke that they vvere the chiefe workers and the Lord but an helper to them No the Lord is euer the chiefe worker and His faithfull seruantes but worke together with Him in the building of that spirituall house vnto the Lord He being the chiefe builder and His seruantes but worke with Him So Paul calles them workers together with God 2. Cor. 6.1 All the successe of the Gospel is His His seruantes are only instruments vsing the meanes Paul plants Apollo waters but God giues th' increase 1. Cor. 3.6.9 Now as we saw in their going out to the worlde in their preaching with boldnesse that Christes power was wonderfully manifested euen so in this great and glorious successe that they haue in their preaching that same power of Christ is as wondefully manifested If we compare this successe which the Gospel had in that first age of the Kirke of Christ with that successe which it hath now adayes we will find a great difference Many more were called then than there are nowe for then at one preaching thousandes were conuerted but nowe at many preachings scarcely will one be conuerted And what meanes this seeing the Gospel is taught nowe in that same sinceritie that it was then Euen this that by all appearance the Lord hath gathered in alreadie the most part of them who are to bee saued and the number of these that rest to be called and saued is few in these dayes in respect of that great multitude of them who were called and saued in the dayes of th'Apostles The great haruest is gathered in already onely glaininges now remaine And on the other part it importes that there is a great number ordained to wrath and destruction and therfore they are not conuerted by the preaching of the Gospel If our Gospel saith Paul bee hidden it is hidden to them that perish 2. Cor. 4.3 Now to end here Seeing all the successe of the Gospel proceedes from the powerfull presence of Christ by His Spirit the Lord grant that so long as He giues vs liberty to vse these outward meanes He would make vs find the powerfull working of the Spirit concurring with the meanes that wee may turne to Christ and so bee assured that wee shall bee saued from that wrath which is to come in that great day of the appearing of the LORD IESVS To whom with the Father and the Holy Spirit bee all praise Honour and Glorie for euer and euer AMEN FINIS